Poker Strategy l Improve Your Poker Strategy & Win More Money

Jared Tendler Explains Flow and Playing in the Zone

Tue, 22 Jan 2013 11:20:00 -0800

Soccer teams compete with similar level teams determined by leagues, sprinters only race against those with high enough qualifying times, and boxers are matched against fighters in their weight class and of a similar level.

That’s generally not the case in poker, where there is a heavy emphasis on seeking out competition that’s significantly weaker.

It is routine for a world champion to share a table with a complete amateur. In fact the difference in class between a ‘shark’ and a ‘fish’ can sometimes be equivalent to Tiger Woods playing against a 20 handicap.

Sport thrives on close competition to get spectators interested in watching. Poker players, however, make their money by finding huge edges. The problem is that if you’re only looking for easy money eventually that can harm your progress and thus the size of the edge you have in the game.

Being challenged is a necessary component for both learning and playing in the zone.

Mihaly Csikszentmihalyi

One of the most popular theories about the zone comes from Mihaly Csikszentmihalyi, a Hungarian psychology professor and the author of the book, Flow: The Psychology of Optimal Experience.

He defines being in the zone as a state of “flow” whereby a person is fully immersed in what they are doing.

In order to achieve this state of flow, a balance must be struck between the skill of the performer and the challenge of the task.

In other words, the performer needs to be sufficiently challenged and have enough skill in that task to meet the challenge.

The graphic below illustrates the relationship between skill and challenge:

As you can see, the size of the challenge and the amount of skill you have aren’t important separately; it’s the relationship between the two that determines your ability to reach the zone.

When your skills are low and the challenge is low, or when the challenge is high and your skills are also high, you can perform in the zone.

However, if you’re a massive underdog, you’ll be overwhelmed by the challenge and according to Csikszentmihalyi, you’ll experience anxiety, not flow. Conversely, if you expect to easily crush a weak opponent, you’ll get bored by a challenge that’s too low and fall out of the zone.

Boredom Takes You Out of the Zone

Boredom typically sets in when you stop feeling challenged and there is nothing new or interesting to learn. Like a computer that hasn’t been used recently, your mind is left idling just waiting to be activated.

"When just showing up is enough to have an edge, it’s easy to slip into your B- or C-game."

Boredom is the result of a perceived lack of challenge. When just showing up is enough to have an edge, it’s easy to slip into your B- or C-game.

It makes sense that poker could start to feel like a monotonous grind—you’re dealt the same hands all the time. By now, you’ve been dealt AK suited enough to consider it standard and potentially boring.

However, the players who remain passionate and motivated about seeing the nuances and unique details of how to play each hand are never bored. They see physical tells, timing tells, metagame, combinatorics, balancing ranges, G-bucks, prior action, table image, and many other small details that most players don’t consider.

The dynamics in poker are varied and constantly changing, so while the same hand can be dealt over and over, each hand will play out in a unique way. There are always new areas in which to develop an edge; the game is always evolving and there is always more to learn.

An easy way to stave off boredom is to make sure there’s always something you’re interested in learning.

Are there parts of the game that you’ve wanted to work on, but you just keep putting it off? Focusing on these areas could boost your interest and provide a challenge at the same time.

What are some ways you can stay challenged against weak opponents? Create a game within the game, such as seeing how quickly and accurately you can assess their game.

What information would be useful to gather while you’re card dead? Assume you’re going to find something about another player that will help you exploit them in future hands and your challenge is to find it.

There is always something you can do to make learning more fun and the game more challenging. This is where you should always keep a firm eye on your goals and be ready to refine them to incorporate new challenges.

Jared Tendler is a Mental Game Coach who has worked with over 250 poker players. His newest book, The Mental Game of Poker 2 is the first poker book devoted to teaching players how to play in the zone consistently. It’s available on April 23rd. Pre-order a copy now at JaredTendlerPoker.com.

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

10 More Essential Hold'em Moves: The Cold Four-Bet

Wed, 23 Jan 2013 12:15:00 -0800

By fine-tuning these tactics you’ll have more tools to put to work at the poker table. You’ll be able to better understand your opponents and how to manipulate them, and that will translate directly to money in your pocket.

We already wrote the book on the 10 Essential Texas Hold’em Moves and now we’re back to bring you 10 more.

Today we're showing you the cold four-bet, one of the strongest preflop lines you can take in Texas Hold'em.

Used either as a bluff or for value, cold four-betting will make your opponents sit up and take notice, and then usually fold.

But since it's a four-bet it's not going to be cheap so we're here to show you the ins and outs of cold four-betting profitably.

The What: Cold four-betting refers to four-betting without having already put money into the pot. For example: The player under-the-gun raises, the cut-off three-bets and you cold four-bet from the button.

Cold four-betting is an intermediate poker move and should be used with caution by the beginner.

The Why: Because you're coming into the pot cold, with no money invested, a cold four-bet indicates very strong cards and will usually fold out anything but the most premium starting hands.

The Where: Cold four-betting is only done before the flop and just like the vast majority of poker moves it works best when you're in position. And since you need a raise and a re-raise in front of you, you'll find yourself cold four-betting from late position and the blinds most often.

The When: Cold four-betting works in cash games and tournaments but since you're putting in a fourth bet it doesn't work when you're shortstacked.

Cold Four-Betting the Right Way

If you're playing low-stakes cash games and tournaments chances are you're not seeing a lot of three-bets, let alone four bets.

And when you do see someone putting in a re-re-raise before the flop it's with pocket aces or kings. That means when you cold four-bet it's going to get the table's attention.

Cold four-betting is such a strong line preflop it makes for a very effective bluffing tool. But on the flip side, when you cold four-bet with pocket aces you're only going to get action from the very best hands.

And since you'll have to commit 20 big blinds or more to the raise, cold four-betting willy-nilly can be a huge leak.

In this article we're going to break down the mechanics of the cold four-bet, show you how to use it as a bluff and for value, and then give you a quick lesson on balancing your cold four-bet range.

Cold Four-Betting as a Bluff

In order to cold four-bet bluff profitably you need to find spots where it's likely the raiser and re-raiser in front of you are playing a wide range of hands and are likely to fold to another raise.

All great players are able to cold four-bet as a bluff.

The two biggest factors in determining this are how loose/aggressive those players are and the positions from which they are raising and re-raising.

You should always be aware of how many hands your opponents are playing, and whether they're raising and re-raising more often than calling.

Look for players who are open-raising and three-betting a lot and go after them.

Similarly, most players will raise and re-raise with a wider range of hands when they're in late position.

There's a big difference between a raise and a re-raise from early position, compared to a raise from the cut-off and a re-raise from the button.

When you're cold four-bet bluffing always try to do it against players raising and re-raising from late position.

Also consider cold four-bet bluffing when you have an ace in your hand since it's less likely for your opponent to have aces or A-K.

Cold Four-Betting for Value

When cold four-betting for value look for the opposite conditions compared to when you're bluffing.

Since you're raising with what you believe is the best hand you want to do it against players who will call with worse.

Loose/passive calling stations are the best players to target since they'll rarely fold and will pay you off when they catch a piece of the flop.

While just flat-calling a three-bet when you've got a big hand like pocket aces or kings can be appealing, for beginners it's far better to raise and play a bigger pot against just one opponent.

By cold four-betting with premium hands and bluffs it will be harder for good players to read you.

You're always going to need a big hand to be cold four-betting for value but just like when you're bluffing, things change depending on what position your opponents are raising from.

At most tables you shouldn't be cold four-betting pocket jacks for value against a raise and a re-raise from early position, but it could be the right move against two loose, late-position raisers.

Balancing Your Cold Four-Bet Range

When you see an amateur cold four-bet it's safe to assume he has an absolute monster. That's because he only ever does it with pocket aces or kings.

That is to say his cold four-bet range is not balanced.

By mixing in bluffs you'll make yourself less predictable, and you'll get paid off more often when you do it with pocket aces.

Look for the loose, late-position raisers we described above and get creative with a few cold four-bet bluffs.

Most of the time you'll win the pot then and there, but when you do get five-bet shoved on and show 6♦ 7♦ you'll make your opponent think twice about folding when you do it with aces.

Cold Four-Betting in Action

Cold four-betting as a bluff is a high-risk maneuver and as you'll see in the clip below, even if you pick the perfect spot it can still blow up in your face.

In this hand from the WSOP Simon Muenz executes a great cold four-bet shove with 6♥ 7♥. It was a move that should have worked but somehow Veldhuis figures it out and makes the right call.

Read More Essential Texas Hold'em Moves:

The Limp Re-Raise Push/Fold Strategy The Isolation Play The Over-Bet The Blocking Bet Defending the Blinds Floating the Flop Set-Mining The Reverse Tell The Light Three-Bet The Semi-Bluff The Soul Read The Stop and Go The Triple-Barrel Bluff The Squeeze Play The Bluff Catcher The Check-Raise

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

10 More Essential Hold'em Moves: The Limp Re-Raise

Thu, 20 Dec 2012 15:00:00 -0800

We already wrote the book on the 10 Essential Texas Hold’em Moves and now we’re back to bring you 10 more.

Today we're talking about the limp re-raise, a move that can be used to slow-play your premium hands or bluff your opponent out of the pot preflop.

Most often used as a trapping play, limp re-raising is a powerful tool that will help you mix up your play and keep your opponents guessing about your cards.

By learning when and where to limp in and re-raise you'll have yet another way to increase your poker profits.

The What: Limp re-raising refers to limping in preflop (just calling the big blind), waiting for one of your opponents to raise, and then re-raising when the action gets back to you.

The Why: By just limping in you will trap opponents who would have folded if you had raised.

The limp re-raise works best against aggressive players.

The When: Limp re-raising can be used in cash games, sit and gos and tournaments.

The Where: The two places you'll be limp re-raising from most often are under-the-gun and in the small blind.

The Who: The limp re-raise works best against aggressive opponents who raise a lot when you limp in.

Limp Re-Raising the Right Way

The limp re-raise can be used in a number of different ways, which we'll go through, but by far the most effective way for beginners to use it is for value.

In this article we'll teach you the two main ways you can limp re-raise for value:

From under the gun with premium hands to trap your opponents. When it's folded to you in the small blind and you have a big hand.

And as an advanced bonus tip we'll show you how with a little bravery you can turn both those spots into bluffing opportunities.

Limp Re-Raising Aces from Under the Gun

Chances are if you've played much poker you've seen someone limp in from under the gun, only to three-bet when someone comes in for a raise.

It's important to recognize this spot because nine times out of ten that limp re-raiser is going to have a monster hand.

But despite the move being somewhat transparent, there are still ways to use it to get value.

Most of the time when people limp re-raise under the gun they have pocket aces.

The best time to limp re-raise with aces is in a tournament or sit and go, when you have between 10 and 30 big blinds.

And it's especially effective at an aggressive table where you can rely on someone raising after you limp.

By just limping in you're going to induce your aggressive opponents to raise in position, going after your call and the blinds and antes.

By limping you're getting them to put money into the pot with a lot of hands they would have folded if you raised.

You're also giving them an opportunity to make a big mistake by calling your re-raise.

That's why it's important to make your re-raise substantial enough to make sure they're not getting correct pot-odds to call.

Re-raising roughly three times the initial raise will get the job done.

This move is especially effective when you're shortstacked since you'll be able to re-raise all-in when someone raises behind you.

Limp Re-Raising from the Small Blind

The second most common way to use the limp re-raise to get value is when it folds to you in the small blind and you have a big hand.

You also want to make sure that the player in the big blind is aggressive and likely to raise if you open-limp.

Imagine you pick up QQ and it's folded to you in the small blind. You want to get value out of the hand but if you simply raise, your opponent will fold most of his hands.

By limping you can exploit your opponent's aggressiveness. Because he's in position and you've shown weakness by limping, he'll be inclined to raise with a lot of hands.

Good players never do the same thing with the same cards every time.

Now you've got the opportunity to put in another raise and either take down the pot right there or play post-flop with a far superior starting hand.

Limp Re-Raising as a Bluff and Balancing Your Range

As we mentioned before, the big problem with limp re-raising is that you're basically telling the table you have pocket aces.

And while for beginners that's usually true, you'll see more advanced players limp re-raising from under the gun and the small blind as a bluff.

This is effective for two reasons.

First, it will win you money straightaway because it's such a strong line to take and most people will just believe you have a monster and fold.

Secondly it will balance your limp re-raising range, that is to say it will show your opponents that just because you limp re-raised, it doesn't mean you have aces.

If you limp re-raise with 9♦ T♦ from under the gun, for example, and your opponent moves all-in you can show your bluff and laugh at how you got caught.

Then a few orbits later when you do pick up aces and limp re-raise, your opponents will be far more likely to play back at you.

Read More Essential Texas Hold'em Moves:

Push/Fold Strategy The Isolation Play The Over-Bet The Blocking Bet Defending the Blinds Floating the Flop Set-Mining The Reverse Tell The Light Three-Bet The Semi-Bluff The Soul Read The Stop and Go The Triple-Barrel Bluff The Squeeze Play The Bluff Catcher The Check-Raise

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

10 More Essential Hold'em Moves: The Re-Steal

Thu, 13 Dec 2012 14:00:00 -0800

We already wrote the book on the 10 Essential Texas Hold’em Moves and now we’re back to bring you 10 more.

Today we explain the re-steal. A close relative of the light three-bet, the re-steal is a move that will make you more money by turning your opponents' aggression against them.

With basic poker knowledge becoming more and more commonplace you'll see players raising a lot from late position to steal the blinds, especially in tournaments.

By learning when it's profitable to re-steal you'll be able to pick up that raise, plus take the blinds and antes for yourself.

The What: The re-steal refers to three-betting when you suspect a loose, aggressive player has raised to steal the blinds.

The Why: Good players know that if it folds to them on or close to the button they can raise profitably with a wide range of hands. This makes them vulnerable because much of the time their hand isn't strong enough to call a three-bet.

Good players will respect your re-steals if you do them right.

The When: The re-steal is used most often in tournaments and sit and gos when the blinds become big enough to be worth stealing.

The Where: The re-steal is often used from the blinds to defend against a late-position raiser but can also be used when you are in position.

The Who: Re-steals work best against good players since they are more likely to raise-fold marginal hands.

Re-Stealing the Right Way

To be clear: If you are re-stealing, you are bluffing, meaning you believe you have a worse hand than your opponent.

Three-betting when you think you have the best hand is simply raising for value.

So, if re-stealing is a bluff and requires your opponent to fold for you to win the pot, it's essential to understand the factors that contribute to you getting the fold you're looking for.

When looking for spots to re-steal you should consider the player you suspect of stealing, as well as your table-image, position and what kind of cards you're holding.

Another important point for beginners is that you must have a plan for the rest of the hand if you get called. It's easy to get lost when you're out of position in a three-bet pot.

Stealing from the Stealers

The re-steal relies on your opponents' malicious intent to rob the table of its blinds and antes. Being able to spot a thief is the name of the game.

Look for players who are generally good. Chances are if they're playing a winning strategy, they're raising a lot from late position.

Looser, more aggressive players are better but it's important to differentiate between maniacs who will auto-shove when you three-bet, calling stations that will call with anything and, your target, thinking players who are willing to raise-fold with marginal hands.

Do your best to spot the players stealing.

Pay attention to everyone's preflop behavior and go after the players who are always raising from the button and cut-off.

Table Image, Credibility and the Re-Steal

Like any good con man, you have to be believable to get away with your bluff.

That's why you must be aware of your own table image, just as much as that of the player you're targeting with your re-steal.

If you've been on a heater raising and three-betting with big hands for the last few orbits, people are less likely to believe you when you decide to do it as a bluff.

Generally a competent, tight-aggressive table image is best suited for re-stealing.

Your Cards, Your Position

Once you're able to recognize good spots to re-steal, there are a few other factors you should consider before making your final decision.

Position is very important, and although the most common place to re-steal from is the blinds, the best place to do it is on the button.

People will be far less likely to call if they have to play the pot out of position. This is especially true of the competent players you'll be targeting with this move.

And even though you're looking for a fold, the cards in your hand still matter. After all, if you get called you're going to have to play the rest of the hand with them.

Be careful re-stealing with hands like ace-rag and K-Q, because when you do get called you'll usually be dominated.

Lower suited connectors and small pocket pairs are good hands since you'll either hit the flop hard or miss it completely, making you less likely to lose more money with the worst hand on later streets.

Re-Stealing in Action

In perhaps the most extreme example of re-stealing ever caught on film, Phil Ivey shows us why the re-steal works so well against good, aggressive players.

The hand begins with a re-steal from Ivey in the big blind and spins out of control shortly after.

Read More Essential Texas Hold'em Moves:

10 More Essential Hold’em Moves: Push/Fold Strategy

Thu, 06 Dec 2012 10:00:00 -0800

We already wrote the book on the 10 Essential Texas Hold’em Moves and now we’re back to bring you 10 more.

Today we’re looking at how to play shortstacked by using push/fold strategy, sometimes called “all-in or fold”.

By cutting down your options to just two simple moves you’ll give yourself the best chance of getting back on your feet and making a deep run in the tournament.

By moving all-in and folding at the right times you will:

Use your stack effectively to pick up blinds and antes Avoid losing valuable chips by limping or raising only to fold later in the hand Make your double-ups count

Don't let a short stack stop you from doing big things.

The What: Push/Fold strategy is exactly what it sounds like: Reducing your list of options to either moving all-in or folding your hand before the flop.

The Why: When your stack gets below 10 big blinds you can no longer afford to spend chips by limping or raising, only to fold later in the hand. By only moving all-in or folding you can make full use of what few chips you have.

The Where: All-in or fold strategy is used in tournaments and sit and go’s, where shortstack situations are common due to rising blinds.

The When: Push/Fold poker strategy comes into play when you have 10 big blinds or less.

Push/Folding the Right Way

As a beginner poker player you should always try to make your decisions as easy and straightforward as possible.

All-in or fold strategy takes that idea to heart and by understanding a few simple concepts you’ll be able to use it to make better decisions when you’re shortstacked in poker tournaments.

The definition of “shortstacked” changes depending on who you ask but it’s generally accepted that if you have ten big blinds or less, you’re short.

You should know how big your stack is relative to the blinds AT ALL TIMES but ten big blinds is an especially important benchmark to be aware of.

Pro Tip

To better understand your stack size taking into account blinds and antes, learn to calculate your M-Ratio, a model developed by former world champion Dan Harrington as part of his Zone System.

Why is All-In Better than Raise?

As a shortstack your biggest concern is survival and the best way to do that is to avoid confrontation.

You need to be familiar with playing the shortstack.

Imagine you have ten big blinds and it folds to you on the button. You raise a standard 3x and the big blind looks down at T♥ J♥.

Many players would call your 3x raise with that hand, but fold had you moved all-in for the full ten big blinds.

Unless you have a monster hand like pocket aces or kings, it’s preferable for your opponents to fold and for you to take down the blinds and antes.

Stealing Your Way to a Big Stack

Instead of trying to double-up with an all-in when you’re short you can build your stack by using position and aggression to win the blinds and antes.

In an ideal world all your opponents would be tight-passive players that fold everything but the biggest hands, regardless of rising blinds and dwindling stacks.

But your opponents understand that they can’t afford to sit around and wait for a hand that may or may not appear, and so should you.

Consider these important factors when deciding to move all-in or fold:

You should always be the first player into the pot unless you have a premium hand and want to get called. The better your position, the more hands you can shove with. If you’re up against loose players or big stacks in the blinds, tighten up your shoving range. If the blinds are tight and only calling with premium hands loosen up. Unless you have a monster hand winning the blinds and antes is preferable to risking elimination.

Push/Fold Strategy on the Bubble

The most important exception to basic push/fold poker is when you’re on the bubble of a tournament or sit and go.

Because of the massive equity difference between bubbling and making the money you need a much bigger edge to justify risking elimination with an all-in.

This concept is best illustrated by the math formula known as the Independent Chip Model (ICM) but as a beginner all you need to know is that if you’re moving all-in or calling all-in on the bubble, you should have a very good reason.

If you think you’re flipping a coin just fold and wait for a better spot.

Read More Essential Texas Hold'em Moves:

The Isolation Play The Over-Bet The Blocking Bet Defending the Blinds Floating the Flop Set-Mining The Reverse Tell The Light Three-Bet The Semi-Bluff The Soul Read The Stop and Go The Triple-Barrel Bluff The Squeeze Play The Bluff Catcher The Check-Raise

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

10 More Essential Hold’em Moves: The Isolation Play

Wed, 21 Nov 2012 04:00:00 -0800

We already wrote the book on the 10 Essential Texas Hold’em Moves and now we’re back to bring you 10 more.

Today we’re exploring the isolation play, a move that can narrow the field when you’re in a hand and increase your chances of taking down the pot.

In certain situations you don’t want to play a multi-way pot so by isolating one player in particular you can give yourself a better chance of making the best hand or using position to win the pot post-flop.

The What: While there are a few different reasons to make an isolation play the basic mechanics are the same. An isolation play refers to re-raising an opening raiser in order to push the other players at the table out of the pot, thus isolating only the player against whom you want to play.

Players like Phil Ivey understand that sometimes it's better to be heads-up.

The Why: By pushing the rest of the table out of a hand you will a) have a better chance of winning the pot by making the best hand by showdown or b) be able to use position to take down the pot after the flop.

The Where: Using the isolation play against a shortstacked player is most commonly used in tournaments while isolating limpers and maniacs can be used in both tournaments and cash games.

The When: Like most poker moves the isolation play works best when you’re in position.

Isolating the Right Way

Since there are a few different reasons for using the isolation play it’s extremely important to understand the situation, your opponent and why you’re trying to isolate him or her.

The basic concept behind the isolation play has to do with reducing the variables in the hand as much as possible so you’re better able to control the outcome.

The more players in a hand, the more likely someone’s going to flop a big hand or get creative with a bluff after the flop.

By isolating just one player you can take control of the hand and increase your chances of winning the pot.

Isolating Shortstacks

The most basic isolation play is used in tournaments when one of your opponents is dangerously low on chips and desperate to double up or pick up the blinds and antes.

Imagine you’re on the button and the player in cut-off is very short (six big blinds). Action folds to the cut-off who moves all-in.

Give yourself better odds of winning by isolating shortstacks when they move all-in.

You know this player to be competent, and not one to let himself be blinded out of the tournament. You know this player is willing to take a risk with marginal cards in order to pick up the blinds and antes.

You look down at A-J and must now decide how to proceed.

If you just call, the blinds will have very good pot odds to call with marginal hands (for example the big blind will have to call five big blinds for a chance to win a pot of 20 big blinds).

And as we said before, the more players in the pot, the harder it’s going to be for you to make the best hand by showdown.

To put it in practical terms let’s say the shortstacked cut-off shoved with K-Q and the big blind is sitting with 5-6 suited.

In a heads-up pot against the cut-off you have a roughly 60 percent chance of making the best hand by the river. If the player in the big blind enters the pot, however, your chances of showing down the best hand drop to 35 percent.

Figure out the odds yourself with our Poker Odds Calculator.

By three-betting instead of calling you price the big blind out of coming along with a speculative hand, allowing you to go heads-up against the shortstack who is shoving with a very wide range.

Isolating Maniacs

In the previous example we were using the isolation play to increase our chances of showing down the best hand, but the same play can be used to isolate an overly-aggressive player, allowing you to use position to win pots after the flop.

Imagine you’re playing a $1/$2 cash game and the player to your right is raising way too many hands and generally playing very loose.

You know he can’t have a premium hand every time he comes in for a raise and since you have position, you can use his aggressive style against him.

The next time he raises you look down at pocket fours. It might be tempting to just call and try to flop a set but since you’re only going to flop a four one in eight times, the vast majority of the time you’ll be forced to fold to the aggressive player’s continuation bet.

Proceed with caution when trying to isolate maniacs who play well.

Another problem is that if you just call, it’s going to drag other players into the pot behind you who will have the correct pot odds to call with other pocket pairs, suited connected and other speculative hands.

By three-betting you will push those same players out of the hand and allow you to go heads-up against a player who’s out of position and playing a very wide range of hands.

Any two unpaired cards will miss the flop two out three times which means the majority of the time your opponent will be forced to fold when you continuation bet the flop.

Isolating Limpers

Using the isolation play against weak players who limp too much uses the same basic concept as isolating maniacs.

Since limpers are usually just trying to see a cheap flop with marginal hands, you can raise in position even if you don’t have a premium hand. Most of the time the limper will just fold but when they do call it’s usually a mistake.

One of the biggest beginner leaks in poker is limp-calling too much out of position with marginal cards.

And since limping too much is generally a sign of a weak player, you should be trying to play as many pots against them as possible, especially when you’re in position.

So next time you identify a player as limping too much consider raising. Hopefully the rest of the table will fold and you’ll either win the pot preflop or go heads-up in position against a weak player which is always a recipe for profit.

Read More Essential Texas Hold'em Moves:

The Over-Bet The Blocking Bet Defending the Blinds Floating the Flop Set-Mining The Reverse Tell The Light Three-Bet The Semi-Bluff The Soul Read The Stop and Go The Triple-Barrel Bluff The Squeeze Play The Bluff Catcher The Check-Raise

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

10 More Essential Hold’em Moves: The Over-Bet

Tue, 16 Oct 2012 11:30:00 -0700

We already wrote the book on the 10 Essential Texas Hold’em Moves and now we’re back to bring you 10 more.

Today we’re taking a look at over-betting the pot, a move that can force your opponent out of the pot when you're bluffing, or get you extra value when you've got the nuts.

Sometimes described as “buying the pot”, the over-bet is a move you need to have in your poker arsenal.

By understanding when and where over-bets are appropriate you’ll be able to take down more pots, even when you don’t have a hand.

The What: At its most basic an over-bet refers to betting an unusually large amount of chips in relation to the size of the pot. Generally any bet bigger than the size of the pot is considered an over-bet.

By betting bigger you can put more pressure on your opponents.

The Why: In some spots your opponent will be able to call a standard-size bet, but will fold to a larger bet.

The Where: Over-betting is best suited to deep-stacked games where you’re able to make large bets compared to the size of the pot.

The When: Although over-bets can be used on any street, the most common spot to over-bet is the river.

Over-Betting the Right Way

Depending on the situation, an over-bet can be used as a powerful bluffing tool, or as misinformation to make your opponent call you down with a losing hand.

But because of this move’s versatility it’s of critical importance to understand why you’re making that massive bet.

Over-betting as a bluff can be very appealing to beginners because you’ll win the pot a large percentage of the time. The problem is that when you get called, your enormous bet is going to cost you big.

Conversely, if you’re trying to goad someone into a light call, a big bet might just scare them away.

Keep reading to find out how to over-bet, the right way.

Over-Betting as a Bluff

Using big bets to push your opponents out of pots might seem like a crude show of brute strength, but it has to be more calculated than simply closing your eyes and pushing your chips in.

And just like every poker move, the over-bet’s success rate is going to depend largely on your ability to read your opponent’s tendencies and hand strength.

That’s because you want to over-bet as a bluff when you think your opponent has medium-strength made hands.

Put your chips to work.

If you think your opponent has a monster, it won’t matter how big you make your bet: He’s not going to fold. On the flip side, if he has a weak hand he’s going to fold to a standard-sized bet.

One of the most common and effective ways to over-bet bluff is in a tournament, when you’re able to put an opponent to a decision for all his chips.

Beginner Warning: A good thing to keep in mind is that a standard-size bet will usually accomplish the same thing as a bigger bet, but will save you money when your opponent calls you down.

That’s why the over-bet is most commonly used to try to get value when you have the nuts. Keep reading to find out why.

Over-Betting for Value

When you see big over-bets at the lower stakes it’s almost always being done with a monster hand.

Beginners tend to bet big when they have a big hand, making them predictable and easy to read. Don’t fall into this trap.

There are two main ways you can get value by over-betting.

Against a weak, inexperienced player: Weak or inexperienced players will often fail to differentiate between a half-pot bet and a twice-pot bet. Extract maximum value from these opponents by betting and raising big when you have a monster.

Over-betting to represent weakness: In some spots an overbet can make you look weak, as if you’re trying to buy your way out of a jam.

In the right situation your opponent might interpret an overly-large bet as being weak since you’d likely bet smaller in order to get a call if you had a big hand.

Over-Betting in Action

If you’re still unconvinced about how effective the over-bet can be, check out the move in action below.

In 2003 Chris Moneymaker pulled off one of the biggest bluffs in televised poker history. By moving all-in for more than twice the size of the pot Moneymaker was able to outsmart one of the wiliest poker veterans in the world.

Read More Essential Texas Hold'em Moves:

The Blocking Bet Defending the Blinds Floating the Flop Set-Mining The Reverse Tell The Light Three-Bet The Semi-Bluff The Soul Read The Stop and Go The Triple-Barrel Bluff The Squeeze Play The Bluff Catcher The Check-Raise

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

10 More Essential Hold'em Moves: The Blocking Bet

Wed, 10 Oct 2012 15:00:00 -0700

We already wrote the book on the 10 Essential Texas Hold’em Moves and now we’re back to bring you 10 more.

Today we’re deconstructing the blocking bet, sometimes called the blocker bet. By taking control of the pot with an out-of-position bet you can get yourself a better price on your draws and see cheaper showdowns.

The What: A blocker bet refers to betting from out-of-position in order to control how much money goes into the pot on a given betting round.

Use blocking bets like a shield to protect the rest of your stack.

The Why: When you’re holding a marginal hand that can’t stand up to a big bet, you can make a small bet that is likely to get called, but not raised, in order to see another card or get to showdown for a cheaper price.

The When: Blocking bets are always made from out of position since you must be able to act before your opponent.

The Who: Because making a small bet leaves you open to getting bluffed with a re-raise this move is best suited to use against tight, inexperienced opponents.

The Where: Blocking bets can be used effectively in both cash games and tournaments.

Using Blocking Bets the Right Way

Not everyone agrees on whether blocking bets are truly effective, but they’ll all tell you that if you’re doing it wrong, you’re burning money.

We’re here to tell you that at the right time, against the right opponent, a blocking bet can absolutely increase your winnings.

The important part of using blocking bets is understanding the line you’re taking in the hand, and the kind of opponent you’re up against.

Weaker, tighter players are your targets when you’re thinking about using a blocking bet, because an experienced, tough player will be able to exploit you by bluff-raising.

There are two main situations where you should consider a blocking bet.

Using a Blocking Bet to See a Cheap River Card

Imagine you’re playing a hand of $1/$2 No-Limit Hold’em and a player in middle position raises to $6. The small blind calls and you decide to call with 9♦ T♦.

The flop comes A♦ J♣ 5♦ and you check-call a $12 continuation bet from the original raiser. The small blind folds and the 2♠ hits the turn.

Blocker bets are an important part of small-ball poker strategy.

If you know enough about this opponent to know he’ll fire a second bullet with a wide range of hands, you can make a bet of your own, and size it so that you’re getting a better price to draw to your flush.

With $42 in the pot you could bet $20, since your opponent’s likely to make a more standard-sized bet of $30-$35.

And in addition to seeing the river for less if your opponent just calls, you also pick up some fold equity for those times he completely missed the board and decides to just give up.

Using a Blocking Bet to See a Cheap Showdown

The most common and arguably most effective way to use the blocking bet is when you’re moderately confident you have the best hand on the river, but you’re not comfortable calling a big bet to get to showdown.

Let’s go back to the $1/$2 cash game. Just like the first example a player raises, gets a call from the small blind and you call with 9♦ T♦ in the big blind.

This time the flop comes down T♥ 8♣ 5♠ and you check-call a continuation bet from the original raiser after the small blind folds.

You both check the 5♦ on the turn before the 2♠ hits the river.

At this point you’re reasonably confident that top pair is good but you’d rather not pay $35 to find out. By betting out for a smaller amount you’ll be able to see that showdown for a cheaper price, and you’ll also get some fold equity.

Balancing Your Blocker-Bet Range

It’s important to understand that blocking bets are far more difficult to use against good players.

If you only bet small out of position with marginal hands, looking to get a cheap showdown, good players will simply raise and blow you off your hand.

To combat this you must balance your blocker-bet range by doing exactly the same thing with your big hands too.

In the second example from above imagine you had pocket fives and flopped a set. You checked the turn hoping to slow-play and instead of checking again on the river to induce a bluff, you bet small to represent a blocking bet and a marginal hand.

A good player will pick up on this and might try to bluff-raise you off the pot, getting more money into the middle when you’ve got the best of it.

Blocking Bets in Action

If you’re still unconvinced about the power of the blocker bet, let 13-time WSOP winner Phil Hellmuth break it down for you in the video below.

Read More Essential Texas Hold'em Moves:

Defending the Blinds Floating the Flop Set-Mining The Reverse Tell The Light Three-Bet The Semi-Bluff The Soul Read The Stop and Go The Triple-Barrel Bluff The Squeeze Play The Bluff Catcher The Check-Raise

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

10 More Essential Hold'em Moves: Defending the Blinds

Tue, 18 Sep 2012 12:45:00 -0700

We already wrote the book on the 10 Essential Texas Hold’em Moves and now we’re back to bring you 10 more.

Today we’re going to teach you how to defend your blinds. You’re forced to put money into the pot twice per orbit and we're going to show you how to minimize your losses and win more pots when you’re playing from the small and big blind.

The What: Defending your blinds refers to calling a preflop raise from either the small or big blind.

The Why: Because you’re forced to put money into the pot when you’re in the small and big blind it’s important to play optimally and recoup your share. Above all else you should not lose more than you would by simply folding.

Blinds put a lot of dead money in the pot. Make sure you get your share.

The When: Understanding key concepts like pot-odds, and factors like your opponent’s raising frequency and post-flop aggression, will allow you to defend or surrender your blinds at the right times.

The Where: Defending the blinds applies to both cash games and tournaments.

Defending the Blinds the Right Way

First of all it’s important to understand that the small and big blinds are the two worst positions at the poker table.

If you’re in the small blind you’ll be forced to act first on every post-flop round of betting. If you’re in the big blind it’s not much better. In fact, even the best poker players in the world lose money from these two positions.

One of the most common beginner poker leaks is calling too much from the small and big blinds. You must divorce yourself from the idea that your blind represents an investment in the hand, automatically making you pot-committed to any raise.

While it’s true that having a blind in play will give you better pot-odds, it does not mean you can call every raise with whatever two cards you happen to pick up.

In order to defend your blinds effectively you must understand the situation and the opponent(s) you’re up against.

Players, Position and Defending the Blinds

Position is the most important concept in understanding when it’s appropriate to defend your blinds.

Players’ pre-flop raising ranges get wider the closer they are to the button, which means you have to know where that raise came from before deciding whether to call, raise or fold.

Just because Gus defends with 3-5 off-suit doesn't mean you should too.

The earlier the position your opponent is raising from, the tighter your defending range has to be.

Conversely, if action folds all the way around to the button and he puts in a raise, it’s safe to put him on a wide range of hands and defend with weaker cards.

The type of player making the raise is also very important when deciding if you should defend.

A very tight player won’t be raising trash, even from the button, while a maniac will be opening weak hands even in early position.

Observe your opponents to understand what kinds of hands they’re raising from what positions and adjust your defending range accordingly.

How to Defend the Blinds for Beginners

One of the biggest problems with beginners who defend the blinds too much is that they’re put in tough spots later in the hand, causing them to lose more than just the preflop call.

For this reason we suggest a very tight range for playing out of the blinds, and a “fit or fold” approach to post-flop play, especially with your weaker hands.

As a general guideline we suggest defending your small blind with 77+, TJs+, AK, AQ and raising with QQ+.

If you’re in the big blind you can expand your calling range to include smaller pocket pairs and lower suited connectors.

The important thing for beginners to remember when calling with the weaker hands in that range is that you will need to flop more than one pair to play a big pot.

By using a “fit or fold” approach to post-flop play with marginal hands you’ll avoid putting more money into the pot with a losing hand.

Defending the Blinds in Action

If you’re still unconvinced about how important successful blind defense is to your bottom line, let Daniel Negreanu school you up in video form.

Negreanu takes our lesson one step further and goes into the math behind defending your blinds.

It’s worth a few minutes of your time. He has made more $16 million playing live poker tournaments.

Read More Essential Texas Hold'em Moves:

Floating the Flop Set-Mining The Reverse Tell The Light Three-Bet The Semi-Bluff The Soul Read The Stop and Go The Triple-Barrel Bluff The Squeeze Play The Bluff Catcher The Check-Raise

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

10 More Essential Hold'em Moves: Floating the Flop

Tue, 11 Sep 2012 10:50:00 -0700

We already wrote the book on the 10 Essential Texas Hold’em Moves and now we’re back to bring you 10 more.

Today we’re talking about floating the flop, a move that can turn your opponent's continuation bets against him. By just calling your opponent’s bet on the flop, you’ll be in a perfect spot to take the pot away when he shows weakness on the turn.

Tough players don't surrender to every c-bet. Neither should you.

The float is an intermediate poker move that requires a strong understanding of the players you’re up against but if you can master it you’ll be able to win more pots post-flop, regardless of the cards you’re holding.

The What: At its most basic, floating the flop refers to calling a bet on the flop with the intention of betting and taking down the pot when your opponent checks to you on the turn.

The Why: Floating the flop is a move used to defend against the continuation bet. Because players routinely continuation bet with a wide range of hands, you shouldn’t be surrendering every time someone does it. But instead of simply raising the flop, floating allows you to pick up more information on the turn before making your move.

The Who: You should only be floating the flop against tight-aggressive players who do a lot of preflop raising and continuation betting.

The When: You should only be floating the flop when you are in position.

The Where: Floating the flop is a powerful poker move that can be used in all forms of Texas Hold’em but because it requires two streets of action it lends itself more to deep-stacked games.

Floating the Flop the Right Way

Floating the flop is a bluffing technique so it’s important to understand what you’re doing and why you’re doing it to avoid burning money.

To make it crystal clear, you are only technically floating when you believe your cards are worse than your opponent’s. If you believe you have the best hand then you would be calling the flop and betting the turn for value.

Like most poker moves, floating works better when you're in position.

And because you’re bluffing, the conditions have to be just right to give yourself the biggest chance of success.

Here are the three most important factors to consider when you’re thinking about floating the flop and betting the turn.

Only float when you’re in position. Only float when you’re in a heads-up pot. Only float against tight-aggressive players who continuation bet frequently and are able to make laydowns when shown strength.

It’s important to be in position when you float the flop because you need that extra piece of information your opponent will give you on the turn.

Because your opponent will be continuation betting with good hands as well as bad hands, when he checks to you on the turn you’ll have one more clue that he’s got air. If he does bet the turn instead of checking, you need to reevaluate your plan.

It’s also only advisable to float the flop and bet the turn when you’re in a heads-up pot. More players mean more variables and a worse chance of succeeding with a bluff.

Floating is about telling your opponent a story, one that involves you calling the flop because you have a legitimate hand. In a multi-way pot your call on the flop doesn’t mean as much and your story will be less believable when you bet the turn.

Advanced Strategy Tip

If your opponent throws a wrench into your plans by betting the turn, all may not be lost. Many aggressive players won’t give up and check/fold fourth street. They’ll fire a second barrel as a bluff to try to blow you off your hand.

Keep an eye out for TAG players and exploit their strategy with the float.

If you think you’re up against a tough, very aggressive player, you should consider raising the turn. Calling the flop and raising the turn is an extremely strong line and will usually force a good player to quickly lay down marginal hands.

This is an advanced move and should only be made with a very strong understanding of your opponent and his or her behavior.

Only Float Against Tight-Aggressive Players

Making sure you have position and only one opponent are important factors, but you must also consider the type of player against whom you are going to float.

Floating does not work against a player that only raises preflop and continuation bets with premium hands, for obvious reasons.

Floating also does not work against a loose/passive calling station who will frequently call your turn bet with marginal hands.

Look for tight-aggressive players who raise a lot in position preflop and follow it up with a continuation bet a high percentage of the time. These players will be showing up with air a lot, and check-folding to you when you bet the turn.

It’s much more difficult to float successfully against tough, hyper-aggressive players, however. Try to find players who fire one continuation bet but tend to shut down on the turn when they don’t have a hand.

Floating the Flop in Action

If you’re still not convinced about the efficacy of floating the flop and betting the turn, let Phil Ivey show you how it’s done like only Phil Ivey can.

In this video Ivey breaks one of our golden rules by floating in a mutli-way pot, and he does it not once but twice.

Ivey calls two big bets with seven-high and manages to take the pot away when Patrik Antonius checks on the river. This hand doesn’t even come close to following the easy-to-execute formula we presented above so consider it something to which you can aspire.

Read More Essential Texas Hold'em Moves:

Set-Mining The Reverse Tell The Light Three-Bet The Semi-Bluff The Soul Read The Stop and Go The Triple-Barrel Bluff The Squeeze Play The Bluff Catcher The Check-Raise

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Jared Tendler: Always Playing Your A-game is Impossible

Wed, 05 Sep 2012 09:00:00 -0700

In this article I’ll prove why and provide steps to realistically play at a high level consistently.

Trying to playing your A-game all the time seems simple in theory when you look only at your current A-game. You know what it’s like to play your best. You win more money, feel better about your game, leave the table happy, and a host of other great things attached to playing great poker.

It makes sense why you’d want that to happen it all the time. The only problem is that wanting or wishing it were true is the poker equivalent to believing in Santa Claus.

The reason it’s impossible to always be at your best is because your best is a moving target, which is constantly rising higher. When your game improves, it means that your peak has risen higher than before. In other words, your current A-game becomes your B-game, and you’ve gained a newly minted A-game.

Play your A-game as much as possible to get more of these.

It shouldn’t take much to realize this has already happened to your game. Think back to what your A-game was like a year ago and compare it to your A-game now. Heck, go back far enough, and your current C-game today is better than your A-game was back then. (By the way, if you’re a serious player and this isn’t happening, follow the steps in the next section.)

Your game isn’t static. It’s constantly improving; although often in ways that are so subtle they’re hard to see. As soon as you’ve played at your best, a new standard has been set.

The first time you play well it’s often hard to describe why you played so well. If you can’t explain why you played so well, it’s going to be pretty hard to do it again. Funny enough, once you can explain why you played so well, you’re able to play even better; and a new A-game is created.

Playing Your A-game Consistently

While it’s impossible to always play your A-game, you can play that way consistently if you put the work in. Most poker players aren’t willing to take the extra steps and instead are happy to dream of what it would be like to consistently play that well.

Here are a few tips how to get your A-game show up more often:

Eliminate C-game. Your number one goal every single time you play is to make sure your C-game does not show up. Every time you make a really obvious mistake, no matter what the reason, you actually reinforce poor play. You simultaneously fail to correct the mistake, and get better at making it. That means it’s more likely to show-up again, and your A-game is now less likely to show-up. Instead, by consistently eliminating your C-game, you make it easier and easier to play your A-game. Eliminate Your Mental C-game. The mental side of the major poker mistakes you make have to be eliminated to correct your tactical C-game. Mental game issues like tilt, anxiety, boredom, being distracted, unmotivated, and losing confidence often lead to poor play. If you want to be at your peak consistently, these big issues have to be eliminated. Assess Your Range. Write out the full range in your game, from A-game to C-game. Start by listing out all the mistakes you make now, when playing at your absolute worst. Then, list the mistakes that are progressively less bad until you reach your current A-game. Quick Recovery. Playing your A-game consistently requires that you recover it quickly after slipping into your B or C-game. Having your range clearly listed out, makes it easier to recognize when your game has slipped and thus easier to recover your A-game quickly while playing. Be Prepared. Consistently playing at a high level doesn’t happen easily. All great poker players and great athletes show up prepared to play at a high level. If you don’t have a warm-up routine, a simple way to get started is to review hands connected with all parts of your game (A to C-game). That way, you know specifically how to play at a high level and improve your B or C-game when it shows-up. Tracking Progress. A good way of tracking your progress is by keeping a journal where you regularly assess the quality of your play after a session or tournament. This not only increases your skill of recognizing when you slip into B or C-game, it’s also a great way to focus you more and more on what’s necessary to play quality poker and you automatically become less results-oriented.

It may seem strange to focus mainly on eliminating B and C-game as a way to play your A-game more often. However, if you think about, you’ll automatically play your A-game more often if the rest of your game doesn’t show-up. The more consistently you play your A-game the easier it is to take your game to an even higher peak.

Jared Tendler, MS is a mental game coach for over 200 poker players and author of, "The Mental Game of Poker." A free audiobook version of his book is currently being offered by Amazon. Go to Jared’s website to find out how to get a free copy.

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

10 Essential Texas Hold’em Moves: The Check-Raise

Tue, 14 Aug 2012 13:55:00 -0700

There are a handful of special moves that, when mastered, can make the difference between winning a little, and winning a lot.

In this ten-part beginner poker strategy series we’re going to show you exactly how to use these powerful poker moves to make more money.

Today we’re talking about the check-raise, a move that’s one of the most basic yet powerful tactics you can add to your poker arsenal. By checking and raising your opponent’s bet you can use his position against him to get more money into the pot when you’re holding the nuts, and make him throw away the best hand when you’re bluffing.

The check-raise is a technique you should be using in every poker session, but it’s extremely important to understand the move and how to use it so it doesn’t become a serious leak.

The What: A check-raise in poker consists of checking when the action's on you, and raising after a player behind you has bet. The check-raise is a trapping move.

The Why: Check-raising can be done for two reasons. Either you are check-raising for value, to get more money into the pot when you think you have the best hand, or check-raising as a bluff, to make your opponent throw away the best hand.

Check-raising must be used with caution if you play Negreanu's small-ball style.

The When: The check-raise is an essential Texas Hold’em move that is right at home in any poker game on the planet. It’s equally effective in cash games, tournaments and sit and gos.

The Where: Since you must check in order to check-raise, this move only works when you’re out of position.

Check-Raising Done Right

Since this is a beginner poker strategy series, moves like the check-raise must be handled with care.

While the check-raise is definitely an essential move and deserves a spot in every poker player’s toolbox, if you start firing off check-raises willy nilly it’s only going to get you into trouble.

The first thing you need to know when check-raising is why you’re doing it. Poker is a game of planning and the check-raise is a prime example. Unless you know what you’re trying to accomplish by check-raising you’ll just be burning money.

Check-raising is done in two main ways. Either you’re holding what you think is the best hand and you check-raise for value, to get more money into the pot, or you think your opponent has the best hand and you’re check-raising as a bluff to make your opponent fold.

Check-raising also serves to balance your checking range, meaning that by raising some of the times when you check, your opponent won’t automatically know you have a weak hand when you check to them.

Check-Raising for Value

As a beginner the vast majority of the times you check-raise should be for value.

When you think you have the best hand you need to get as many chips into the pot as possible. The better your hand, the more comfortable you should be putting all your chips at risk.

Check-raising for value gives you another way to entice your opponent into putting money into the pot.

By checking and signaling weakness your opponent will bet a wider range of hands, trying to use position to win the pot with weak holdings.

Check-raising will make your strategy less predictable against talented, thinking players.

By check-raising, you can either force your opponent into making a mistake by calling with the worst hand, or you can induce and all-in shove from drawing hands and second-best made hands.

Here are a few key points to keep in mind when check-raising for value:

You must be first to act. Your opponent must be aggressive enough that he will bet with a wide variety of hands when checked to. Check-raising with a monster for value can be especially effective in multi-way pots.

But remember, check-raising is a powerful move and can force your opponent into laying down even moderately strong hands. So if you hold the nuts, be cautious of overplaying your hand and forcing your opponent into folding before putting all his money in the pot.

Check-Raising as a Bluff or Semi-Bluff

Because check-raising is such a powerful poker move it should come as no surprise that it’s one of the most effective bluffing tactics out there.

By taking advantage of a few common Hold’em situations, you can use the check-raise to knock players off pots regardless of the cards you’re holding.

The most common situation where the check-raise can be used as a bluff is in a heads-up pot when you’ve called out of position. Because even most beginner poker players know they should be continuation-betting the majority of the time when they raise preflop, you can turn the tables on them with a well-timed check-raise.

In this situation you can use your opponent’s knowledge of c-betting to your advantage.

If your opponent decides to c-bet a 4♥ 5♥ 6♠ flop, you can check-raise as a bluff to represent a hand you’d be likely to just flat-call with preflop, a pocket pair that hit a set or suited connectors that flopped big.

Check-raising as a semi-bluff is also a great way to add strength to the way you play your drawing hands. Next time you flop a flush draw, check-raise instead of check-call and give yourself a second way to win the pot.

Check-Raising in Action

If you're still unconvinced about the power of the check-raise, check out the video below.

Listen to Gus Hansen teach you about check-raising in a clip that looks more like a kidnapping ransom video than a poker strategy tutorial. We particularly like the monotone delivery.

Read More Essential Texas Hold'em Moves:

Set-Mining The Reverse Tell The Light Three-Bet The Semi-Bluff The Soul Read The Stop and Go The Triple-Barrel Bluff The Squeeze Play The Bluff Catcher

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Should I Go Pro? Part 3: The Big Picture

Fri, 10 Aug 2012 09:20:29 -0700

Not only will you be putting your entire life into the hands of a variance-filled game, you’ll also be creating a large gap in your resume.

Is that really what you want? Do you want to be locked in to playing poker for the rest of your life?

Decide What You Need to Meet Your Life Goals

You need to take some time and really figure out what will make you happy in life.

Is it money? Is it stability? Do you want a family?

There’s more to life than money. Playing poker for a couple years might seem fun, but is it what you want to do when you’re 35? 40? 50?

It’s hard to know what you’ll want in the future.

Dropping out shouldn't be taken lightly.

It’s easy to get hooked on the “easy” money poker provides but a decision to play poker for a living should not be taken lightly and you might end up actually hurting your long term goals.

Education

If you’re going to college or university and are thinking of dropping out to play poker full time, don’t.

The answer is don’t no matter what. Education is the ultimate back-up plan.

Play poker on the side and finish school, even if that means taking fewer classes to play poker.

If you decide poker isn’t right for you after a few years, you’ll always have your education to fall back on.

You have a plan B -- and something other than a massive gap in your resume.

The Resume Gap

When you’re playing poker for a living, you’re earning money and getting by but you’re really not furthering yourself.

Chances are, unless you’re the .05% who can advance in stakes to the nosebleeds, you’re going to plateau.

You’re going to find a level that you beat and you just might not be able to make that next step.

Thinking about his employable skills.

It’s inevitable. Not everyone can beat the nosebleeds, and not everyone can even beat $5/$10.

Those years you spend grinding the stake level you can beat, making your living, the rest of your employable skills are diminishing and your resume gap grows.

If after a few years you realize that how much you’re making isn’t enough, or your decide to get a job for other reasons, you’re going to have to explain this large gap in your resume.

Poker Teaches You Skills, But Will An Employer See It The Same Way?

There’s no denying that poker teaches you some very valuable life skills.

It teaches you skills like money management, risk vs reward, fast decision making and dealing with stress.

However, it’s entirely likely -- even probable -- that an employer won’t see it the same way.

More likely you’ll probably have to get an entry-level job making far less than you currently make in poker.

If you had just kept with your job or gotten a job instead of playing poker, you probably would have risen in the ranks of your current company and built employable job skills.

Poker Income Has a Ceiling

What most poker players don’t talk about is how their income has a ceiling.

Poker players depend on fish, and good games, and out playing their opponents.

Your ceiling is not durrrr's ceiling.

When they hit that stake level they can’t beat, they’re stuck on the stake below it. There’s really not much room for growth.

Yes, you can spend time and study and get better, but your opponent is always doing the same thing.

Some stake jumps are just impossible and you will be stuck at that ceiling.

A good job, a good education and a serious work ethic gives you a much higher ceiling. You can always be promoted and you can get a new, better job.

Playing poker isn’t just something you do because you can make money at it.

The decision is far reaching and in the future you might not like the fact that you’re stuck playing $1/$2 online with little-to-no better options.

Plan B

It’s always a good idea to have a Plan B.

Poker is great and it allows you much more free time than a regular job. Use it.

Use your time to learn a skill. Learn to build websites, learn to write or volunteer somewhere.

Use your time to start a business. But do something that you can use should you ever re-enter the work force.

In short: Have a back-up plan.

Too many poker players just play poker and do nothing else. After a few years, they don’t enjoy poker anymore and want to do something else but their options are limited.

Don’t limit yourself. And keep working towards goals that are not poker related.

Take your time and really think about it.

That way if you do decide poker isn’t for you, you’re not starting back at square one.

Take Your Time and THINK About It

The one bit of advice that everyone should listen to when thinking about going pro:

Take your time and THINK about it.

Think about your goals, your wants and your needs in life. Set yourself up for success and work hard towards it.

Poker can be a great sole source of income or a great second source of income.

Don’t limit yourself and make a rash decision that might affect the rest of your life.

Your number one goal in life is happiness and you need to find out what makes you happy.

Just know that what makes you happy now might not be what makes you happy in the future

Only you can truly answer these questions.

Think it through and you’ll know if you’re really ready to go pro.

Previous Articles in the Should I Go Pro? Series:

Should I Go Pro? Part 1: The Bankroll Should I Go Pro? Part 2: Online vs. Live Follow Dan on Twitter at www.twitter.com/danielskolovy

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

10 Essential Texas Hold'em Moves: Set-Mining

Tue, 07 Aug 2012 14:00:00 -0700

There are a handful of special moves that, when mastered, can make the difference between winning a little, and winning a lot.

In this ten-part beginner poker strategy series we’re going to show you exactly how to use these powerful poker moves to make more money.

Today we’re talking about set-mining, one of the most straight-forward ways to make money in No-Limit Texas Hold’em. By playing low and medium pocket pairs with the sole goal of flopping a set, you can take a ton of guesswork out of your post-flop game.

The What: Set-mining is the practice of playing pocket pairs solely for the purpose of hitting a set. By calling a small raise before the flop you can win big pots from players when you flop three of a kind.

The Why: Set-mining is effective because three of a kind is usually the best hand on the flop, and stands a good chance of being the best hand at showdown. Sets are also very well disguised so you’ll win big pots against premium pocket pairs, strong stop-pair and two-pair hands.

The When: Set-mining can be used in any deep-stacked Texas Hold’em game, cash or tournament, but it’s most commonly used in cash games since stacks are generally much deeper than tournaments.

The Where: Like most poker moves, set-mining works best when you’re in position. Look for early position opening raises and just call pre-flop with your small and medium pocket pairs. By taking advantage of your position you’ll be able to make more profitable decisions post-flop.

Set-mining Done Right

The single most important concept you need to understand in order to set-mine effectively is “implied odds”.

Because it is so disguised, only the best players are able to spot a flopped set.

Because you’re only going to flop a set one in eight times it’s critical that when you do hit three of a kind, you get paid off. Implied odds are a way of understanding what you stand to win if you hit your hand.

An extension of pot odds, implied odds take into account money that’s not yet in the pot, but can be expected to be put in on later streets.

Let's take a closer look at the mechanics of implied odds and how they relate to set-mining.

The Math of Set-Mining and Implied Odds

To illustrate the concept of implied odds, let's look at a simple example:

You’re in the big blind in a $1/$2 game and the player under the gun raises to $10. It folds to you and you look down at pocket deuces. Both you and the initial raiser have stacks of $300.

We can use implied pot-odds to help figure out whether we should call the raise and try to flop a set.

Because you’re out of position and unlikely to get to showdown unimproved let’s assume you’re only going to win the pot when you flop three of a kind.

You have to call $8 to win $21. That means that in terms of direct pot odds, you’re getting less than 3 to 1 on the call. Since you only flop a set one in eight times it’s clearly not a profitable call, unless you take implied odds into account.

When set-mining it pays to go after the big stacks.

Because your opponent raised from under the gun it’s likely he has premium cards, and because he’ll be in position for the rest of the hand it’s very likely he’ll be putting more money into the pot on later streets.

That means that when you do flop a set you’ll almost certainly be winning more than the $21 that went into the pot preflop.

That extra money that will be added on later streets represents your implied odds and if it outweighs the 8 to 1 odds you’ve got on hitting your set then the call will be profitable in the long run.

So in order to profitably call $8 pre flop, you have to win, on average, $64 from your opponent. The deeper the stacks the more likely you'll be able to get the implied odds you need to call.

Three Keys to Successful Set-Mining

Just like every poker move there’s an endless list of variables that can affect the outcome of a hand.

But if you can master these three bullet points you’ll be well on your way to making money by playing your pocket pairs for set value.

You Have to be Deep-Stacked to Set-Mine: Because you’re only going to flop a set about one out of eight times, you have to make sure you’re making enough money when you hit. Set-Mining Works Best against Loose and Aggressive Opponents: A loose and/or aggressive player is more likely to put money in the pot with a wider range, giving you better implied odds for paying preflop to give your pocket pairs a chance to flop a set. It’s Better to Set-Mine in Position: Just like most poker moves, set-mining works best when you’re in position. When you get to see what your opponent does before you make a decision you’ll be able to extract more money when you hit a set.

Set-Mining in Action

If you're still unconvinced about the power of set-mining check out the clip below.

In this hand the great Tony G wins a $206,000 pot from Hoyt Corkins by just calling with pocket sixes preflop, and hitting three of a kind on the flop.

Read More Essential Texas Hold'em Moves:

The Reverse Tell The Check Raise The Light Three-Bet The Semi-Bluff The Soul Read The Stop and Go The Triple-Barrel Bluff The Squeeze Play The Bluff Catcher

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Should I Go Pro? Part 2: Online vs. Live

Thu, 02 Aug 2012 12:22:26 -0700

They both have their pros and their cons.

But even if you think your decision is already made, you should weigh your options closely.

Playing Online: The Pros

Online poker has some great advantages over playing live.d

Looking past the obvious, that you get to play in your own home and eat your own food, when you play online there’s always a game going.

You can also:

Table select over dozens of tables across dozens of sites. Pick and choose the best games and really make your own hours. Jump up and down in stakes almost instantly.

Volume is your friend online.

If the games at your current stakes are bad or you’re dealing with a downswing you can drop down in stakes in seconds and still play.

The biggest advantage that online play has over live is the ability to multi-table.

Not only do you already get more hands per hour on a single table, you can play as many tables as you're comfortable with.

Why play one $5/$10 game live when you can play eight $2/$4 games online? The difference in hands per hour is astounding and you realize the long term advantages of solid play online much faster.

Another huge plus online is online poker bonuses and rakeback.

For those who don’t know (I hope if you’re thinking of playing for a living you do know) rakeback is a percentage of total rake paid back to your account and it varies from 20%-30%.

It can make up a huge amount of your monthly profit and can’t be ignored. Sites like PokerStars don’t offer rakeback but their loyalty program basically does the same thing with bonuses.

Playing Online: The Cons

The pros are pretty good for online play but it’s not without its faults. And in fact some of online poker's cons are actually linked to the pros.

Even playing from home, when you start out it’s amazing but after a while you realize you haven’t left your house in weeks.

As Phil says, you have to have balance.

It’s extremely hard to meet new people and maintain a life when you never leave the house.

If you have an established group of friends and a relationship it’s much easier to balance poker and life, but if you’re in a new city or have never been the type of person to have a lot of friends, it’s going to be extremely difficult to meet any new people.

It’s also very important to have balance in your life as professional poker player.

Phil Galfond always talks about this. if you only have poker in your life, your only measurement in life is a game of poker that’s filled with variance.

If poker’s all you have, it’s all you measure your worth in and you feel the ups and the downs much more than if you have other things going on in your life.

Playing online and not leaving the house makes this difficult.

Online poker has also gotten harder over the years and the level of play is much, much tougher than it used to be.

This is the main drawback. If you can beat $1/$2 online over a huge sample you can probably beat $10/$20 live at most casinos.

It’s just the nature of the game. Players that play online are that much more serious.

They study the game, they play the game, and they play the game to win.

Playing Live: The Pros

Live play is not without some inherent advantages as well.

Live poker for many people is a sociable activity. People enjoy going out for the day or night to the casino, playing poker and shooting the shit.

These people know how to play the game and probably beat their friends in home games, but they’re not poker stars by any definition.

In short:

The social aspect of live poker will always make the games softer than online counterparts at the same stake level.

With a good group of regs, it doesn't feel like work.

There are a higher percentage of players that play poker for fun at the casino. It’s unavoidable.

Whereas online games are extremely aggressive, live games tend to play much more passive and straight forward.

They’re just much easier to play for a profit.

The social atmosphere that draws the weaker players also benefits you in another way:

With a good group of regulars, it seems like you’re not going in to work at all.

You get to play poker, chat about sports and hear hilarious stories in a "clubhouse" atmosphere.

Playing Live: The Cons

Live poker has some very apparent disadvantages.

First and foremost:

Not always the best vibe at the casino.

You’re getting far less hands per hour than you would online even just one tabling.

The game is slower, there’s a dealer who can make mistakes and people are talking and not always paying attention to the action.

It all eats up hands per hour, which is inextricably linked to your hourly wage.

Waiting around for a game is time you have to spend at the casino as well. It’s all technically your hourly wage.

You aren’t making anything waiting for a game or you’re making less if you’re playing a smaller game waiting for a bigger game to start up.

This happens regularly in a casino poker room.

Add to that:

You’re spending so much time in an unhealthy environment.

Casinos are loud places, the air conditioning is always pumping, the chairs are terrible and your healthy eating options are severely limited.

It’s easy to get into a routine of getting up grinding, eating horrible food, having horrible posture and leading an extremely unhealthy life when you play live at a casino.

It’s All Really On You

The decision ultimately comes down to you, where you’re comfortable and where you play your most profitable poker.

Both online and live have their pros and cons. You have to decide what’s important to you and what’s best for you to meet your goals.

Having a balanced life is the most important factor when you play poker for a living.

It’s easy to get caught up in the grind and have everything else fall to the wayside. You have to be able to balance that with staying healthy, maintaining relationships and making yourself happy.

Whichever option allows you to do that best is the option best for you.

Coming up next: Should I Go Pro? Part 3: The Big Picture

Previous Article: Should I Go Pro? Part 1: The Bankroll

Add Dan on Twitter at www.twitter.com/danielskolovy

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Should I Go Pro? Part 1: The Bankroll

Fri, 27 Jul 2012 07:03:04 -0700

Deciding to play poker for a living is a big decision.

What kinds of things should you think about? Is it even a valid option for you?

In this three part series we’re going to take a look at these questions and more.

Before You Even Think About Thinking About Going Pro

First and foremost, you’d better be a winning poker player over a significant sample size.

Note: A significant sample - not a three-week heater or a couple of winning months.

You need a very large sample size to know whether you’re a winning player and what your win rate is.

If poker's your living, downswings take their toll.

Think 200,000 hands online minimum or at least a year’s worth of serious live play.

Swings are Inevitable

Poker is a swingy, variance-filled game. You can win for months without actually being a winning player.

Conversely you can be an awesome player yet still lose for a month or more. It’s just part of the game.

These swings are inevitable. You might think that you can handle downswings well, but when poker is your only source of income downswings can take an especially hard mental toll.

You need to have the bankroll to be able to pay your bills even when you’re losing money at poker.

This isn’t the kind of decision you make instantly

They Call it a Grind for a Reason

Think about it. The game is fun and can be an excellent source of income.

But sometimes poker is best left as a side income. They call it a grind for a reason.

Be honest with yourself. You need to have the results first before anything.

Don’t ever leave a good job to play poker for a living.

Make it a serious part-time job first. If after a year or two you’re making more from your poker job than your “real” job, then start thinking about going pro.

Don’t ever leave a good job to play poker for a living.

Remember that if you ever stop playing for a living you’re to have to explain that massive gap in your resume. It might be fun for a few years, but is it really what you want long term?

Poker will always be there. You can always play seriously on the side. Really stop and think about it.

A Hard Way to Make an Easy Living

“A hard way to make an easy living” might be the best quote ever made on playing poker for a living.

It has its advantages, for sure. You make your own hours. You have free time. You’re your own boss.

But playing poker for a living has it’s downsides. Most prominently, sometimes you go to “work” and lose a whole shit ton of money.

To succeed as a poker player you have to have an excellent work ethic. You’re not going to get fired for coming in late and you’re not going to get fired for leaving early.

You play when you want. But you have to treat it as a job and take it seriously.

Make daily hand goals, or hours-played goals, or tournament-volume goals for the day, week, month and stick to them.

To succeed as a poker player, you have to have a work ethic.

You can take time off if something fun is happening but you have to make up that time somewhere. If you can’t put in the volume you’re never going to have success.

With all that said, people do play poker for a living and it’s completely possible that you’re ready to do it.

But make sure you take the time, weigh all the options, and really think the decision out.

What Size Bankroll Do I Need?

IF you're going to make the leap to professional poker player, this is the main question and it depends on a variety of factors.

What game are you going to play? Tournaments? Cash? What stakes? What’s your monthly nut?

The Monthly Nut

Your monthly nut is your total monthly expenses. That’s the roof over your head, food, car payments, electricity, water, spending money.

It’s everything. How much do you need to live comfortably every month?

Calculate this and then add 15 to 20% and you get a good idea of how much you’re going to need to make every month.

Now compare that to your win rate. You want to live comfortably, and scraping by while playing for a living is not anyone’s idea of fun.

If you’re playing cash games you’ll want at least 100 buy-ins for your stake level. That’s the minimum.

Make sure you're comfortably rolled.

You want to be comfortably rolled. You don’t want to go on a 25BI downer and have to dip into your reserve fund to keep playing.

This is your playing bankroll. Don’t touch it for anything but poker.

Be Prepared

On top of your playing roll you need to have at least three months living expenses saved up just in case.

Who knows what can happen? You could get in a car accident. You could get sick. You could go on a really sick downswing.

So be prepared. This is your reserve fund, and you shouldn't don’t touch it for anything.

If you’re playing poker full time, then have this reserve fund at all times. This isn’t money you’ve saved that you can go spend on shoes or a vacation.

This is the reserve fund in case of emergencies.

If you end up making more money than your monthly nut and you have your reserve squirrelled away, then sure. Spend it.

But the reserve fund and your bankroll are not for spending; they are the tools of your trade and must be treated as such.

It’s Your Business

Poker is now your business so treat it as such.

Playing poker allows for a ton of freedom but you have to remember this is your job. You can’t half ass it. You have to put in your volume and you have to be nitty about bankroll management and your reserve management.

If poker's your business, treat it as such.

If you spend money as quick as you make it, you’re never going to have enough for when that inevitable downswing comes.

You really can’t be too careful. If you plan correctly and are a good enough player, playing poker can be an awesome and very lucrative job.

But it’s just that -- a job. And if you don’t treat it like a job you’re doomed to fail before you even start.

Next in the Series:

Should I Go Pro? Part 2: Online vs Live

Should I Go Pro? Part 3: The Big Picture

Follow Dan on Twitter @DanielSkolovy

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Five Pro-Endorsed Strategy Tips That Are Terrible

Tue, 03 Jul 2012 11:13:07 -0700

It takes a brilliant mind to understand and win at poker - and an even more brilliant one to invent the strategy basics that are now commonplace.

These geniuses do their best to solve the game as it’s played at the time.

But the game of poker has evolved a lot over the last decade, and will continue to. What might have worked 10 years ago canseem silly now. And winning strategies today might not be effective at all 10 years from now.

Below are a few of those strategies - endorsed by some of the most famous names in the game, no less - that may have worked in the past but have passed their prime.

1. Reraise with Small Pairs Before the Flop in Limit Hold’em

Even Limit games aren't the same anymore.

The Author: Phil Hellmuth

The Book: Play Poker Like the Pros

The Advice: When the pot is raised to you in Limit Hold’em and you hold a small pair, you’re better to make it three-bets rather than call the original raise. You’re then meant to “represent whatever hits the flop.”

Why it’s bad: The problem with this advice is that he’s writing a book for beginners, and beginners are going to play in small-stakes games. People in small stakes games play tons of hands.

You’re not going to be able to represent anything on the flop because people are just playing their hands. They don’t care that you made it three-bets to go. They care that they flopped top pair, and they aren’t going to fold.

You end up just putting more bets into the pot without ever being able to get them back unless you flop a set.

The better approach: In Limit Hold’em, especially in low-stakes Limit Hold’em, you should just call because you’re more likely to get callers behind you. Play the hand to flop a set and if you don’t, fold.

2. The Fourth Raise Means Aces

The 4th raise is sometimes A6.

The Author: Phil Gordon

The Book: Little Green Book

The Advice: "The fourth raise is always aces."

Why it’s bad: It’s not so much “bad” as it is dated and wrong.

The top players today are four-betting so much more than aces it’s incredible.

Take a look at Shaun Deeb’s bustout hand from the 2011 Main Event, for just one example.

No longer is even the 5th or 6th bet guaranteed to be aces.

The better approach: Treat all players individually.

For some players the fourth bet might always mean aces, but other players might still have any two.

3. If You’re Playing Small Connected Cards, They Don’t Need to be Suited

Craps are bad TJ, not suits.

The Author: TJ Cloutier

The Book: Championship No-Limit and Pot-Limit Hold’em

The Advice: Small connectors don’t need to be suited because in multi-way pots there’s a high likelihood someone has higher cards of your suit.

Cloutier says that the suit causes more harm than good when you make a flush and lose to a bigger flush.

Why it’s bad: There’s literally no way that unsuited cards would ever be better than suited cards.

The notion that the suit does more harm than good is ridiculous.

Yes, occasionally you’re going to make a flush and it’s going to be second best. But also occasionally you’re going to be drawing to a straight and backdoor the flush.

The better approach: Being suited gives you more ways to win. It’s as simple as that.

4. Raise for Information

The Author: David Sklansky

The Book: Theory of Poker

There are better ways to get info than raising.

The Advice: You sometimes want to raise to find out where you’re at in a hand.

Why it’s bad: It’s bad because the information you get is often not very helpful.

E.g. You raise and your opponent folds. This is bad. Chances are he folded a bluff and you probably would have preferred he kept trying to bluff you.

E.g. You raise and he calls. How much does that really tell you?

He could have a draw, he could have a hand he's slow playing, he could have you beat, he could not have you beat.

If he re-raises, he could have you beat. He could also be playing a big draw fast or a worse hand fast.

The better approach: There are ways to define a hand, but generally raising isn’t a very good one.

Pay attention to your opponents and their previous play will give you a better idea as to what they have.

Actively try and put your opponent on a range and with every new bit of information you’ll get closer to his hand.

5. Vary Your Opening Amount

Raising to 4x needlessly risks chips, Dan.

The Author: Dan Harrington

The Book: Harrington On Hold’em 1

The Advice: In a tournament you should vary your opening size from 2x to 4x randomly to make it difficult for your opponents to not get a read on you.

Why it’s bad: The only reason you need to vary your bet sizing randomly is if you’re regularly raising different amounts.

If you’re raising the exact same size every single time it’s not like your opponents will pick up any tells on you because your bet is always the same.

The better approach: If you’re playing in a tournament there’s really no reason to raise 4x the big blind -- ever.

Keep your standard 2.25x to 2.5x raise and stick with it. It risks less chips and is just as effective.

Raising to 4x just needlessly risks chips.

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Six Ways to Exploit a TAGfish (and How to Stop Being One)

Fri, 22 Jun 2012 08:54:56 -0700

You learn that you want to be selective about your hands (play tight) and that you want to play them aggressively.

The problem for a lot of players, though, is they learn how to play a tight-aggressive style from a book.

They know how to play “like” a TAG, but they often don’t understand why they make the plays they do.

As a result they play a very formulaic, by the book, style.

Players like this don’t adjust their play to their opponents and make many small mistakes. These players are known as TAGfish.

If you're not sure whether you are one or not, here are the 7 signs that you're a TAGfish.

Recognizing a TAGfish

The days of just playing fish are over.

As poker games (and online poker games especially), become flooded with regulars and fewer fish, players who want to keep winning need to adapt and learn to beat the regulars as well as the fish.

TAG is a style that was designed to beat fish. Years ago, when fish were plentiful, it was easy to avoid the regulars all together because the fish were spewing off enough money to keep everyone happy.

But the days of playing just the fish are over and you can no longer ignore, or avoid playing, the regulars.

Instead you have to be able to accurately recognize the weaknesses in these regular TAGfish and exploit them for profit as well. TAGfish are much more difficult to recognize than regular fish. You can’t just look at $VPIP (Voluntarily Put Money in Pre-Flop) and PFR (Pre-Flop Raise %) numbers and say, “This guy is a TAGfish.”

You have to pay attention. If you’re a regular and he’s a regular, chances are you’re going to be playing in the same games often.

Pay attention, watch his game and take notes. Information is a priceless asset in poker

Six Common TAGfish Symptoms

These are the six most common symptoms of a TAGfish:

Serial continuation-betting (c-betting) and continuation-betting once and then giving up Having a default line and not straying Overestimating implied odds Playing too loose from the blinds or early position Tilting too often Treating all regulars the same

How to Exploit a TAGfish (and How to Avoid It if You're the TAGfish)

1) Know When They Say When

The hard part of exploiting your average TAGfish is first establishing his or her leaks.

It’s beating a dead horse at this point, but it still needs to be said: pay attention!

Serial c-bettors are easily exploited.

Gone are the days where you can mindlessly 10 table without worrying about anyone. You always have to be vigilant.

You’re competing for his money and he’s competing for yours. Give yourself the upper hand and pay attention.

Serial c-bettors and serial “one and done” c-bettors are easily exploited.

Track the boards they fire one bet on. Then call the flop and take the pot away on the turn when they check.

Ace-high boards are a great example. Ace-high boards are excellent for the c-bettor but are also boards many players just fire one barrel at.

Take notes about how often a player gives up after c-betting an ace-high board. If he’s checking far too often on the turn, you can easily pick up the pot.

This goes for all board textures. Look at when a player c-bets and when he double barrels. What hands does he need to double barrel with?

This information also makes it easier when deciding whether to call that second barrel with a weakish made hand.

***If you’re the TAGfish:

Realize that you can’t always just c-bet once and give up.

Sometimes you have to give up without c-betting when you realize you’re getting floated too often.

Sometimes you’ll have to fire more than one barrel, so look at your opponent’s pop-up stats (for those that don't use Heads-Up Displays, find out more here) - and particularly his fold-to-second-barrel stat.

If he’s constantly peeling one card and then giving up to a second barrel, fire again.

2) Punish TAGfish for a Predictable Default Line

Another common TAGfish symptom is having a default line and not straying.

An example of this would be the guy who c-bets every ace-high board but never double barrels the turn without an ace.

I see what you did there.

More examples would be:

A player that always calls the flop on a dry board but raises the turn with a set Someone who always raises the flop with the nut-flush draw and always checks the turn if he misses

These players are extremely common. Chances are they’re playing a ton of tables and are not focusing at all.

They’re playing their system because it works and they don’t think, or don’t care, that good opponents are going to notice and adjust.

So take notes and adjust. If they’re playing the same way every time, after a few thousand hands you should be able to very accurately put them on a range and play accordingly.

I.e. if they’re only calling a flop then raising the turn with a set, adjust by only continuing with the nuts or near nuts.

The way to exploit this the most is to learn how they play and adjust. Don’t be afraid to go through your databases in Hold’em Manager and look at hands they've played even against other opponents.

The more you know about your opponents, the better you’ll play against them.

Soon you’ll be making easy calls and folds that would be near impossible against an unknown. But since you did your homework, they’re trivially easy.

***If you’re the TAGfish:

Realize that you can’t just play every hand the exact same way every time.

It makes you predictable and easy to play against. It’s OK to have a default line but you have to be able to mix it up.

If you do something 100% of the time, it’s going to make your opponent’s job easier. Mix up your play and keep your opponents on their toes.

3) Don’t Pay TAGfish Off When Their Draws Hit

TAGfish often overestimate implied odds. They call too often with weak gutshots or weak flush draws and expect to get paid off when they hit.

The problem for them is they don’t often hit. And when they do hit they’re never getting paid off enough to make the calls worthwhile.

Don't pay TAGfish off.

In short, they bleed money.

Exploiting these players is easy. Don’t pay them off when their draw hits.

You’re already going to be beating them just by betting your hands and having them draw without odds.

You should also double barrel these players because they’ll often peel once on the flop and fold the turn when they miss.***If you’re the TAGfish:

Don’t overestimate implied odds. If you’re playing a LAG (loose aggressive) fish, the implied odds might be there.

But if you’re playing a regular, they probably aren’t.

Instead of passively calling and folding when you miss, use these hands as semi-bluffs. Use your draw as a backup plan and raise.

Ideally you’re hoping your opponent folds, but the draw is plan B. If he calls you can still hit.

4) Three-Bet With a Wider Range, Fire Multiple Barrels

TAGfish often play too loose from early position and the blinds. TAGfish see 5♥ 6♥ UTG, think it’s a nice hand and raise it.

They don’t think about table dynamics. It’s their default line with a pretty hand and they take it.

Punish players that are too loose.

Punish players that play too loose in early position by three-betting them with a wider range.

Or you can call and take the pot away from them on the flop when they miss, which is going to be more times than not.

Players that play too loose from the blinds are easy targets as well. They defend their blinds too loose and make too many weak hands after the flop.

Weak hands are tough to play in position and even harder to play out of position. Make their life difficult by firing multiple barrels and getting them off weak one-pair hands.

If they adjust by calling more, you adjust by tightening up and value betting more.

***If you’re the TAGfish:

Understand the table dynamic before opening loose from early position. If your table is aggressive with a lot of three-bettors, you’re better off folding.

If the table is tight with players that don’t three-bet or call often, then your open can be profitable.

It’s all about recognizing when you can and when you can’t open loose.

When you’re in the blinds, remember that by calling raises you’re literally paying for the privilege to play out of position.

Playing out of position is extremely difficult – and especially when you’re doing it with weak hands. Tighten up out of the blinds and in early position.

If you want to play loose, do it from late position when it’s most profitable.

5) Keep Your Eyes Peeled for Tilters

Tilt is a vicious monster.

A regular that often tilts after a couple hands don’t go his way is nothing more than a TAGfish.

Keep an eye out. If a player loses a few hands and starts playing differently, adjust accordingly.

He may have gone from nit to maniac in a hurry.

Tilt is a vicious monster.

Sometimes tilt manifests itself in other ways. Some players won’t go crazy, open every hand and try and bluff but they won’t turn down any chance to gamble.

Some players change every decision that’s close from a fold to a call. Some tighten up. Y

You have to recognize how tilt affects each player and adjust accordingly.

***If you’re the TAGfish:

Recognize tilt and its symptoms and how it affects you.

It’s always said and it’s always true: Tilt is whenever you stop playing your A game.

If you’re not playing your A game, take a break. The game will always be there.

Save the times you play for when you’re playing your best.

6) Learn, Adjust, Adapt

TAGfish treat every fish and every regular the same.

It doesn’t matter what style they play, they lump all players into three categories:

Nit Fish Good

They treat every player in each category the same. But no two players are exactly alike; everybody has subtle intricacies to their play.

Treating everyone the same just leads to small mistakes against everyone. To exploit these players you have to strive to not play that way. Don’t treat them the same as any other TAGfish.

The best learn, adjust and adapt.

Analyze their game, find their weaknesses and exploit them. That's what separates the good players from the average.

You have to learn, adjust, and adapt.

If you can do that, you’ll crush not just the nits and the fish but you’ll also have an edge on the good players.***If you’re the TAGfish:

Stop treating everyone the same. Learn how people play and why they play that way.

The more you know about a player the better you’ll play against him. Pay attention and learn subtleties. It’s as simple as that.

Key Takeaways

There’s no easy way to beat TAGfish. It takes work.

You have to stop being a passive player and become an active player. Pay attention and learn how people play.

TAGfish sit back and wait for the fish and hope to cooler the regulars. Big winners actively play poker.

They try and find weaknesses in everybody’s games and they actively work to exploit them.

Poker isn’t a game where you can play just the hands you are in. You have to be constantly trying to pick up any bit of information out there.

Information is a weapon, and the players who glean as much as they can from their opponents are the ones that win the most.

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

10 Essential Texas Hold'em Moves: The Reverse Tell

Wed, 30 May 2012 14:00:00 -0700

There are a handful of special moves that, when mastered, can make the difference between winning a little, and winning a lot.

In this ten-part beginner poker strategy series we’re going to show you exactly how to use these powerful poker moves to make more money.

Today we’re talking about the reverse tell, sometimes called a false tell. It’s a move that can disorient your opponents and make it a lot harder for them to make the right decision.

By mastering the reverse tell you can trick your opponents into mucking when they have the best of it and shoveling their chips into the middle when they’re crushed.

The What: A form of misinformation, reverse tell refers to a deliberate behavior or action intended to make your opponent(s) think they’ve picked up information about your hand.

The Why: There are many common tells that poker players look for. By imitating these tells in the right spot you can influence your opponent’s thought process.

The Where: For a reverse tell to be successful your opponent needs to be paying attention, so this move will only work against experienced, thinking players.

The When: The most common time you can use a reverse tell is when you have made a big bet or raise and your opponent is deciding whether to call or fold.

Reverse Tells for Beginners

The essence of a reverse tell is about being able to influence your opponent’s behavior, by feeding him false information.

Anyone who's good at spotting tells is susceptible to the reverse tell.

If you know your opponent has been reading Joe Navarro’s Read ‘Em and Reap, for example, you can take advantage about what he’s learned about poker tells.

Navarro suggests that people tend to get closer physically to their cards and chips when they have a strong hand, and farther away when they’re weak.

Next time you’re bluffing all-in and your opponent looks like he’s having a tough time making a decision, lean into the table and cozy up to those cards like they’re your two best friends.

Advanced Reverse Tells

The next level of reverse tells involves setting up your opponents over the course of a session or sessions.

By making sure the other players take note of a certain behavior or tell, you can use that behavior at an opportune time to force a mistake.

For example, every time you pick up a monster hand and are value-betting or raising, make sure to completely change the topic of conversation, as if to draw attention away from the hand.

If you think your opponent has picked up on it, do the same the next time you’re running a big bluff.

The reverse tell isn’t foolproof, but poker is full of times when players are torn between calling or folding in a tough spot. Sometimes all they need is a nudge in the right direction.

Five Most Common Tells You Can Reverse

For every common tell there’s a simple reversal.

If the tell normally means you’re holding a monster hand, do it when you’re bluffing and give your opponent another reason to fold.

If the tell usually indicates air, make sure to break it out when you’re betting or raising with the nuts.

If someone hits the flop hard they'll often look away.

Here are the top five tells you can reverse:

Strong is Weak, Weak is Strong: Most people believe that when a player is holding a strong hand, they’re most likely to act weak in order to confuse their opponent. The reverse is true of someone bluffing. Throwing out bets forcefully, staring down your opponent and speaking with inflated bravado are just some of the ways players act strong. A Shaky Hand Means a Monster: Many players, especially beginners, will be more nervous when they’re holding a monster hand than when they’re bluffing. Hence the idea that when someone’s hand is shaking and jittery when they put out a bet, they’ve probably got the nuts. Staring at or Looking Away from the Flop: Similar to the ‘Strong is Weak’ idea, when a player looks at the flop and then quickly looks away it indicates he likes what he sees and is attempting to look uninterested. When a player is staring at the flop for a long time it usually indicates he has missed. Glancing at Chips: When a player quickly looks at their chips after seeing the flop, it usually means they connected with it somehow. Nonsensical Conversation: If a players is normally very smooth in their conversation and begins to speak nonsensically or clumsily when involved in a massive hand, it’s usually means they’re bluffing.

The Reverse Tell in Action

If you’re still not convinced about the power of the reverse tell, cast your mind back to the 1998 WSOP Main Event.

It was the final hand between Scotty Nguyen and Kevin McBride and there was a full house on the board, eights full of nines.

Scotty had a nine in his hand and pushed McBride over the edge into a call with the famous line, “You call, it’s going to be all over baby.”

Scotty was playing on the common tell that weak means strong and vice versa. He acted strong with a monster and tricked McBride into thinking he was trying to buy the pot.

Skip to 3:00 for the good stuff.

Read More Essential Texas Hold'em Moves:

Set-Mining The Check Raise The Light Three-Bet The Semi-Bluff The Soul Read The Stop and Go The Triple-Barrel Bluff The Squeeze Play The Bluff Catcher

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

10 Essential Texas Hold'em Moves: The Light Three-Bet

Thu, 24 May 2012 12:44:00 -0700

There are a handful of special moves that, when mastered, can make the difference between winning a little, and winning a lot.

In this ten-part beginner poker strategy series we’re going to show you exactly how to use these powerful poker moves to make more money.

Today we’re talking about the light three-bet. This is another way to pick up pots, even when you don’t pick up a big hand.

By incorporating light three-betting into your preflop repertoire you’ll not only exploit loose open-raises, you’ll also balance your range to help you get paid off when you do pick up premium cards.

The What: Light three-betting refers to putting in a re-raise before the flop with hands that are probably worse than the opening raiser’s hand.

The When: Try to identify and attack loose players who are open-raising too often.

The Where: When you’re three-betting light you’re going to be in one of two spots, either re-raising in position, or from the blinds. It’s important to understand both scenarios.

All great players are able to three-bet with a wide range of hands.

The Why: Loose players who raise too much before the flop can be exploited because they’ll be forced to fold a lot of their marginal hands to a three-bet.

Light Three-Betting Done Right

To make things easy, just think about a light three-bet as a semi-bluff.

You’re raising with a hand that, while not the best hand at the moment, has fold equity and can become the best hand on later streets.

Because one of the first things poker players learn is to be more aggressive, you’ll encounter a ton of players open-raising too much before the flop.

Once you’re able to identify these players you can exploit them by putting in a re-raise, even if you don’t have the cards to back it up.

It’s important to remember, however, that you must harness the power of the light three-bet or it could quickly become a big leak.

The biggest risk for beginner players is not understanding how to play the hand post-flop when your opponents do call.

Don’t let the hand get away from you by automatically firing a continuation bet and multiple bullets on later streets.

One way to deal with this is by only three-betting very good hands, and very marginal hands with good flopability.

Pro Tip: Polarize your three-betting range to make things easier post-flop

By staying away from hands like weak aces and big paint cards, you’ll be faced with easier decisions later in the hand, and you’ll cut down on times when you do flop something, but are dominated.

Good Hands to 3-Bet Light

Put your chips to work for you.

Just because you’re widening your three-betting range, doesn’t mean you should be re-raising every hand willy-nilly.

Going back to the analogy of the semi-bluff, you want to choose hands that have a good chance at becoming the best hand on the flop or on later streets.

Small pocket pairs are great hands to three-bet since sets are going to be the best hand the vast majority of the time.

The same goes for small and medium suited connectors.

And as we discussed before, when you miss the flop with hands like these, you’re less likely to get dragged into a big pot holding the worst hand.

Light Three-Betting Balances Your Range

Balancing your range is a fancy way of saying that just because you’re raising preflop, it doesn’t mean you have a premium hand.

If you’re only three-betting with aces and kings your opponents will catch on, and it will be impossible to get paid when you do pick up a monster.

By raising with premium hands as well as speculative hands, you have a more balanced three-betting range.

Imagine you’ve three-bet light with 8♦ 9♦ and ended up making a flush on the turn. When you show down that winning hand your opponents will take note that you three-bet with a marginal hand.

Then when you do pick up aces, they’ll be much more likely to pay you off.

Light Three-Betting in Action

If you’re still not convinced about the power of the light three-bet, check out this video featuring Phil Ivey, Lex Veldhuis and Barry Greenstein.

This hand takes the concept to the absolute extreme with a light three-bet, cold four-bet and a massive five-bet bluff jam.

Read More Essential Texas Hold'em Moves:

Set-Mining The Reverse Tell The Check Raise The Semi-Bluff The Soul Read The Stop and Go The Triple-Barrel Bluff The Squeeze Play The Bluff Catcher

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

How to Not Suck at PLO: The Five Commandments

Mon, 21 May 2012 12:36:35 -0700

Where do you go from here?

Omaha is a difficult game to master. It’s what makes the game so interesting and yet so profitable.

You can play thousands upon thousands of hands but if you’re not practicing correctly or you’re getting caught up in the gamble you may actually be doing yourself more harm than good.

It’s not the quantity of hands you play - it's the quality.

Focus on the Fundamentals

It’s easy to watch PLO online or on TV, see crazy hands go down and get caught up emulating the pros.

Here’s the thing though: The pros have played enough Omaha to know when to break the rules and when to stick to them, when to go with their reads and when to gamble.

As a new Omaha player it’s not enough to just go with "feelings." You have to stick to a very basic game plan and execute it.

When you’re a proven winner over hundreds of thousands of hands then you can start breaking the rules and advancing your game even further.

But until then you’ll likely get yourself into far more trouble than it’s worth.

The Five Commandments of Winning Omaha

1. Thou Shalt Always Play Within Thy Bankroll

Thou shalt make the nuts.

Don’t chase bigger games because they look good unless you’re more than willing to go broke. You should have a bare minimum of 50 buy-ins for the level you’re playing.

Omaha is a swingy game and you don’t want to dump half your roll chasing some fish.

2. Thou Shalt Always Play the Odds

It’s the odds that make poker a profitable game and what separates it from table games. Poker is a beatable game because you can choose when to put money into the pot.

If you always make +EV decisions and always avoid –EV decisions you’ll always make money in the long run. It’s easy to get caught up in the game and chase “feelings,” but that’s not a winning play.

The only winning play is math. Know your odds and play accordingly.

3. Thou Shalt Always Play Tight and Make the Nuts

When learning to play Pot-Limit Omaha it’s no use to open your game up because you see the pros do it.

There will be a time for that when you’re an established winner. Until then you’re just going to end up getting yourself into difficult spots where you leave yourself open to make mistakes and lose money.

Play tight and look to make the nuts with a back-up plan.

4. Thou Shalt Not Get Married to Aces

Aces are pretty. But if you can’t get committed preflop then it’s better to play them slow.

Omaha is a game where pairs rarely win at showdown. Even if your aces are the best hand, it’s often very difficult to get them to showdown to find out.

Thou shalt play within your roll.

If you’re marking yourself with aces they better be very good aces like A♥ A♦ J♥ T♦ - in other words aces with something to go along with them.

Otherwise you’re going to allow your opponents to play perfect against you while you’re stuck in the dark.

5. Thou Shalt Always Stay in Emotional Control

Omaha, even more than Hold’em, is a swingy game. You have to be able to keep your cool in the face of extreme variance.

If you go on tilt easily it might not be the game for you. When you lose control of your emotions you lose control of your ability to make winning decisions.

If you take a few beats you have to be able to take a step back and realize that you may be tilting. If you’re not in control of your emotions you should close all your games and take a break.

If you don’t recognize the symptoms you can blow week’s worth of hard grinding in just a few orbits. Stay in control and play winning poker, that’s always your number one goal.

If you stick to these rules and study the game, Pot-Limit Omaha is no different than any other game when you’re learning. You just have to make more +EV bets than –EV ones.

It’s just about recognizing what’s profitable and what’s not. That’s the hard part. You have to analyze the players, the board, your hand, the odds, everything.

It takes time and practice. But if you’re able to do that, the game is very rewarding - both mentally and financially.

More in the How to Not Suck at Pot-Limit Omaha series:

How to Not Suck at PLO: Play to the Nuts How to Not Suck at PLO: Play Tight, Play in Position How to Not Suck at PLO: Avoid Weak Rundowns How to Not Suck at PLO: Don't Overvalue Aces How to Not Suck at PLO: Bad Hands Make PLO Impossible How to Not Suck at PLO: Hit the Flop Hard How to Not Suck at PLO: Start and End with a Plan How to Not Suck at PLO: The Five Commandments

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

10 Essential Texas Hold’em Moves: The Soul Read

Thu, 17 May 2012 10:45:00 -0700

There are a handful of special moves that, when mastered, can make the difference between winning a little, and winning a lot.

In this ten-part beginner poker strategy series we’re going to show you exactly how to use these powerful poker moves to make more money.

Today we’re explaining the truth about soul reads.

What might look like a supernatural deduction akin to a fortune teller gazing into a crystal ball is actually a well-thought-out series of observations that lead to the correct decision.

We’ll show you how to make those big call downs with ace-high or bottom pair. It’ll not only impress the other players in the game, it’ll make you more money too.

The What: When people talk about making a soul read they’re referring to making a correct, yet very difficult decision, and doing it with a confidence that goes above and beyond the available info in the hand.

The When: The big call or the huge fold might be the hallmark of the soul read but really it’s a process that’s been going on from the very beginning of the hand. It begins as soon as you start assembling the pieces of the puzzle.

The Where: Soul reads can be made at any time in any poker game. When you nail your opponent on exactly what he’s holding and why he’s making certain actions, you are reading his soul.

The Who: To make a true soul read you need to know your opponent inside and out. What seems like an impossible deduction to the rest of the table is often possible because of what you know about your opponent and the history you’ve shared.

Daniel Negreanu is renowned for his ability to put players on hands.

Soul Reads Done Right

Understanding how to read souls is especially important because it relies on one of the most important skills in poker: Observation.

Poker is a game of information, and the winners are the ones who collect the most and assemble it the best to make correct decisions.

You must observe everything your opponents do, whether you’re in the hand or not. Seeing how someone plays their draws or how they behave when they flop the nuts is crucial to making that huge read when it really counts.

When you can make observations and compare that data to what you already know about your opponent’s playing tendencies, you’re ready to take the first step towards soul-reading.

You Must Read Hands Before You Can Read Souls

The easiest way to think about hand-reading in poker is to break down all possible hands into broad groups. Those groups are called “ranges”.

A range of hands contains all the card combinations with which a player would make the same actions.

For example, bottom set and top two pair are both strong hands and would fall into most players’ value-betting ranges. Ace-high and complete air, meanwhile, would be found in their bluffing ranges.

Remember, different players have different ranges. Top pair is enough for some players to get their whole stacks in with, while a good player would have no trouble laying down two-pair in the right spot.

Hands can be broken down into four basic ranges:

Monster Hands and the Nuts: These are hands that your opponent deems strong enough to bet or raise with, and has no problem getting all-in with. For most players a set or better is a monster. Made Hands with Showdown Value: These are top-pair type hands that your opponent believes stand a strong chance of being the best hand but are probably not strong enough to play for stacks. Draws: Flush draws, open-enders and combo draws that have a good chance of becoming the best hand but are not yet made. Bluffs and Air: Hands that have no chance of winning at showdown.

Phil Ivey's the only person we know who literally looks into people's souls to see what they're holding.

Once you can reliably put your opponent on a range you’ll be able to make vastly superior decisions at the poker table.

Questions You Should Ask Yourself

There’s no shortcut to perfect hand-reading but there are a number of basic questions you should always be able to answer.

Ask yourself these questions when you’re deciphering your opponent’s actions:

What kind of player is he? Is your opponent loose or tight? Passive or aggressive? Is he playing too many hands? The easiest way to tell if someone’s loose or tight is to watch how often they’re putting money in the pot. If someone is playing more than 20% of hands it’s safe to say they’re on the loose side. Is he calling or betting/raising? If a player is constantly playing hands but you can’t remember the last time they bet or raised, it’s safe to label them a passive calling station. If a player is always taking the lead with bets and raises, label them aggressive. What position is he in? Position is huge in poker and most people know it. The later the position the wider the range. The reverse is also true so give more respect to raises coming from early position.

Soul Reading in Action

If you still think soul reading is just an old wives tale, the stuff of legend, check out this video of WSOP bracelet winner Max Lykov.

The Russian defies all logic and makes an enormous call down with king high. And he does it with confidence.

Read More Essential Texas Hold'em Moves:

Set-Mining The Reverse Tell The Check Raise The Semi-Bluff The Light Three-Bet The Stop and Go The Triple-Barrel Bluff The Squeeze Play The Bluff Catcher

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

10 Essential Texas Hold'em Moves: The Semi-Bluff

Fri, 11 May 2012 10:10:00 -0700

There are a handful of special moves that, when mastered, can make the difference between winning a little, and winning a lot.

In this ten-part beginner poker strategy series we’re going to show you exactly how to use these powerful poker moves to make more money.

Today we’re explaining the Semi-Bluff, a move that can dramatically change how much money you make from your flopped and turned draws. Instead of banking on your card coming in, learn to take control of the hand and take down the pot even when you miss.

The What: Semi-bluffing, at its core, is simply betting or raising with a draw. It’s not considered a ‘pure’ bluff because you have a hand with good potential to improve on the turn or river. By betting or raising you’re giving yourself two ways to win. You might hit your draw to make the best hand, or you could win the pot uncontested when your opponent folds.

The When: Just like the majority of poker moves, the Semi-Bluff works best when you’re in position. Because a successful semi-bluff relies so heavily on fold equity, it’s only effective when your opponent has a high probability of folding.

The Where: The Semi-Bluff can be used in virtually every poker variant and format, as long as there is a draw or multiple streets of action.

Learn to semi-bluff and pretty soon you'll be making this face too.

The Why: Semi-bluffing combines the equity in your draws and the fold equity gained by the times your opponent folds and you win the pot uncontested. It also balances your betting and raising ranges

Semi-bluffing mixes up your play, making it difficult for your opponent to determine whether you’re bluffing or betting a made hand.

Semi-Bluffing Done Right

Because you flop draws relatively often it’s important to know when a semi-bluff is appropriate, and when it’s going to cost you hard-earned money.

The key point to remember is that with semi-bluffing you’ve got two kinds of equity: Pot equity and fold equity.

Pot equity refers to the portion of the pot to which you’re entitled based solely on the strength of your cards. If you’ve got a flush draw on the flop and there’s $100 in the pot your pot equity is roughly $35, because you’re going to hit your flush about one out of three times.

Fold equity refers to the value you get when your opponent folds and you win what’s in the pot without having to hit that flush draw.

So, naturally, the more of either type of equity you have, the more money you’re going to make with your semi-bluffs.

Pot equity is easy to calculate. Click through to our strategy lesson on the subject and learn to calculate your pot equity.

The more pot equity you have, the less fold equity you need, since you’ll be winning the pot by making the best hand more often.

Understanding your fold equity, however, is more difficult. There’s no simple formula to follow but there are a few key factors that must be considered.

Is Your Opponent Tight or Loose? Is He a Calling Station?

Fold equity implies the possibility of your opponent folding so it’s not going to work when you’re up against a calling station married to two overcards or bottom pair.

"Yes, those two cards there. Fold them now."

Target weak/tight players that you know you can push off marginal hands.

Board Texture and Table Image

Pay attention to the texture of the flop and the hands you consider your opponent capable of having. The wider your opponent’s range the more fold equity you have, since he’ll be dumping all his air hands without thinking twice.

If your opponents have seen you semi-bluff a lot of flush draws consider your credibility on a flop like A♣ 5♣ 2♦. Start weighting your behavior more towards value-betting made hands on these kinds of boards.

Pay Attention to How the Board Develops

Convincing your opponent to fold is the chief goal when semi-bluffing and in that way it’s identical to pure bluffing. And just like when you’re bluffing with air, the cards that fall on the turn and river are critical to your chances of success.

Big cards, preferably overcards to the board, are good cards to see when you want to semi-bluff. You want cards that weaken your opponent’s perceived range and strengthen yours.

Overcards on the turn and river are especially good to bluff at because players’ flop-calling range consists of so many top and middle pairs.

For a more detailed explanation click through to our article on firing one, two or even three barrels.

Semi-Bluffing in Action

Here’s a great example of Lex “RaSZi” Veldhuis semi-bluffing his way to a big, uncontested pot against Phil Ivey.

Veldhuis understands that Ivey’s range for betting this turn is extremely wide, and therefore his fold equity is very high. That, combined with the outs he has if he does get called, makes this a perfect spot for an aggressive semi-bluff.

Read More Essential Texas Hold'em Moves:

Set-Mining The Reverse Tell The Check Raise The Light Three-Bet The Soul Read The Stop and Go The Triple-Barrel Bluff The Squeeze Play The Bluff Catcher

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

10 Essential Texas Hold'em Moves: The Bluff Catcher

Fri, 04 May 2012 10:20:00 -0700

There are a handful of special power moves that, when mastered, can make the difference between winning a little and winning a lot.

In this ten-part beginner poker strategy series we’re going to show you exactly how to use these powerful poker moves to make more money.

Today we’re explaining the bluff catcher. We’ll show you how, against the right opponents, even marginal hands like ace-high and bottom pair can make you big money on the river.

The What: The term ‘Bluff Catcher’ is exactly what it sounds like: A hand that, while not super powerful, is good enough to beat your opponent when he’s bluffing. It’s a hand that’s not strong enough to value bet, and not strong enough to beat your opponent’s value-betting range, but has showdown value against bluffs.

The When: Generally when people talk about bluff catchers they’re referring to calling the final bet on the river.

The Where: Bluff catchers are most commonly found in bluffing games like No-Limit Hold’em and Pot-Limit Omaha but the concepts involved are useful in any poker game.

Players like Tom "durrrr" Dwan would rather you didn't read this article.

The Why: By exploiting players who bluff too much you can turn mediocre hands that you’d usually be folding into money-makers.

Bluff Catching Done Right

The most important part of using this poker power move is understanding when you’re holding a bluff catcher hand, and whether the conditions are right to call that bet on the river.

Like so much in poker, the right decision depends entirely on what you know about your opponent.

You must understand his value-betting range, and his bluffing frequency. You must understand his behavior.

By definition a bluff catcher is a hand that’s behind your opponent’s entire value-betting range. So because you can only win against a bluff, it’s paramount to be able to spot players and situations where bluffing is common.

Quite simply, the bluff catcher will never work against someone who never bluffs.

To Catch a Bluff, There Must be a Bluff

At a table of ABC/TAG players you might as well forget about bluff catchers and focus on getting value out of your big hands. But if you’re up against tricky, aggressive grinders you’ll be leaving a ton of money on the table by folding everything except the nuts.

Because good players understand that holdings are rarely bulletproof, they’re going to try to exploit you by firing missed draws, third barrels and straight-up bluffs on the river.

To use the bluff catcher effectively you have to identify players who are doing this too much, and exploit them by calling with the hands they’re trying to make you fold.

Against the right player, in the right situation, calling a river bet with ace-high will make you a fortune over your poker career.

In short, you’re looking for overly aggressive players that bet and raise more than they should.

The Math of the Bluff Catcher

Lex Veldhuis's only natural enemy is the bluff catcher.

The easiest way to think about the math behind a bluff catcher is to put it in terms of pot odds and equity.

Usually when you’re calculating expected value you’re comparing pot odds and your probability of winning a hand by hitting a draw.

But since a bluff catcher can only win when your opponent is bluffing, you can substitute his bluffing frequency for the probability of hitting your draw to see whether you’re making a profitable call.

Let’s look at an example to make that point a bit more clear:

It folds to the button in a $1/$2 No-Limit Hold’em cash game and he raises to $8. The small blind folds and you call with A♦ 3♦.

Pot = $17

The flop comes down 9♦ 8♠ 3♣ and you check-call a $10 bet.

Pot = $37

You both check the 2♥ on the turn, and the 2♣ hits the river. You check and the button bets $20.

Your hand only beats air so if he’s got a pair or better you’re sunk. Should you make the call?

To find out whether the call will be profitable in the long run you need to figure out the pot odds, and compare that to your opponent’s bluffing frequency in this spot.

You have to call $20 to win $57 so the pot is laying you 2.85 to 1 on the call.

If you believe your opponent’s river bet is a bluff 50 percent of the time you must call, since your odds against winning are 2 to 1, and the pot is offering you a better than 2 to 1 price.

While putting an exact number on bluffing frequency is impossible, you must do everything you can to understand your opponents’ tendencies and behaviors in common river-betting spots.

If you can identify the spots when they’re bluffing too much, you’re in the right position to pick them off with a weak hand you may otherwise have folded.

The most crucial skill to master in poker is the ability to put your opponent on a range and that includes knowing when he’s bluffing and when he’s value-betting.

The more accurately you can estimate the probability that your opponent is bluffing, the more money you’ll be able to make by being there to catch him.

Bluff Catching in Action

If you're still not convinced about the power of the bluff catcher, check out high-stakes legend Patrik Antonius snapping off this bluff with nothing but queen-high.

Read More Essential Texas Hold'em Moves:

Set-Mining The Reverse Tell The Check Raise The Semi-Bluff The Soul Read The Stop and Go The Triple-Barrel Bluff The Squeeze Play The Light Three-Bet

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

How to Not Suck at PLO: Start and End with a Plan

Tue, 01 May 2012 07:39:37 -0700

Check below the article for the rest in the series.

The easiest way to get better at Omaha is to start out from the very beginning with a plan.

When you’re learning the game it’s best to overly simplify it down to “look to make the nuts by the river and you’ll win.”

You do that by playing only good hands before the flop. Good hands before the flop make good hands after the flop.

And when you make good hands on or after the flop, your decisions are much easier than if you make weaker, marginal hands.

Easy decisions mean right decisions, and making right decisions is how you make money in any form of poker.

The Turn and River – Take Advantage of Easy Decisions

On the turn you finally reap the benefits of your solid pre-flop and flop play.

The turn is a very important street. By the turn you have a pretty good idea of how your hand is going to turn out.

If you’re drawing and you’ve hit, try to get all-in.

If you’ve missed, play poker and figure out if you’re being laid the right price to peel off one more card to hit your draw. If you weren’t drawing, you have to decide whether or not the turn card helped your opponent.

You do this the same way you do in Hold’em. You put your opponent on a range of hands, decide whether or not this turn has helped him and you play accordingly. It’s impossible to go over all of the different scenarios you might encounter on the turn, but the basic idea is that on the turn you finally reap the benefits of your solid pre-flop and flop play. You started out with a goal to make the nuts and now you have to play poker.

You have to think critically about what your opponent is playing for and you have to adjust accordingly.

River Value-Betting Relies on the Same Fundamentals

By the river, you now know exactly what your hand is.

There’s no magic formula. It’s just poker.

Most of the time you’re going to be all-in by this point, but when you’re not you have to determine how strong your opponent’s hand is.

You can still value bet without the nuts in Omaha but you have to be sure your opponent doesn’t have a better hand. You use the same fundamentals to figure this out as you do in Hold’em.

You re-create a picture in your head of how the hand has played out to this point and ask the same questions:

How would your opponent play made hands? How would he play drawing hands? Does your opponent call with weak hands on the river? Is he easily bluffed?

You need to take all of this into consideration on the river to decide how to act.

There’s no magic formula. It’s just poker.

Use your observation skills from previous hands to determine what you should do in each situation.

Position, Position, Position

Position in Omaha is paramount. It’s already been stated but it needs to be stated again

On the turn and river you’ll really see why.

Often in Omaha you’ll be drawing to one hand but another draw comes in.

When you’re in position and your opponent checks, you can choose to bluff or you can choose to check it down.

When you’re out of position you don’t have those options but you have to face your opponent who does have these options.

Position in Omaha just can't be understated.

Use everything you’ve learned in Hold’em and adapt it to Omaha.

If you’re playing too much out of position in Omaha, you’re going to burn money.

Key Takeaway:

Remember to plan the entire hand from the beginning. You want to make the nuts and you want to have back-up plans. If you set out from the get-go with excellent pre-flop fundamentals and you carry that over to the flop, the turn and the river are going to be a lot easier to play.

You’ll put your opponents to tough decisions and you’ll avoid the tough decisions yourself. The rest is just poker experience.

Use everything you’ve learned in Hold’em and adapt it to Omaha.

Despite key strategy differences the fundamentals are the same: calculate pot odds and observe, observe, observe.

If you do that, you’re already going to have a step up on your opponents.

More in the How to Not Suck at Pot-Limit Omaha series:

10 Essential Texas Hold'em Moves: The Stop and Go

Thu, 26 Apr 2012 12:10:00 -0700

There are a handful of special moves that, when mastered, can make the difference between winning a little and winning a lot.

In this ten-part beginner poker strategy series we’re going to show you exactly how to use these powerful poker moves to make more money.

Today we examine the Stop and Go, a move that will disorient, confuse, and ultimately break even the toughest of competition.

The What: At its most basic the Stop and Go consists of just calling a preflop raise while out of position with the intention of betting (usually all-in) on the flop no matter what cards come.

The Where: The Stop and Go is a tournament move that can be used effectively in MTTs and SNGs. The most common scenario involves calling from the blinds against a late-position opening raiser.

The When: This move is best used when short-stacked, with between five and ten big blinds.

The Why: The objective of the Stop and Go is to make your opponent throw away hands on the flop that he would have called with if you shoved pre-flop, therefore increasing your chances of winning the hand and staying alive in the tournament.

The Stop and Go Done Right

The Stop and Go is a powerful move you need to add to your shortstack tournament strategy repertoire.

Picture this: You’re in the big blind, holding A-J with a 10,000 stack at 600/1,200 with a 100 ante. It’s folded to the button who puts in a raise to 3,600. The small blind folds and you’re faced with a decision. Do you move all-in now, just call, or fold?

Even if you’re holding a premium hand like A-K, there’s good reason to just call.

The stop and go will increase your chances of survival when stuck on the shortstack.

If you move all-in, the button will have to call 6,400 to win over 20k, which means he’s priced into calling with basically anything. In fact, most good players will already have taken note of your short stack and will only raise if they’re willing to call your shove.

Because your A-K is going to lose to two random smaller cards about 35% of the time, you’re better off taking down the pot uncontested. Since that’s unlikely to happen by just shoving preflop, you need to take another approach.

That’s where the Stop and Go comes in.

Call preflop with the intention of moving all-in for 6,400 regardless of the cards that come down.

When you bet all-in on the flop, your opponent is faced with a much tougher decision. Two random cards are going to miss the flop about two thirds of the time.

First of all he will fold a lot of hands he would have been right to call with preflop. Let’s look at the hand from before.

If your opponent had a hand like pocket threes he’s going to be looking at overcards on the flop, and will have a harder time calling than he would have preflop.

If he called with a hand like K-Q and the flop came T-8-5, he’s also faced with a tough decision.

By just calling before the flop you not only stand a better chance of winning the pot uncontested, you force your opponent into tough spots where they can make mistakes.

Daniel Negreanu Explains the Stop and Go

In case you're still wondering about the effectiveness of the stop and go, let Daniel Negreanu school you up.

Read More Essential Texas Hold'em Moves:

Set-Mining The Reverse Tell The Check Raise The Semi-Bluff The Soul Read The Light Three-Bet The Triple-Barrel Bluff The Squeeze Play The Bluff Catcher

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

How to Not Suck at PLO: Hit the Flop Hard

Mon, 23 Apr 2012 05:02:25 -0700

For more in the series, check the list below the articles.

In Omaha your goal is to hit the flop hard.

Just like we talked about in pre-flop play, you want to flop a good hand with something else to go with it. In reality, that doesn’t happen as often as we’d like. But that doesn’t mean it’s time to check-fold. Just like in Hold’em you have to analyze your hand, the board texture, your opponent’s bet sizing, your opponent’s style of play, etc. to determine if your hand is good enough to proceed.

There’s no substitute for experience. The more flops in Omaha you take, the easier flop play becomes.

Straight Draws/Wraps

A wrap is a straight draw with more outs than an open-ender.

Open-enders have eight outs (four cards on either side) but full wraps can have as many as 20!

This is why big rundowns are so powerful. When you make the nut straight and someone makes a smaller straight, you’re going to make a whole lot of money. You have to learn to recognize the strength of your draws. And not just recognize how many outs you have to a straight, but how many of those are outs to nuts straights as opposed to non-nut straights.

Here’s an example: With J♥ T♠ 9♦ 7♠ on a 8♥ 9♠ 3♦ flop, you have three jacks, three sevens, four sixes, and four queens as your outs.

Learn to read the strength of your draws.

That’s a total of 14 outs and every single one of them is to the nut straight.

Now think about 7♥ 6♠ 5♣ A♣ on the same 8♥ 9♠ 3♦ flop.

You have four tens, three fives, three sevens and three sixes for 13 outs. But look further and how many of those are actually to the nuts?

Only the three fives give you the nut straight. The rest of the time you’re making a non-nut straight and leaving yourself open to being “coolered.”

Also be careful when you flop a wrap on a two-flush board. The presence of a flush draw massively de-values your straight draw.

It’s no fun hitting a straight when it makes someone else a flush.

In Omaha drawing to the non-nuts can be expensive. You need to be aware not only of how many straight outs you have but also how many of those are nut outs.

Flush Draws

A good rule of thumb for flush draws is that if it isn’t a draw to the nuts, you’d better have something to go along with it.

If you’re drawing to the second nuts or even worse, and your only plan to win the pot is to hit your flush, you’re in a whole lot of trouble. In Omaha it’s very likely your opponent is drawing to the nuts, but even if he isn’t you have very small implied odds.

If it's not the nut flush, you better have something with it.

Unlike in Hold’em, where you can get paid off by hands worse than a flush, in Omaha it almost never happens.

You’d best have a better Plan A if you have a non-nut flush draw because hitting a flush sure ain’t it. That said, nut flush draws are still strong hands - especially when you’ve got something else to go with it.

If you have anything and a nut-flush draw you’ve got yourself a great hand. If you’ve got a straight draw and a flush draw, you’ve got yourself a huge hand. Play with equities by plugging your hands into a hand calculator. It might surprise you to find out how Omaha hands on the flop stack up to other ones.

For example: A♦ J♥ T♣ 9♦ vs. 7♠ 7♥ K♣ 5♣ on a 7♦ 8♦ 2♠ board

The flush draw plus a wrap is actually a 50.33% favorite over a made set.

In Hold’em you’re never the favorite against a set with a draw but in Omaha it can happen!

Sets

Sets in Omaha are still very strong hands.

Sets turn into full houses, and full houses are big pot hands.

An Omaha caveat however is it’s not like in Hold’em where if you flop a set on the flop you just get it all-in.

In Omaha set-over-set scenarios are common and a lot of money has been lost with bottom set.

A set is still a very strong hand though and, just like everything in Omaha, if you’ve got a back-up plan to go along with it it makes your hand even stronger.

A set is strong but a back-up plan is good.

Two Pair

Two pair in Omaha is not that strong of a hand.

Yes, it will win at showdown sometimes, but not all that often - and probably not when the pot gets big.

You need big hands to win in Omaha and hands that are locks in Hold’em can be trouble hands in Omaha.

With more cards come more chances to make mistakes. So when you’re learning you want to play extremely tight - especially out of position.

Mistakes are expensive. If you set out with a good game plan, play hands before the flop that can flop big and you carry that over to the flop, the turn becomes easier to play.

So will the river. You’ll cause your opponent to make more mistakes instead of you.

Case Study:

$200 PLO game, $200 effective stacks. You raise $5 with 5♠ 6♠ 3♦ 4♥ on the button. The big blind calls.

The flop comes 8♠ 5♥ 3♠.

PLO mistakes are expensive.

How Good is Your Hand?

This is an example of a hand where you have no awesome hand but several weak hands.

You have an open-ender, but only one end to the nuts. You also have a weak flush draw and a weak two pair.

Any one of these hands on their own would be weak and probably should be avoided, but together they are much stronger.

It’s possible that your opponent has a better flush draw, or a better two pair, or a better straight draw, but it’s highly unlikely your opponent has every one of your hands beat.

In this case, your hand is actually fairly strong.

Key Takeaway:

There’s a running theme in Omaha.

The weaker your made hand, the better the rest of your hand has to be. Or the weaker your draw, the better your main hand has to be.

If it’s somewhere in the middle and both are bad, you’re probably best off folding if there’s a lot of action.

More in the How to Not Suck at Pot-Limit Omaha series:

10 Essential Texas Hold'em Moves: The Squeeze Play

Thu, 19 Apr 2012 17:30:00 -0700

There are a handful of special power moves that, when mastered, can make the difference between winning a little and winning a lot.

In this ten-part beginner poker strategy series we’re going to show you exactly how to use these powerful poker moves to make more money.

Today we’re looking at the squeeze play, a move that can increase your winrate regardless of what cards you’re holding. By leveraging a few key concepts and using your understanding of your opponents’ playing tendencies, we’ll show you how to squeeze every cent of out of your poker sessions.

The What: The squeeze play is a bluffing opportunity arising when a loose player raises before the flop and another loose player calls behind him. The “Squeeze” comes in when you put in a big three-bet and blast both of them off the pot.

The Why: Because a loose/aggressive player will often be opening with a wide range of hands, and the second player will be calling with a very wide range to see a cheap flop, neither one has a hand that can stand up to a big three-bet.

The Who: Look for loose/aggressive opening raisers who are opening too often, and weaker, passive players who are calling to see cheap flops.

Look for aggressive players opening, and loose players calling.

The Where: Squeeze plays can be used in tournaments and cash games but they’re only effective in big-bet games like No-Limit Hold’em and Pot-Limit Omaha. In Limit games you can’t raise enough to force your opponents to fold.

Squeeze Plays Done Right

At its core the squeeze play relies on the opening raiser’s loose table image, and the calling player’s awareness of that image.

Just picture it like this:

Player A (Raiser): Has a loose table image and a wide open-raising range.

Player B (Caller): Is aware of Player A’s loose image and has a wide calling range because of it.

You have to identify the right combination of loose open-raising and loose flat-calling to get a high percentage of folds.

But that’s not all that goes into a successful squeeze play:

Raise Big – Your squeeze play has to be big enough to force your opponents to fold mediocre hands. Your squeeze raise should be at least five times the initial raise.

Less Players Behind You is Better – Ideally you want to squeeze when you have as few as possible players still to act behind you. The more players to act, the more likely someone’s going to wake up with a hand. It’s also helpful if the players still to act are tight and not likely to call light.

Your Credibility and Table Image – How you’ve been playing and what your opponents know about you will affect how light they’re willing to call off. The tighter you’ve been playing the better.

All-In Squeeze Plays in Tournaments

One of the places you’ll see this move most often is when people squeeze all-in during a tournament.

There are two big reasons this is the easiest and most effective place to squeeze.

Squeeze plays are a powerful tool to have in your repertoire.

No Post-Flop Play – Since you either get called or you don’t, it takes the guesswork out of playing three-bet pots after the flop.

Added Strength – If your opponents are calling for their tournament lives they will fold a wider range of hands.

All-in tournament squeezes still rely on a loose raiser and a loose caller, but there’s another set of variables you have to consider.

The size of your chip stack, your opponents’ stacks and the blinds all have to align to make this kind of squeeze play truly effective.

Just like all squeeze plays you need to have enough chips to force your opponents to fold, but in tournaments your all-in has to make sense in relation to the blinds as well.

Look for spots where you have roughly 15 big blinds. In most situations any less than that and you’ll be giving your opponents too good a price on a call.

The Squeeze Play in Action

If you still have doubts about the squeeze play check out this hand from the 2004 WSOP Main Event.

Dan Harrington takes advantage of his tight image and the concepts described above to win a big pot with 6-2.

Read More Essential Texas Hold'em Moves:

Set-Mining The Reverse Tell The Check Raise The Semi-Bluff The Soul Read The Stop and Go The Triple-Barrel Bluff The Light Three-Bet The Bluff Catcher

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

How to Not Suck at PLO: Bad Hands Make PLO Impossible

Tue, 17 Apr 2012 17:50:00 -0700

Check below the article for more articles in the series.

Omaha doesn’t necessarily have a cookie-cutter formula for which hands to play and which not to play.

It’s not as simple as that.

You need to be able to evaluate each and every hand you’re dealt to decide whether or not it will be profitable.

The factors remain constant though the cards themselves may change.

You want a hand that has great flopabilty, one that can make the nuts, and has something to go along with it.

That’s the best-case scenario.

The rest of the hands you can be dealt in Omaha are on a sliding scale and it’s up to you to analyze them to determine how good they are actually are.

Getting Kings in vs. Aces is a Mistake

Kings are another trouble hand for players transferring over from Hold’em to Omaha.

Kings are weak for the same reason aces are weak - one pair rarely wins at showdown, and it’s tough to get to showdown.

Unlike aces though, you rarely want to get kings in pre-flop - even if you can get your stack committed.

If most of your money goes in and you have kings, you’re probably in big trouble. Aces over kings are rare in Hold’em and it’s considered a cooler.

Ben Lamb knows how to not suck at PLO.

With four cards in Omaha, aces are dealt far more often and getting kings in vs. aces isn’t a cooler – it’s a mistake. Kings should be played carefully before the flop unless they’re extremely strong kings - for example something like

A♦ K♦ K♥ Q♠ or K♥ K♠ Q♥ J♠.

Compare K♥ K♦ 4♠ 9♣ to the good kings above. These weak kings have nothing going for them.

If they’re going to win at showdown in a deep stack game, they’re going to have to flop a set or they’re basically worthless.

Big Suited and Double-Suited Cards

If I haven’t beaten this horse to death yet I’m about to: The best hands in Omaha have more than one thing going for them.

You want to be able to make the nuts and have a back-up plan. Big suited cards and double-suited cards don’t often flop the nuts but they do often flop big two-pair hands that become big full houses. Big card hands like AKJT, AQT9 KTJ9 etc, are good on their own but they’re great when they’re suited and double suited.

A♠ J♠ T♣ 9♣ is an excellent hand and probably better than a non-suited AKQJ because it has two suits to go along with it including a nut suit. Having a nut suit is extremely powerful because flush-over-flush scenarios are common in Omaha.

Position is especially important in Pot-Limit Omaha.

With the nut suit in your hand, you’ll “cooler” the smaller flushes.

Playing Out of Position in Omaha is Practically Impossible

Position is important in Hold’em but in Omaha it’s paramount.

Omaha is a game where the lead changes on practically every single street.

It’s often difficult to know where you are in a hand and being out of position only makes it worse.

If playing out of position in Hold’em is difficult, in Omaha it’s practically impossible. To adjust, you should be playing extremely tight from out of position - especially when you’re just starting out.

As you begin to learn the game and figure out the subtle intricacies you can begin to open your game up a bit more.

But even still the best Omaha players play out of position as little as possible because it’s very, very difficult.

Key Takeaway:

When you play tight before the flop and evaluate your starting hand strength ruthlessly, you make the rest of the hand easier to play out.

It can be very easy to get caught up in the action and play too many hands in Omaha, but the best players are able to stick to their game plans and play profitable poker.

Learning what makes a good Omaha hand and what separates a good hand from a great hand may seem like a steep learning curve, and it is.

But once you figure it out and you evaluate your hand’s strengths and weaknesses on the fly, it starts to become easier and you start becoming a good PLO player.

More in the How to Not Suck at Pot-Limit Omaha series:

10 Essential Texas Hold'em Moves: The Triple-Barrel Bluff

Fri, 13 Apr 2012 11:00:00 -0700

There are a handful of special moves that, when mastered, can make the difference between winning a little and winning a lot.

In this beginner poker strategy series we’re going to introduce you to 10 essential Texas Hold’em moves and show you exactly how to use them to make more money.

Today we cover the triple-barrel bluff, the gunslinger of poker tactics. Blow holes in your opponent’s defenses by firing bluff bullets on every street, forcing them to lay down the best hand.

The What: The bones of a triple-barrel bluff involves making bets on each and every street, usually after taking control of the hand by being the pre-flop aggressor.

The When: While a triple-barrel bluff can be effective against all but the biggest calling stations, it’s a move usually reserved for tougher, thinking opponents. In order to three-barrel bluff effectively you need to be acutely aware of the story you’re telling in the hand, and your opponent’s ability to follow the plot.

The Where: In order to triple-barrel bluff effectively you need enough chips to make increasingly large bets on the flop, turn and river. This means the move only works in deep-stacked situations. Forget about triple-barreling if you’re sitting in an online poker MTT with 20 big blinds.

The Why: A big part of succeeding in poker involves winning pots when your hand is worse than your opponent’s and no move in poker tells a more convincing story than a well-executed three-barrel bluff. Not only can you get players to throw away mediocre hands that beat you, you can trick them into mucking hands that have you absolutely crushed.

Triple Barrel Bluffing Done Right

Firing three barrels as a bluff is something you should incorporate into your game because it will not only win you money when you don’t have a hand, it will also help balance your range and get you paid off when you bet every street with the nuts.

Every successful pro knows when and where to triple-barrel bluff.

But if done willy-nilly, without understanding why you’re three-barreling, it can become a serious leak.

Because we’re assuming these concepts are new to you we’re going to keep it simple and focus on easy ways to decide whether it’s appropriate to keep firing at a pot.

Fire the Flop

Even beginners know that being the aggressor pre-flop is important, but things can get tricky when deciding whether to continuation bet. Because all three-barrel bluffs begin with the continuation bet, it’s crucial to understand what kind of boards you can continuation bet profitably.

Since we’re talking about three barrel bluffs, and not value-betting three streets, we’ll assume you miss the flop.

The most basic way to look at flops is whether they are coordinated or not. A flop like J♣ T♣ 7♣ is a lot easier to connect with than something like K♦ 8♣ 2♠. Look for dry uncoordinated flops to continuation bet.

Also consider that as the preflop aggressor opponents will weight your range towards big cards, while their range may be weighted more towards medium cards and smaller pocket pairs. Look for flops that match your perceived range and miss your opponent’s.

Trigger-Pull the Turn

Deciding whether to continue firing on the turn is crucial, and it’s all about how the board develops.

It's important to understand what turn and river cards are good for barreling.

The whole idea is to fire at cards that improve your perceived range, and hurt your opponent’s. Again, look for high cards, preferably higher than the high-card on the flop. Cards that are bigger than the second highest card on the flop are also great second-barrel cards.

A huge part of your opponent’s flop-calling range is middle pairs and top pairs. Any big cards make those hands more vulnerable.

Cards that pair the board are generally bad boards at which to fire a second barrel.

Long-Rifle the River

After three streets of betting, correctly sizing your third bullet is especially important to your bottom line.

Remember the concepts we went over on the turn and take it one step further. Big cards, preferably overcards to the board, are good for triple-barreling, while cards that complete draws are not.

Another thing to think about is the development of the board on the turn. Often your opponent will be calling with middle or top pair on the flop and pick up some sort of extra draw on the turn that allows him to continue in the hand.

If the turn put a bunch of draws on board, but the river missed them, consider a third barrel.

Three-Barreling in Action

Here’s a chance for you to see the power of the triple-barrel bluff in action.

In a particularly nose-bleedy episode of High Stakes Poker, Tom “durrrr” Dwan cold-three bets from the big blind and fires every street against Phil Ivey.

To Ivey’s credit he comes close to making a truly sick call but in the end even he bows to the power of the triple barrel bluff.

Read More Essential Texas Hold'em Moves:

The Squeeze Play

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

How to Not Suck at PLO: Don’t Overvalue Aces

Mon, 09 Apr 2012 12:17:57 -0700

Check below the article for more articles in the series.

Aces in Omaha are very tricky business.

New Omaha players overvalue and overplay pocket aces way too often.

In Omaha, pairs are rarely good at showdown.

Omaha is a post-flop game and in deep-stacked Omaha it’s extremely hard to even get to showdown with aces - let alone see those aces win.

Playing with aces is difficult, but can be made much easier with a few simple points of understanding.

Hey guys, I have aces.

Your Goal is Pot Commitment

Aces in PLO play best when stacks are short and/or when you can get a large portion of your stack in before the flop.

With aces your goal is to get yourself pot committed so no matter what the flop you’ll be getting all-in. How much of your stack you need to get into the middle before being committed is up for debate, but ideally you’d want your flop bet to be less than a pot-sized bet to get all-in.

How you get yourself committed is another thing. You have to pay attention to your stack size as well as anyone else in the hand.

If you realize that the pre-flop raiser has a shallow stack, you can re-raise if you know you’ll be heads up because you’ll have no problem getting committed versus his stack size. You can also limp and hope someone behind you pots it and gets a few callers in order to repot it and get a huge bet in.

Hey Guys, I Have Aces

Be careful: you have to make sure that this bet will get you committed.

Nothing is worse than making a large pre-flop raise that doesn’t get you committed and you’re left in the dark after the flop.

If you can’t get committed you’re better off just calling, keeping your aces concealed, and seeing a flop.

When you raise or re-raise and tell the table you have aces, but you don’t get enough of your stack in to be committed, you’re in an extremely dangerous spot.

The table knows you have aces and can play perfectly against you but you have no clue what the other players have.

Not all aces created equal.

You’re left guessing, which is why it’s often better to just call a raise and keep aces hidden if you can’t get a large, committing raise in.

Not All Aces are Created Equal

Just like some rundowns are better than others, some aces are better than others.

And just because you have aces that doesn’t mean you have a good hand.

Yes, aces are probably a favorite over most other hands. But that’s if you can get to showdown, which is no guarantee.

Good Aces

You’ll start to see a common theme emerging in these articles.

The best hands have more than one way to win. They don’t just depend on one aspect of the hand - they’re multi-faceted. The best aces have a little something to go along with them, be it a nut suit, or straight potential, or whatever.

Some examples of good aces would be:

A♥ A♦ T♥ J♦ A♣ A♠ K♠ Q♣ A♦ A♣ 5♠ 5♣

It should be easy to determine how good your aces actually are.

Good aces have something else to go along with the aces - flush potential, straight potential, other set potential, etc.

Aces themselves are great, but with a few Plan Bs they’re even better.

Know your bad aces.

If your aces are especially strong you don’t even need to worry about broadcasting to the whole table you have aces because you have so much else going for you that they don’t know.

Bad Aces Bad aces are just the opposite. They’re aces and that’s it.

They have no other potential and the only way they’re probably going to win is by using the aces at showdown.

An example of bad aces is:

These aces are difficult to play and very weak.

If you can’t get committed with these, it’s better to just call and see a flop with your aces hidden.

Case Study:

$1/$2 Pot-Limit Omaha game; $400 effective stacks. There are two limpers to the button, who makes it $6.

You have A♦ A♣ 4♠ 9♥ in the small blind.

What Should You Do?

In this spot you should almost always just call.

Your aces are raggedy, you’re out of position, and the stacks are deep so you have no chance of getting committed.

But let’s change the example just slightly.

Fine line between awesome and awful.

$1/$2 PLO game. You have a $50 stack. The UTG player makes it $6 and two players call behind him.

You’re still in the small blind with your raggedy A♦ A♣ 4♠ 9♥.

But now there’s $21 in the pot and your maximum raise is $27.

What Should You Do?

You can get more than pot committed by getting more than 50% of your stack in.

So make that pot raise and shovel the rest in on any flop that comes!

Key Takeaway

Aces in PLO are a fine line between awesome and awful.

Aces get new players into trouble far more often than any other hand in PLO.

Players come over from Hold’em thinking that aces are the stone cold nuts but in Omaha they’re just another hand. However, if you’re smart and you can recognize the strength of your aces - times you can get committed and the times you can’t, when you have strong aces and when you have weak aces - it’ll help de-mystify them and help you understand the entire game of Omaha better.

More in the How to Not Suck at Pot-Limit Omaha series:

How to Qualify for the EPT: Climbing the Seven Steps

Thu, 05 Apr 2012 10:45:17 -0700

Check below for links to previous articles in the series.

From just learning the ropes in Step A to winning it all in Step G, the PokerStars Steps tournaments are a long, exciting route to the EPT.

You start with the virtual beginners, grasping around for the right moves, and by the time you finish in Step G you're going head-to-head with some of the best players in the world.

To do well in the Steps tournaments you must have a somewhat successful track record in SNGs.

You also need to have a good understanding of the changing rhythms needed: of prudence in the first levels to an aggressive finish.

Climbing the Steps

The goal in these tournaments, obviously, is to climb your way up the ladder to the top step.

Gradually, as you get closer, you need to be sure to pay attention to the "programming" needed for the following step.

When you’ve acquired your ticket for Step F, observe in volume and take a lot of notes on the play of specialists.

But above all, don’t rush! To give yourself the best chance to qualify, only choose the best moments.

Poker Stars and the seven steps.

Don’t Lose Your Ticket

When you’re trying to climb the Steps ladder, the first objective is primarily to not lose your ticket to the level you're at.

Finishing in third or fourth place will usually reimburse your ticket for that level and not drop you down to your previous step.

If you don’t win the first time but finish third or fourth, you can play several more times and give more chances to, well, chance.

Your objective must then first be to not lose ground, which will then automatically multiply your chances of winning.

The First Stages to the Final Four

In short, at any Step level: Avoid any flips in the first stages, see flops quietly and only make small bluffs to steal the pot.

You don’t want to put yourself in any danger in this part of the tournament as you need to make the final four places 9 times out of 10.

When you get to the final four players, that's when the real qualifying starts and controlled risk-taking is essential.

At four players, you have to go looking for chips so you won’t be the short stack against the other players, who will likely band together.

This is where you must not miss your chances.

You can’t learn everything in a few lines, but if you have the chance to get to three players and there are only two winners… Well, here is where I want to help you ensure your qualification.

So: Hands off the mouse. No reflexive or quick moves. Use your time bank every time.

A Quick Spin Through the Math

You’re at three players and there are two qualifiers. In other words, you have two chances in three to win (66%).

The objective here is only to further increase your chances, so don’t make any moves that increase your risk of a quicker elimination.

How? A flip with QQ against AK? Of course not!

This decreases your chances from essentially 66% to 53% (your slight edge in the flip).

Have a nice-looking AK in your hand and thinking about trapping your opponent who you will put all in with his JT?

Not good either, as your chances still decrease again – you’re only a 60% favorite there rather than 66%.

With your AK, you can still trap even better. See yourself beating his A2 with your AK?

Still no!

Your odds are indeed the exact same at two out of three, but here you’re actually initiatiing your chance to lose right now.

What About Aces?

Ok, so what about THE bomb? Happily, you look down and see AA.

At the end of the steps, ElkY awaits.

Better, but don’t forget that it’s still not a guaranteed win.

That said, yes, in that exact case you increase you chances substantially from 66% to 80% so your chances of winning are greater.

But now, well, you’ve become aware of the hazards of poker. You can still lose 20% of the time with aces.

Your Best Move is to Not Play

At three players left, your #1 goal is to get into the best position possible … where you DO NOT PLAY!

This exact spot is when the other two players have an all in and a call between them.

If they have equal stacks, this is the only moment in poker where you’ve increased your chances of winning to infinity.

So wait all you can, watch the aggressiveness of your opponents and concentrate on the real goal.

This is your obssession: to stay in the tournament until the other two are all-in against each other.

By focusing on this reality, you let the others run into each other and you multiply your chances of success.

Good luck!

More in the How to Qualify for the EPT Series:

How to Qualify for the EPT: A Quick Tip to Boost Your Chances 50% How to Qualify for the EPT: AK - Premium Hand or Timebomb? How to Qualify for the EPT: Don't Reduce Your Chances to Survive How to Qualify for the EPT: Avoid Bad Risks and Count Stacks How to Qualify for the EPT: The Right Bankroll Balance How to Qualify for the EPT: Beating the $22 Rebuy

About the Author:

Pierre Neuville is known across Europe as the "Serial PokerStars Qualifier" for his incredible run of qualifying for 23 consecutive European Poker Tour main events via online satellite. Read more about Pierre Neuville on his author page.

To open a new account at PokerStars and take advantage of our exclusive sign-up bonus and monthly freerolls, click through to our PokerStars review page.

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Crash Course in Zoom Poker Strategy

Thu, 05 Apr 2012 02:10:25 -0700

Below is a guide to getting started in Zoom Poker including some background information and basic strategy tips.

Follow these guidelines and you’ll be putting in Isildur1-style volume in no time!

What is Zoom Poker?

PokerStars’ Zoom Poker is a high-action online poker variant similar to the old Rush Poker on Full Tilt Poker.

The basic premise is simple: fold your hand and immediately get a new one at a new table with new players. If you hit the fast-fold button, you can even fold before the action is on you and get reseated even quicker.

It’s essentially poker for adrenaline junkies as the action never stops.

If you’ve ever 8-tabled online poker or played multi-tasking video games like Starcraft there’s a good chance you’ll enjoy the speed of Zoom Poker.

Right now Zoom Poker is offered in No-Limit Hold’em, Pot-Limit Omaha and Five-Card Draw and at up to four tables per player.

What’s Good About Zoom Poker (Hint: Volume)

Zoom Poker is a godsend for any ADD-riddled poker player who simply needs more action.

It’s also very good for generating massive amounts of frequent player points and for players trying to reach SuperNova status. For those who don’t know, PokerStars has a very lucrative VIP program with prizes, cashback and more.

You can triple or even quadruple the amount of hands you can play in an hour quite easily with Zoom Poker. That means that even if you’re breaking even you might be earning cash in the form of some serious FPPs.

Downside of course is you’re paying more in rake, but if you're a solid player you should be making it up in FPPs.

Hope you like PLO or NLHE

Is it Real Poker?

This remains a contentious issue as Zoom Poker is lacking one major aspect of regular poker – the chance to develop a read on a player.

Because you’re always moving to another table you’ll constantly be playing against opponents you know nothing about. It gives the game a much more robotic feel.

It also means that math plays heavier into the game as well as the ability to develop quick reads on virtually unknown opponents.

Zoom Poker also discourages seasoned grinders from hunting inexperienced players because they are constantly being moved.

Differences from Rush Poker

Although very similar there are a few differences that separate Zoom Poker from FTP’s Rush Poker. Amongst them:

No Rakeback. One of the best features of Full Tilt’s Rush Poker was the ability to earn rakeback. There is no rakeback on PokerStars. Fortunately you can earn FPPs, which are almost as good. Only Cash Games. PokerStars has yet to release tournament Zoom Poker. Sit Out Options. You can actually choose to sit out the next hand or the next big blind. In Rush Poker you could only sit out the next hand. Smooth Software. Although it’s still in beta, Zoom Poker seems to run a bit smoother than Rush Poker. It’s clear the PokerStars developers spent a lot of time on it.

Some Strategy Tips for Zoom Poker

Tight tends to be right in Zoom Poker. No one can tell how tight you’re playing so it’s possible to fold every hand unti you get aces and stack someone who has AK. Speaking of AK, be careful with it. It’s far weaker in Zoom Poker than in a normal game. You can watch the end of a hand by holding the CNTRL key when you click the fold button (That’s the command button on Macs). There are several different Zoom table animations. Some feel faster than others. You can find these by clicking ‘Options’ > ‘Table Display Options’ > ‘Zoom Animation’. We like ‘Flip’ a lot but default ‘Fade’ still seems fastest Play fewer tables with Zoom Poker (It’s freaking fast!) Be mindful of your blinds as you’ll pay more of them The big blind is the only player who doesn’t have the option of fast folding. Expect a wider-range of starting hands. Each Zoom Poker “game” can have hundreds of players. You can open multiple tables in the same game. Be prepared for massive swings as you’ll being playing a massive number of hands You’ll see a fair amount of min-bets from late position as people attempt to steal a pot off the players who have already fast folded. Quite often you’ll run into deep stacks with 100+ big blinds behind. Check this article on NLHE Deep Stack strategy.

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

How to Not Suck at PLO: Avoid Weak Rundowns

Mon, 02 Apr 2012 08:58:06 -0700

Check below the article for the other parts in the series.

In Omaha, you start every hand out with a plan to make the nuts.

Rundowns (meaning four cards that are connected in sequence, like 6789) give you that chance and are among the strongest starting hands in PLO.

But not all rundowns are considered equal.

Bigger = Better

The bigger the rundown, the better.

You always want to make the nuts and “cooler” people when they make a second-best straight.

If you set yourself up by playing the right hands in the right position, you’ll be doing the coolering more often than you’ll be getting coolered.

It’s for that reason that big rundowns are much stronger than smaller rundowns.

The bigger the rundown, the better.

For example:

T♠ 9♠ 7♥ 8♦ is a lot more powerful of a hand than 3♠ 4♠ 5♦ 6♦.

The former will simply make the nuts far more often than the latter.

Making second-best straights in Omaha is extremely expensive and the primary reason why small rundowns should seldom be played.

Rundowns also have excellent flopability because when you flop two pair you always flop a draw to go along with it.

The Best Rundowns

The best rundowns are large rundowns with few gaps.

Just like in Hold’em, suited connectors (eg. 7♠ 8♠) are much better than suited two-gappers (eg. 7♠ 5♠).

In Omaha, T987 is a much better hand than J786.

The more gaps in your hand, the harder a time you’ll have making the nut straight.

AKQJ is an excellent hand but it’s not the most powerful rundown because it can only make two different straights as opposed to four.

More powerful rundowns are:

J♦ T♠ 9♦ 8♠ Q♥ J♦ T♠ 9♣ 9♠ 8♦ 7♠ 6♥

These rundowns can make straights in more ways, and when they do they’ll often “cooler” smaller straights.

The more ways to make second-best, the weaker the hand.

Strong Rundowns

Weaker, but still strong, rundowns are rundowns with a gap in them.

Ideally if you do have a gap in your rundown you’d like it to be on your smallest cards ex. JT97.

That way when you flop a “wrap,” a straight draw with more outs than an open-ender, more of your outs will be to the nuts.

Eg. JT97 on 89X, 78X, 68X etc. When the gap is on your top card, eg. T765, when you flop a wrap half the time you’ll be drawing to the non-nut straights e.g. T765 on 89X, 87X etc.

And, as we’ve established, drawing to non-nut straights is ill advised.

Other strong rundowns are three-card rundowns with a nut suit.

e.g. A♠ 8♠ 7♥ 6♥.

The nut suit (having the ace of the suit) adds value to this hand because you can now flop huge.

You can flop a wrap with the nut flush draw, two pair with the nut flush draw, etc. If you have a nut suit it really increases the value of your hand.

You must always be calculating in your head how often your hand is going to make the nuts. The more ways to your hand can make the nuts, the stronger the hand.

The more ways you can make second-best, the weaker the hand.

Weak Rundowns

Weak rundowns are hands that, even when they flop big, are trouble hands.

Small rundowns like 3456, rundowns with gaps (8543) and similar hands are extremely weak.

When these types of hands make straights they will seldom make the nut straight. And when they make two pair, seldom will it be the best hand.

Suited rundowns are infinitely more powerful.

Bottom line, these hands are trash and should be avoided.

Suited Rundowns Make Your Hand More Powerful

Having a rundown that’s suited (or preferably double suited) makes your hand infinitely more powerful.

Eg. 5♠ 6♠ 7♥ 8♥ is so much better than 5♦ 6♣ 7♠ 8♥.

Though none of the suits are nut suits, being suited just adds Plan Bs and Cs to your hand.

Remember we want to flop something with something else.

When you flop the nuts on 4♠ 3♠ 2♥ with 5♠ 6♠ 7♥ 8♥, you can freeroll on anyone with 5♦ 6♣ 7♠ 8♥. Being suited and double suited gives you more options to win and makes your hand much, much stronger.

Case Study:

$1/$2 PLO with $200 effective stacks.

A player raises to $5 under the gun and another player calls on the button. You call in the big blind with T♠ 7♥ 8♦ 6♥ and go three-way to a flop.

The flop comes 8♦ 3♠ 9♠.

You bet $10 and the original raiser makes it $40. The button calls.

Not all rundowns are created equal.

What Should You Do?

You should fold. Yes, you have a wrap, but it’s a weak one.

You have few outs to the nuts, there’s a flush draw out there, and you’re out of position.

There are very few good turn cards for your hands. Often you’ll make a straight and someone will make a bigger one costing you money.

Key Takeaway

You have to remember not all rundowns are created equal.

If you play weak rundowns too often you’ll find yourself being coolered as opposed to doing the coolering.

If you do that, you’ll lose a ton of money.

Learn how to recognize strong wraps, avoid weak rundowns and you’ll find yourself on the right side of those straight-over-straight scenarios.

More in the How to Not Suck at Pot-Limit Omaha series:

How to Qualify for the EPT: Beating the $22 Rebuy

Thu, 29 Mar 2012 10:17:54 -0700

See the list of all articles in the series below.

The $22 Rebuy EPT qualifier on PokerStars is a tricky tournament as there is only one or two EPT seats available.

The goal with this article is to give you the best chance for a return on your investment.

Step 1: Understand the Different Parts of the Tournament

First step: Distinguish the two completely different parts of the tournament.

Part A: The Re-Buy Period

The objective in the re-buy stage is to survive as economically as possible while at the same time building a stack, little by little, to have enough chips for the increasing blinds.

The last 10 minutes before the add-on period, in fact, can be quite expensive given how fast the blinds are rising.

At the beginning of the re-buy period, you can do a double re-buy to truly double your stack up to a full 20,000 if you have the chance.

Get to the rebuy and half the field is gone.

But, during this period, you have to play very economically – meaning no flips for 5,000 or 6,000 chips.

These won’t increase your chances of qualifying.

The only goal – never to lose sight of – is to get to the add-on period without spending too much.

This is achieved by going into a mode of play that’s a bit unusual – essentially you don’t “play” poker during this period.

You “survive economically,” see very few flops and maximize your return if there's an opportunity.

When you’re in the pre-add-on period, you must only do one re-buy at a time … and then try to survive until you find a flop that can quadruple you up.

First Benefit of the Add-On Stage: Fewer Players to Share the Money

Congratulations.

You’ve made it to the add-on stage, where 50% of the players who started the tournament have already dropped out.

This is the first benefit of this type of qualifying tournament: the prize money is now divided up between a much smaller group of players.

In the long run, we can have a very good ROI in this tournament if we play into the add-on period every time.

In fact the real tournament doesn’t even begin until the add-on stage - and the number one advantage is that fewer players will share the overall prize money.

Part B: The Add-On Stage

The add-on is 50,000 chips and each player now starts a new tournament where everyone has virtually the same stack - between 55,000 and 100,000+.

Get the seat and Boeree awaits.

Also of note here: there is often a few payout spots of €500 in these tournaments on top of the sole winner of the qualifier.

So for a good return, watch out for this bubble before taking the risks you need to win the “winner takes all” part of the tournament.

In Summary:

Basically there are three parts to the $22 re-buy tournaments:

1) The first part, where the objective is to arrive at the add-on stage, absolutely, but to get there as cheaply as possible.

2) The second part is between the add-on stage and the money bubble (if there are extra payout spots) where you can look to get a small return on your investment

3) The “winner takes all” stage once the payouts are reached where the real battle for qualification begins

These require three different strategies altogether depending on the period.

If your average re-buy cost stays around €240, this tournament is very profitable if you win one in 12.

Good luck!

More in the How to Qualify for the EPT Series:

About the Author:

To open a new account at PokerStars and take advantage of our exclusive sign-up bonus and monthly freerolls, click through to our PokerStars review page.

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

How to Not Suck at PLO: Play Tight, Play in Position

Mon, 26 Mar 2012 10:12:21 -0700

Check for new parts in the series every Monday.

In Omaha, pre-flop play matters slightly less than it does in Hold’em.

With that said though, pre-flop is still a very, very important street.

And just like in Hold’em, folding weak hands pre-flop makes your decisions on later streets much easier.

The easiest way to think about it is like this:

The more weak hands you play, the more marginal hands you make The more marginal hands you make, the more difficult the decisions you’ll have The more difficult your decisions are, the more mistakes you’ll make The more mistakes you make the more money you’ll lose

It’s that simple.

So just like in Hold’em, you have to practice great discipline, avoid trouble hands and focus on great money earners in Omaha.

When you play good hands before the flop, your flop play and onward becomes much, much easier.

So What Hands Do I Play?

When you’re thinking of what makes a good starting hand in Omaha, you always have to be thinking:

Second-best hands are expensive.

“How can I make the nuts?”

Second-best hands are expensive, so making the nuts is the ultimate goal.

Your hand selection should be based upon that. You want hands that can hit the flop hard. Hands like 8♠ 9♠ T♥ J♥.

A big, double-suited rundown like 8♠ 9♠ T♥ J♥ is even preferred to aces in deep-stack Pot-Limit Omaha.

That’s because when it connects with the flop it connects HARD.

Picture 8♠ 9♠ T♥ J♥ on a flop of 7♥ 8♥ 9♦.

Here you flopped the nut straight with a gutshot straight-flush draw and top two pair.

Yes, this flop is rare. But it shows you how much different Omaha plays than Hold’em.

You want hands that can flop big in more ways than one. You want to hit something with something else.

Connectedness, Suitedness and Flopability

When deciding which hands to play in Omaha you should look at these factors:

Connectedness Suited and Double Suitedness Flopability

Connectedness

Flopability is key.

Connectedness is obvious; you want cards that have many different ways to flop the nuts.

In Hold’em, suited connectors are good because they make big-pot hands like straights.

In Omaha, four cards in a row are extremely powerful because there are more ways to flop straights and straight draws.

Suited and Double Suitedness

Suitedness and double suitedness is similar.

If you flop a straight or two pair, it never hurts to flop a flush draw to go along with it.

With double-suitedness (two cards each of the same suit) your flush draw can be either Plan A or Plan B.

In short, you have options.

For example if you have A♦ A♠ 3♦ 8♠ on a 9♠ 2♦ 5♣ flop, your main hand is your pair of aces.

But you also have two backdoor nut-flush draws that you can always fall back on.

If you have something like 8♠ 9♠ A♣ T♣ and the flop comes #6s7c5♣, you flopped the nuts. But if you get it all-in with another person who flopped the nuts, you’re now freerolling with the nut-flush draw.

Flopability

Flopability means you hit one part of your hand but you also have something else to go along with it.

For example a hand like 8♠ 8♦ 7♠ 6♦ has good flopability.

Say the flop comes 8♥ 5♣ 3♠. You’ve hit top set, but because your hand has great flopability you also have an open-ender.

In Omaha you want to be flopping something with something else to go along with it as much as possible.

The lead often changes on every single street so it’s always a good idea to have more than one thing going for you.

Play hands that keep your options open and your opponent guessing.

A Quick Note on Position

Tight is right to start.

We’ll discuss this more later but in Omaha position is extremely important.

Being able to decide to take a free card or bluff when your opponent checks is even more important in Omaha than in Hold’em because of that ever-changing “lead” factor.

If you’re playing Omaha too much out of position you’re going to be left guessing too often and you’re going to bleed money. When you’re learning Omaha it’s very important to play extremely tight when you’re out of position.

As you learn the game you can begin to play more hands out of position, but when you’re learning you will literally just be giving money away.

Key Takeaway:

The fundamentals of a good Pot Limit Omaha game start before the flop.

It’s very easy to get caught up in the gamble-y nature of the game and to play too many hands, but that needs to be avoided.

Focus on playing tight – especially when you’re out of position.

You want hands that can flop big with something to go with it.

If you can do that and stay out of the potential trap of gambling too much, you’ll be on the right path.

More in the How to Not Suck at Pot-Limit Omaha series:

How to Qualify for the EPT: The Right Bankroll Balance

Thu, 22 Mar 2012 11:31:58 -0700

Everything has its price, and naturally so does qualifying for a European Poker Tour event.

Before you can even get into portioning out what you'll need for a decent shot at qualifying for an EPT package, you need to start with proper overall management of your poker bankroll.

How much have you decided to dedicate to poker? Is it just an occasional distraction for you?

Is it a passion you’ve assigned a fixed and reasonable budget within your means? What’s the right amount of money that can support your passion for poker?

You need to calculate this coldly and isolate your bankroll in a separate account. Never mix your family budget or even your pocket money with your poker bankroll.

This organizational detail is important for everybody in poker.

Poker should always remain a pleasure and in absolutely no way should it disturb or threaten your financial situation.

There’s a level in poker for every budget, from $1 to infinity. Choose yours on the right conditions for you and poker will create nothing but fun and happiness .

Dreams Do Have a Price

Before getting into the specific bankroll requirements for EPT qualifying, everyone must first choose the level of poker that suits him or her.

The European Poker Tour, the richest poker tour in the world, obviously demands a substantial budget.

The richest tour has its price.

Still, I think most players can reasonably manage a bankroll that will let them take a shot at qualifying for an EPT package.

From the true starting levels you can try for just a few dollars, but of course a real dedicatd project will demand a real budget.

Three Basic Divisions for Your Bankroll

Take for example a poker budget of €400/month – a fairly standard budget level for those who can afford an average lifestyle.

If this is your poker budget we can think about dividing it into three parts that cover most players' basic interests:

€100 for regular online MTTs, which will allow for 10-20 events per month €100 for two tournaments in your favorite casino. €200 per month towards the dream of qualifying for an EPT event

The cost of an EPT main event buy-in plus travel & hotel is generally around €8,000.

Our goal is to qualify for a quarter of that price.

So managing a decent EPT qualifying budget over a full year will cost you €2,400 (12 x €200).

Three Distinct Types of Qualifiers

There are three distinct classes of satellites on PokerStars:

Multi-Table Tournaments Steps Tournaments and Rebuy tournaments

You're only a few steps away from being here.

Multi-Table Tournaments

Final-stage EPT qualifyier MTTs cost €530 and Round 2 pre-qualifiers to the final-stage tournaments cost €82.

My suggestion would be to play 10 Round 2 qualifying tournaments for €82 each, as that will give you an excellent qualification workout.

The goal is to win three out of those 10 tournaments, which would then give you the opportunity to play in three €530 tournaments (€1,590) for the cost of just €820.

Steps Tournaments

With the budget described above, I would start at Step D on the Steps levels to be able to play 10 total Steps tournaments.

It’s also best to stick with the same type and level of tournament in any given period. This allows you to get into a better and better rhythm as you play.

Of course with the Steps tournaments you’re gradually heading for the top of the poker world as you pass each level so the difficulty will increase with each one.

If you play 10 Step D events, the expected level of return would be to win four Step E tickets, 2 Step F tickets and one Step G ticket … and then, you hope, win the Step G qualifier.

€22 Rebuy Tournaments

These tournaments are a little special with their original structure and add-ons up to 50,000 chips.

I won six of these last season and they were the cheapest form of qualifier for me on average.

With these tournaments we must, above all, respect the rules of profitability:

If you start a €22 re-buy tournament, you must at least get to the add-on stage in all cases.

The real tournament begins at this point, and all those who drop out before the add-on level have zero chance to qualify – essentially turning their initial investment into a lost cause.

You, by contrast, should always make it to the "real tournament" that begins at the add on.

Reaching the add-on stage means you’ll share the prize money more than 100 players have contributed to among only 40 players.

The budget for this will be on average around €260, so we can play three of these tournaments total for the year.

The Ideal EPT Qualifier Management Plan

I’ll address each category of qualifier specifically later, but here in my opinion is the ideal way to manage a budget of €200 per month to qualify for an EPT event.

I suggest playing 10 Round 2 MTT qualifiers at €82 each, 10 Step D qualifiers at €82 each and three €22 Rebuy tournaments.

With just a few breaks, you could be sitting next to Liv.

The annual investment amounts to €2,400. But by following all the lessons in this series closely, you could increase your chances of success by around 50%.

While €2,400 might seem like a lot, remember you are trying to realize your poker dream!

And remember it‘s still just a target. You might play well and get lucky, or you might miss it altogether.

Poker remains a game, so be prepared for the worst and ready for the best.

It's a Chance to Play with Your Heros

Consider this though: in Formula 1 racing, you’d never get a chance to take a drive with Vettel, Webber or Hamilton.

You’ll never play tennis with Federer or golf with Tiger. But in poker, everything is possible for those who take the right approach.

With just a few breaks, you could find yourself at a table with ElkY, Liv, Jason or Daniel.

For my part, I’m very happy and excited I’ve had a chance to cross paths with them – and I wish you great success in your efforts too!

Tell me about your successful qualifications at SerialPokerstarsQualifier@Pierre-neuville.com and meet us at the next EPT event!

More in the How to Qualify for the EPT Series:

About the Author:

To open a new account at PokerStars and take advantage of our exclusive sign-up bonus and monthly freerolls, click through to our PokerStars review page.

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

How to Not Suck at PLO: Play to the Nuts

Mon, 19 Mar 2012 15:00:00 -0700

Check for new parts in the series every Monday.

Five years ago you’d be hard pressed to find a Pot-Limit Omaha game outside of Las Vegas or a few other cities.

Now almost every poker room you step into has at least one PLO game going. Some of the highest-stakes poker games played around the world are also online PLO games.

The reason for PLO’s new-found popularity is simple. It’s a super fun, action-packed game.

With four cards to work with instead of two, players play far more hands and gamble it up way more often than in Texas Hold’em.

The action-packed nature of the game also inherently draws weaker players looking to gamble.

And because hand values run so much closer together and there’s so much variance, it takes much longer for a bad player to realize he’s actually a losing player. Omaha’s popularity is going to continue to rise, so there’s no better time to start learning How to Not Suck at Pot-Limit Omaha.

Before you start though, be very clear on this – PLO is not just Texas Hold’em with four cards.The Difference Between PLO and Hold’em

Omaha is a game that, on the surface, looks just like Hold’em but with twice as many cards.

It's like Hold'em, but it's not Hold'em.

It is on some level, but it goes much, much deeper than that.

That said, to learn Omaha you must first have a firm understanding of the basic principles of Hold’em.

If you don’t already, then close this article and start reading some Hold’em articles here or start with our How Not to Suck at Poker series.Omaha is About Making the Nuts

With two extra cards in play, Omaha is all about making the nuts.

In Hold’em, you can regularly win pots without the nuts. You win with pairs, two pairs and sets. Straights and flushes are almost always good. In Omaha, pairs rarely win. A set often loses to an over-set. If you don’t have the nut straight or nut flush, someone else probably does and you’re going to get felted. Repeat: Omaha is a game of the nuts.

The problem, however, is that what the nuts is changes on every street.

So, sometimes the nuts aren’t enough and you’ll also need a back up plan.

Be on the Right Side of the “Freeroll”

In Omaha, you have to be worried about getting “freerolled” in a hand.

What does getting “freerolled” mean?

An example:

You have 9♠ T♣ J♥ A♠. The flop is 6♠ 7♠ 8♦.

On a flop like that one there are many different ways to make a straight.

Any combination of 54 or 95 makes a smaller straight. You have the nut straight as well as the nut flush draw and a draw to a bigger straight.

Hand selection keeps you on right side of the freeroll.

You have this board crushed. Not only do you “cooler” any smaller straight but you also have a freeroll (with your flush draw and bigger straight draw) on any other player who has likewise flopped the nut straight.

When players first come over from Hold’em, they may think they have the nuts with any straight and be happy to get it in.

But in Omaha, more times than not if you have bottom straight and a lot of money goes in you’re going to be way behind.

Key Takeaway

Omaha’s not only a game of the nuts but a game of “the nuts with a back-up plan.”

What we’re going to show you in the rest of this series is how to be on the right side of those “coolers” and how to be the one freerolling, not the one being freerolled.

If you can master that, you’ll be on your way to not sucking at Pot Limit Omaha.

More in the How to Not Suck at Pot-Limit Omaha series:

How to Qualify for the EPT: Avoid Bad Risks and Count Stacks

Thu, 15 Mar 2012 09:00:00 -0700

Check the list below the article for links to the rest of the series.

I like to say I’m “at the helm” of my own qualification chances and I navigate by eye.

I stay focused on two parameters: avoiding unnecessary risks and taking every pot I can to keep myself above the average stack and in qualifying position.

I decrease my risk-taking when I have a cushion compared to the average stack and I increase it if I lose ground.

But more than anything, my game is not primarily guided by “maps” or formulas for the moment.

It’s guided by the overall qualifying situation in the tournament.

Get Comfortable With Throwing Away Pretty Cards

This kind of constant self-coaching will help you throw away bullets like AK, QQ, and JJ preflop with greater ease.

It will also help you make the right folds on dangerous flops with top pair or AA.

Never forget that you need to resist and not fall in love with big hands that can throw you off course from your goal - to earn that EPT seat..

By focusing your attention on the general objective in these tournaments, you will develop your art of qualifying to the highest level.

When I’m in good position to qualify for my seat and have a “pretty” hand pre flop – 99-QQ, AQ and even AK depending on my position - my first reflex is not to worship my nice-looking cards but to assess my opponents’ stacks or openers.

If their stacks are more than half of mine, a call will probably help me avoid getting in a coin-flip situation.

If their stacks are smaller than that, that will probably give me some fold equity.

Of course many factors can come into play, but basically I will look for maximum gain while reducing the chances of having “an accident” too big to recover from.

Calculate Your Stack Size for All Possible Scenarios

Before I make my decision, I won’t just admire my nice cards.

Stack sizes are always key.

I’ll calculate my future stack scenarios in case of a call, a fold, if I’ll need to rebuild and even in the case of a coin flip won or lost.

I think about all of the different future stack situations to determine my correct decision.

The framework hasn’t changed though. It’s always the general strategy which dominates and which makes me ask this question:

To what extent will the choice I make affect my chances of winning a seat?

I repeat this because too few players calculate and re-calculate the exact amount their chip stack will be after choosing one move or the other.

Key Takeaway:

“Thinking” in poker is not just hesitating – it’s calculating.

Understanding the implications of all the various outcomes will often tell you the best choice to make.

I don’t gamble on a coin toss, I don’t play the cards according to a formula.

I only strive to increase my chances to qualify!

More in the How to Qualify for the EPT Series:

Read more about EPT Serial Qualifier Pierre Neuville on his author page.

To open a new account at PokerStars and take advantage of our exclusive sign-up bonus and monthly freerolls, click through to our PokerStars review page.

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

How to Qualify for the EPT: Don't Reduce Your Chances to Survive

Thu, 08 Mar 2012 13:00:00 -0800

See the list below the article for links to the rest of the series.

Make the hero call, make a big bluff or play for safety?

It all comes down to what best suits your one goal: increasing your chances of qualification.

Play 23s and fold AA? Not easy, but sometimes it’s necessary. And it’s a scenario that happens more often than we might think.

So what do you do?

Online there are few tells and little information on our opponents. Our big decisions remain quite subjective.

What then are the elements that determine our decisions if it’s not pot odds?

Manage Your Stack, Not the Pot

In an EPT qualifying tournament, you don’t live or die with the pot or the pot odds.

What you manage is your stack and the opportunity it gives you to survive the bubble. This is the only base that should guide your decisions.

Here are a few examples to help make it a little clearer:

Manage your stack, not the pot.

Example 1:

You have a stack of 150,000. Player B has 100,000. Players C and D have 37,000.

Five other players have 25,000 and you’re on the bubble. Your chances of qualification are perfect. Almost close to 99% even.

Your risk is zero whenever there are two players with an all in and a call between them.

So it’s enough to just wait quietly until they’re eliminated.

Hand 1: You have AA and Player B shoves all in.

With your aces you’re favored to win the hand around 80% of the time, but if you lose the hand your stack falls back to 50,000 - in other words, back to the average stack.

At the average stack size, your chances of missing out on qualifying now increase between 1 and 10%.

If you fold your aces?

At first glance, it’s a surprising solution that some would say is even a ridiculous idea. I even think some players won’t even consider it.

But if you fold your aces, you keep your 99% chance of qualifying. The best solution here is therefore an insta-fold preflop.

Throw your AA into the muck, without regret.

Folding aces? Not so crazy.

Why?

Because a call would help your opponents directly in every case.

For you, it only helps you the 80% of the time that you win and it’s very unfavorable in defeat - which would happen 20% of the time.

Qualification is virtually assured right now, so the best tactic becomes completely avoiding any "move" that can significantly reduce your chances of qualifying.

Congratulations – You’ve Just Made a Critical Leap

If you’ve never thought about folding KK or AA pre-flop, you’ve just made a big leap in your progress.

You don’t lose qualifying tournaments with 77. "Future accidents" happen with big hands, so you just have to learn to avoid them in certain cases.

In learning this new step, your chances of qualifying have increased substantially.

This is also going to serve you well in other cases.

From the moment you have it clear in your head that you can throw away AA easily and without regret, depending on your overall situation in the tournament, you'll have no trouble throwing all other average-to-fair hands away pre-flop according to the circumstances.

No more falling in love with timebomb starting hands like AK, AQ – which are often fatal on arrival.

The quality of your poker has just taken a giant step. 99.9% of players would probably make the call with AA without thinking, and you’ve come to understand that in poker everything is food for thought.

The proof is you’ve just learned to throw away AA despite great pot odds to protect your almost guaranteed qualification.

On the Other Hand: Risk-Taking is Sometimes Required

Another example:

You’re the short stack with 10,000 chips. You have JT on a board of of 246KT.

The pot is 9,000. He bets 4,000, sitting with an average stack of 25,000. You figure there’s a 50% chance he’s trying to take the pot with his AQ.

Your chances of qualifying overall at that moment are quite thin. If you fold, you stay at 10k.

Let’s say that gives you about a 10-15% chance of qualifying. But you’re also only slightly more at risk overall with 6k (instead of the 10k) if you lose when you call.

If your hero call is successful and you win the hand, your stack is up to 23k &ndash back up to the average and now with about a 50-60% chance of earning a seat.

In other words, the general situation at that exact time advises you to take a reasonable risk.

Losing the hand doesn’t change much, but the potential gain from winning the hand can reestablish your position for qualifying.

This is what you must primarily look at in any difficult situation – the effect on your chances to win or lose this seat.

Risks are still required, but only smart ones.

Same Principle Applies to Bluffing

This example can also be applied to making a bluff of your own.

Of course it’s reasonable to bluff at a pot if the amount won will radically change your final chances of qualifying and if the amount you might lose only results in a relatively small decrease in your chances.

This takes away almost the full repertoire of bluffs like "I push all in on the button and I close my eyes."

Repeat this to yourself:

I won’t make a "negative infinity"move with only relative improvement possible!

Key Takeaways:

Take risks with minor consequences on the condition that they can really improve your position.

But above all, don’t take risks that can turn a safe position gained into a new risk of losing your chance at qualifying.

More in the How to Qualify for the EPT Series:

Read more about EPT Serial Qualifier Pierre Neuville on his author page.

To open a new account at PokerStars and take advantage of our exclusive sign-up bonus and monthly freerolls, click through to our PokerStars review page.

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

How to Qualify for the EPT: AK - Premium Hand or Timebomb?

Thu, 01 Mar 2012 12:00:00 -0800

See the list below the article for links to the rest of the series.

AK, AQ: Premium Hands That Help You Qualify or Hands That Get You Eliminated?

Most importantly in a qualifying tournament, all hands have to be played with constantly updated strategies according to the situation you're in rather than the strength of the cards.

Using our example from the first article in the series, we now know that to survive safely and win an EPT package we need to win roughly 120,000 chips in 270 hands over five hours.

But how?

First, Do No Harm

As they say in Italian, "Primo non nocere" or "First, Do No Harm"

Don't let AK or AQ kill your dream.

Your past poker experience tells you that AK is a premium hand - the third-best in poker even. And according to the current fashion online, AK is very simple to play: 3-bet, 4-bet, all in.

So we end up in a flip. We pray. We close our eyes. We double up or we’re out. But to turn our starting stack of 3,000 chips into 120,000, is it good enough to flip a coin with AK or AQ?

Short answer: no!

If you want to increase your chances to qualify, forget about AK as a hand to flip with.

For me, AK is not a premium hand to qualify with but the killer of dreams.

AK - More Often the End of our Dream?

Let's go to some basic math to evaluate further.

In a flip, AK is behind 13 pairs – all of 22-AA.

Even if you eliminate AA and KK, where AK is an 80% or 70% underdog, when you ask for a flip you need to think there's basically an 8 out of 10 chance you'll be at 47% to win against a small pair - i.e. 22-QQ.

If we need to earn 120,000 chips from 3,000, we would need to go 3,000, 6,000, 12,000, 24,000, 48,000, 96,000 … or win six flips in a row.

The odds of winning six flips in a row are 1 in 64 - meaning a 1.5% chance we’ll still be in the tournament and a 99% chance we’ll be out!

In about five hours you'll play about 270 hands. So six hands to clearly avoid, if possible, are those that will give you a 50% chance to be out.

Instead, you want to look for hands that give you a chance to win 3-10 times more chips than you’ll lose.

You want to go to as many flops as possible in good position and to flops that can allow us to win 10-50 times the chips invested.

A Chip Not Lost is Worth More Than a Chip Won

Remember this well:

A chip lost is worth three times more than a chip won. And in the beginning stages of a qualifying tournament, it’s worth five times more.

For example:

If you double your chips early from 3,000 to 6,000, you’ve probably increased your chances of qualifying by about 10%.

If you lose your chips however (from 3,000 to zero), you’e decreased your chances infinitely. You're out.

Your tactics will evolve according to three parameters:

1) Your stack size compared to the average stack size.

2) The stage of the tournament (number of players remaining/number of seats to be won)

3) The value of M. Keep in mind here that you will play two rounds per level. In the first round, M = 30. In the 15th level, M = 4800 or 160 times more.

So whatever your hand in the first levels, adapt your tactics to give you zero chance to be out.

Avoid flips altogether. Or at the very least avoid those where you may be risking more than 33% of your stack.

Learn how to play AK or AQ with some finesse.

And especially forget the simplistic "online way" to play them by clicking the all-in button.

AQ requires finesse.

Write yourself a post-it note and stick it prominently on your screen:

"All in with AK = 53% out"

Beside it, write another post-it note with encouragement:

"I will still be in the tournament at 1:30 a.m."

This will remind your subconscious that filters your decisions of your ultimate purpose: to "Stay In."

Your chances of qualification have now again increased.

By applying these two first lessons, they may already have more than doubled.

More in the How to Qualify for the EPT series:

More about "Serial EPT Qualifier" Pierre Neuville on his author page.

To open a new account at PokerStars and take advantage of our exclusive sign-up bonus and monthly freerolls, click through to our PokerStars review page.

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

How to Qualify for the EPT: A Quick Tip to Boost Your Chances 50%

Thu, 23 Feb 2012 10:00:00 -0800

So: You've read a few books by Dan Harrington and his pot-odds calculating colleagues?

Congratulations. You have an excellent base for your all-around poker game

Now you need to try and forget everything - or almost everything - they’ve taught you for a new stage.

One that will specifically teach you how to manage and dramatically improve your PokerStars European Poker Tour qualifier results.

The Secret is ... There’s No Secret. Sort Of.

Don’t repeat this to anyone ... but there is no secret!

I was an average poker player in the past. My success is primarily a result of meticulous work specifically focused on qualifying for the EPT packages offered through PokerStars.

I put the time in to figure out how to do it as efficiently and successfully as possible.

Months and years of research, practice, development of a method and unlimited precision executing that method have gone into it.

But now I'm happy to share all of that meticulous research so you don't have to do it yourselves.

Forget What You Know About Pot Odds

Do you have a good base in tournament poker and good results in most types of tournaments you play online?

Have you tested your skills in satellite qualifiers for live tournaments but never succeeded?

Above all things, try to forget everything you've read about "pot odds" and all the standard calculations you use to make your poker decisions on an ad hoc basis.

Great stuff has been written by Dan Harrington and more about the subject. You should read it if you haven't.

But as surprising as it sounds, for maximizing your chances to qualify for an EPT package, forget it!

Instead you'll need to learn to manage a qualification tournament by its overall strategy, which allows you to adjust your tactics at every stage of the tournament to maximize your chances.

Ask yourself this: did you use the tools below during your previous qualifiers?

At home one day, playing with the stars the next.

1) Indispensable Organization

Above all, you'll need a pencil and notebook.

You play with a mouse, but you qualify with a pencil and notes.

2) Did You Have in Your Mind, Without Forgetting it for a Single Second, the Utlimate Goal of Winning an EPT Package?

Here’s an example of what to enter in your notebook before the start of a tournament and what you have to keep in mind at all times:

Number of players in the tournament: 150 Starting stack: 3000 Number of players that will win seats: 9 Total chips in the tournament: 450,000 Calculate in advance: at the time of the bubble the average stack will be 45,000

Project these numbers over 15 levels or five hours and there will be nine qualified players with stacks that will vary between 25,000 and 150,000.

That's the context of the tournament that has to be very clear with you, constantly.

3) The Goal is Not to Have All the Chips

It's not even to have a maximum amount of chips.

The only goal is to not be eliminated from the tournament.

To be in the final nine players and still have a stack five hours from now.

That is your one and only purpose in an EPT satellite qualifier. Never forget it.

4) If the Only Goal is to Survive, Avoid Taking Risks That Will Get You Eliminated

Each decision depends not on EV or pot odds, but your overall situation in the tournament.

This is always the first and most important factor in your decision-making.

The Simple Equation of the Serial Qualifier:

Increasing your chances of qualification = reducing the risk of elimination.

Five Hours of Survival

You must win chips to survive. But the worst possible way to do this, of course, is flips.

Because you need to survive five hours (likely 15 levels of 20 minutes each), keep at the top of your mind the tournament you will play:

Starting at 3,000 chips, your goal is to have 42,000 chips, roughly, in five hours to feel safe.

You’ll need to put in 15 levels worth of blinds and antes for a likely total of 38,000.

Always remember your goal.

So you’ll have to earn 42,000 + 38,000 = 80,000 chips from that starting stack of 3,000.

You will lose about one-third of those chips from unsuccessful moves, so about 40,000 chips.

Therefore your winning moves will have to bring back 120,000.

And there it is!

You don’t play hands at random, or in a vacuum, in a satellite qualifier.

You know exactly what the goal to reach is: five hours of survival.

Key Takeaways: Never Forget Your Goal and Be More Prepared Than the Next Guy

Before starting your next PokerStars qualifier, collect all of the information about the tournament.

Study the structure, take notes, track how it will change hour by hour.

You must remember to adjust your tactics hour by hour depending on the situation.

Keep a large sheet of notes next to you, close at hand, to indicate the relevant information for each situation.

If you do this careful preparation, you’ve already increased your chances of winning a seat by 50%.

Or at least 50% compared to all of the players who will sit in front of their computers and play just hoping for good cards - without thinking about or imagining where they are going and how they will get there.

You were a tourist in qualification tournaments before, but now you’re organized like a pro - and a future qualifier!

Next in the How to Qualify for the EPT Series:

About the Author:

To open a new account at PokerStars and take advantage of our exclusive sign-up bonus and monthly freerolls, click through to our PokerStars review page.

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Hard Realities about Playing Poker Professionally - Part 2

Mon, 02 May 2011 12:00:00 -0700

Matthew "mindcirkus" Wheat is a professional poker player. He successfully transitioned from NLHE to PLO, and in 2010 made the final table of WSOP Event #55, the $10,000 PLO Championship.

Click here to read Part 1 of this post.

Take it away Matthew:

Every person who plays poker has a “ceiling” - the level at which no matter how much work they put in it will be the highest level of stakes they are capable of beating.

Most players never reach their ceiling because few players work as hard as they can to improve for long periods of time.

Every couple of years there is a massive turnover in the regulars playing at a particular level of stakes. Most of the regulars in the 5/10 games running two years ago are now playing 2/4 or lower or have completely left the game.

There are some who have the ability and work ethic to continue winning at the same stakes they’ve been beating as the games got tougher(or even move up in stakes), but the majority of professional players reach their ceiling and then their income steadily declines as the games become more difficult to beat over time.

A very common mistake that players make is moving up in stakes whenever they run good for a short time and win several buy-ins. Most of the time they aren’t prepared to beat the tougher games at higher stakes, and they end up losing a significant amount of money in games that they have no business playing in.

All these things make the poker world like a food chain; all the money flows upwards towards the better players. The truth is that you should only move up in stakes if you consistently beat a level over a large sample, and also have an adequate bankroll to play in bigger games.

Becoming a professional poker player takes a serious commitment, and you have to put all of your heart, mind, and soul into the game for long periods of time. Because of this, a lot of your self-worth becomes tied to your success at the tables.

It's important to have a good circle of friends.

No matter how good you are you are going to have big losses and long periods of time when things are going badly. This can have a very negative effect on a person’s mentality, happiness, and ability to be productive and enjoy life outside of poker.

To be successful in the long run, you need a healthy mix of other things in your life aside from poker. Things such as a good group of friends you can spend time with, hobbies you enjoy outside of poker, a fitness regimen, travel, or anything else that you can spend time doing that will have a positive impact on your life and take your mind off of poker.

Finally, given the topic of these articles, I feel that I have to mention the aspect of professional poker that most of us don’t like to think about or talk about. If you play poker for a significant amount of time, at some point you will be cheated, colluded against, or robbed. It happens much less these days than it has in the past, but it still continues to happen in both live and online settings, and it’s a reality that you have to come to terms with.

The most common of these occurrences is collusion, and it’s usually very hard to detect. Fortunately it’s also the least detrimental, and isn’t something that most players need to spend much time worrying about.

There are a million other ways that a player can be cheated, far too many for me to mention in this article.

However, in the vast majority of games these days there is no cheating occurring, so it rarely has a devastating effect on a professional player’s career. The key is to make yourself aware of ways that you can be cheated, and to constantly be aware of the things you see happening at the table.

Finally, the rarest, yet most serious of these three things is being robbed. I don’t know what the percentage is of players that get robbed at some point in their careers, but it’s not very high.

Because of this, most players have the attitude of: Well I’m careful so that will never happen to me. It doesn’t matter how careful you are, you are always going to be at risk.

A few instances that I know of to illustrate this point:

- In 2004, Greg Raymer was forced into a room at the Bellagio by two men holding a gun, and they attempted to rob him of the casino chips he had in his possession. I think of the Bellagio as one of the safest places on earth for someone to possess casino chips or cash. If it can happen there, it can happen anywhere.

- In 2009, a well known online player(and just plain genius in general), had his computer hacked by someone overseas and lost over $200,000 of his own money before he realized what had happened. He has absolutely no chances of ever recovering that money.

- Several years ago at a casino in Tulsa, OK, a player was walking from the casino to the Inn on the other side of the parking lot when he was robbed, almost beaten to death, and finally left unconscious in an empty room with no clothes on.

Even though there is always going to be a risk of these types of things happening, they are rare and don’t come close to outweighing the benefits of becoming a successful professional poker player.

If you love the game, and have the talent to succeed, then none of these things should discourage you from playing poker for a living. The bottom line is that even though there are some negative aspects, it can be a very rewarding and enjoyable career.

Just keep in mind, “It’s a hard way to make an easy living.”

Learn more Pot Limit Omaha from mindcirkus at CardRunners, your best source for online poker training.

Read More PokerListings/Cardrunners Strategy Articles:

Grinding the Shortstack ICM Calculators and Super-Short Stack Tournament Strategy Live Poker Tournaments as Vacation Destinations Badugi Strategy! How to Beat Three Common Types of Players Beginner's Guide to Poker Tracking Software Key Differences Between US and Euro Online Poker Sites Swingo! The Best Home Game Variant You've Never Heard Of Being Responsible with Your First Big Score

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Grinding the Shortstack with Mark "zachjackdad" Silver

Mon, 25 Apr 2011 01:00:00 -0700

Mark “zachjackdad” Silver has profited over six figures playing online poker, while sticking to an average buy in of $19! He is a part time poker player and father of two who began playing during the NFL strike of 2004.

Take it away Mark.

Grinding a short stack deep in MTTs is one of the most difficult things to learn about winning tourneys consistently.

What is considered short? Typically I would consider anything under 20 big blinds to be short. Obviously the less you have, the more short you are. However, players often panic too early or fail to shove (push all-in) in the most optimal spots.

The following is a list of things to consider before pushing all-in when action is on you in an unopened pot (there are no raises in front of you):

1) How many big blinds do you have?

2) What % of your stack is the pot?

3) How strong is your hand?

4) How many players are left to act behind you?

5) Are any players committed to calling? (they have too many chips in the pot to fold)

6) Is the big blind committed to calling?

7) If you answer yes to 5 or 6 or both, is there a reasonable possibility your hand is ahead of their random hand?

The reason his screenname is "zachjackdad".

There are actually some players out there who have studied the math on exactly when to shove with certain hands.

I can’t write out the whole shove chart here but the premise is basically that it takes into consideration how many big blinds you have, how many players left to act and how strong your hand is.

For example it can sometimes be correct to shove Q3o on the button but fold AT in middle position.

Lastly here is a list of considerations for shoving into raises or 3 betting all-in:

1) How many big blinds do you have?

2) What % of your stack is the pot?

3) How strong is your hand?

4) How aggressive has the villain been?

5) What position is the villain in?

6) Is the villain often raising from the same position?

7) If your hand is not strong, is the villain likely to fold?

After carefully considering all of these options, you need to make a decision on whether this is a good spot. As a rule, when you have less than 20 big blinds you should never be folding hands like AQ+ or TT+ to one raise. You need to open up your range as it will be very difficult to win a tournament staying at 15ish big blinds.

It is also very important to remember you cannot call any raises or raise/fold in any spot. You need to save all your chips for the correct spot to shove, and the more chips you have when you do go all-in, the better chance you have to make your opponent your fold.

Plus you’ll have more chips if you do happen to win at showdown.

The key to playing a short stack effectively is to stay patient but make sure you realize when you are in a good spot to shove. As you short stack more often you will start realizing when you are making mistakes.

Don’t forget to consider all the criteria above. The best thing to do to improve your short stack game is share hand histories with other poker players with specific spots where you shoved.

CardRunners offers free poker training through Truly Free Poker Training. Receive all the benefits of being a CardRunners member without paying a penny.

Read More PokerListings/Cardrunners Strategy Articles:

Hard Realities about Playing Poker Professionally - Part 1 ICM Calculators and Super-Short Stack Tournament Strategy Live Poker Tournaments as Vacation Destinations Badugi Strategy! How to Beat Three Common Types of Players Beginner's Guide to Poker Tracking Software Key Differences Between US and Euro Online Poker Sites Swingo! The Best Home Game Variant You've Never Heard Of Being Responsible with Your First Big Score

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Hard Realities about Playing Poker Professionally - Part 1

Mon, 11 Apr 2011 00:01:00 -0700

Matthew "mindcirkus" Wheat is a professional poker player. He successfully transitioned from NLHE to PLO, and in 2010 made the final table of WSOP Event #55, the $10,000 PLO Championship.

Take it away Matthew:

When most people think about professional poker players they picture someone sitting around a casino making tons of cash playing a recreational card game.

The reality can best be described using the famous quote that a lot of us in the business use to describe our jobs: “It’s a hard way to make an easy living.”

One way I like to put this in perspective is by asking people, “Do you know what it’s like to go and work hard all day and lose $10,000? It happens to me all the time.”

The feeling of putting in hard work and losing a significant amount of money is impossible to describe to someone who hasn’t experienced it. I would compare the stress level of playing high stakes poker for a living to being an air traffic controller with an anxiety disorder.

Another issue that professional poker players have to deal with is the fact that they generally don’t get much respect for their profession from the general public. Most parents are horrified when their child tells them they are quitting their job and/or school to become a professional poker player.

The truth, however, is that whatever you might think about the morality of taking money from weaker players at the poker table, no one can question the amount of hard work and intelligence that it takes to become an elite poker player.

The general consensus among people familiar with both high stakes poker and higher education is that it takes more intelligence and acquisition of knowledge to become a winner in high stakes poker games than it does to get your average Ph.D.

Wheat's office.

In the early days of online poker, a fortune could be made with very little poker experience and knowledge. These days it takes an incredible amount of hard work and natural ability to make a living playing any form of poker.

For those who do have what it takes, and who put in the time and effort needed to become a successful player, the reward is a job with practically unlimited freedom.

Another rarely discussed, yet very serious, downside to being a professional poker player is that it causes you to greatly devalue money. If you compare a lawyer who makes $500/hr with a poker player who makes $500/hr, the poker player will never have anywhere near as much value for the money as the lawyer does.

The reason is simple; the lawyer is making $500 for every hour he works so when he sees something that costs $1000 he knows that he has to do two hours of work to earn enough to pay for that item.

For a professional poker player to average $500/hr, he has to be playing fairly high stakes games in which you are winning and losing sums between $10,000 and $100,000 on an hourly basis. When money comes and goes from your hands that quickly for long periods of time it basically becomes impossible to be frugal with your money.

Most players I know will tell you that anything that costs less than $1,000 is completely irrelevant and that they don’t even give a second thought to purchasing it. This is because purchases less than that amount have no emotional impact on them; it feels like it’s free.

As players mature over the years and learn from their mistakes with handling money they often become better in this regard, but it’s always going to be a challenge and problem to some extent.

If you’re going to be playing poker for a living, you need to be constantly evaluating what type of game will provide the highest hourly winrate for your unique set of abilities and experience. One serious mistake that I see among professionals is that they find a game they can win at and then only play that type of game month after month and year after year.

The poker landscape changes constantly and games that used to be easy money are practically unbeatable for significant amounts of money these days. For instance, back in 2007-2008 I was 20 tabling full ring 1/2 NLHE online. Along with the other best regulars in those games I could average $15,000 a month of profit with an amount of poker skill and knowledge that is relatively low by today’s standards.

Had I continued to play these games on a daily basis my income would have steadily declined as the games got astronomically more difficult over the past few years.

I realized this was happening in early 2009 and put all my effort into learning 6max pot-limit Omaha. It cost me quite a bit of income the first few months during the transition, but within a year I was making money that far exceeded anything I had ever made playing NL.

These days the 6max PLO games are becoming extremely difficult to beat, just like the NL games. Even though I’m still one of the best players in the games and making very good money playing in them, I’m also putting effort into learning other games so that I’ll be prepared to play in whatever games are most profitable in the future.

Click here to read the Hard Realities of Professional Poker Part 2 from Matthew “mindcirkus” Wheat.

Learn more Pot Limit Omaha from mindcirkus at CardRunners, your best source for online poker training.

Read More PokerListings/Cardrunners Strategy Articles:

ICM Calculators and Super-Short Stack Tournament Strategy Live Poker Tournaments as Vacation Destinations Badugi Strategy! How to Beat Three Common Types of Players Beginner's Guide to Poker Tracking Software Key Differences Between US and Euro Online Poker Sites Swingo! The Best Home Game Variant You've Never Heard Of Being Responsible with Your First Big Score

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

ICM Calculators and Super Short-Stack Tournament Strategy

Mon, 04 Apr 2011 01:00:00 -0700

Samer "Braminc" Khuri has been playing SNGs full time since 2006. He plays a wide range of stakes and his latest CardRunners video series, SNG Payout Analysis, explains how to effectively adjust to any tournament structure in the world. In his spare time he plays guitar, sings, and writes music.

Take it away Samer.

Most people that play poker tournaments are familiar with one very basic and crucial concept: When your stack reaches a certain critically low level, you must either go all-in or fold pre-flop.

Raising a standard amount becomes suboptimal, as you will end up having less fold equity yet still be committed to the pot after the flop (no matter what the flop is).

The idea is to maximize our fold equity while we have it to increase our chances of survival. While this is widely accepted, there is some debate as to just how short stacked “critically low” is. Some players seem to only shove/fold when their stack reaches 15 big blinds or less. Some say 10 big blinds or less.

Some point out that you should calculate your M—your stack size divided by the total value of the blinds and antes—and shove whenever M is less than 10. None of these answers is exactly right or wrong. It depends on the tendencies of your opponents, how they view a pre-flop shove from you, and how they react to a standard raise from you. 10 big blinds and an M of 10 have always been key values for me. There are absolutely times when I will shove 15 or even 20 big blinds, and there are other times when I will make a standard raise with as few as 8 big blinds. Both of those scenarios are rare, and they are not what this article is about.

Samer "Braminc" Khuri

I want to discuss the shortest of short stacks: the times you have 5 big blinds or less (or an M of 5 or less).

In these situations, you are running out of fold equity. You need to move quickly. To play cautiously at this stage will lose you money in the long run.

Many of us use ICM calculators to determine what hands are +EV to shove in what spots (and what hands aren’t).

These ICM calculators are the key to short stack tournament poker. However, they have limitations. ICM is a measurement of total prize pool equity. Using it, you can compare the value of your stack if you move in and if you fold.

The first problem we encounter is that your prize pool equity is based solely on the number of chips you have now relative to the total number of chips and players remaining. No account is taken of the players’ skill.

The calculator doesn’t know how good you are; even we humans don’t know exactly how good anyone is. So, if you are one of the best players at the table, ICM is likely to underestimate the value of your stack; this will affect the best play sometimes.

Another major limitation of ICM, and the most relevant one to this article, is that because these calculators simply compare your prize pool equity if you shove or fold immediately after the hand, they ignore future hands.

Another way to put this point is that the real value of your stack can depend on the position of the blinds, whether you are likely to be in very bad situations soon, and so on. I

n my view, when you are as short as 4 or 5 big blinds, you need to take shoves that ICM says are –EV, because folding is often even worse than ICM indicates.

Mobile ICM calculator?

The problem is that calculating just how bad our future situations will be can be extremely difficult. Nobody can figure this out with complete accuracy; it depends on all our opponents’ tendencies and is sensitive to very small changes in their stack sizes.

Usually we will not be dealt monster cards within the next orbit of play, and since our fold equity will disappear when we continue folding, we will be getting our chips all-in as huge underdogs a majority of the time.

After studying hundreds of short-stack tournament scenarios, I can confidently say that the degree to which we should be willing to take -EV shoves at 4-5 big blinds is much higher than I ever would have expected.

In a typical SNG, -1% to -2% of the prize pool is an extremely reasonable -EV shove to make under the gun when facing the alternative of blinding out of play. In larger tournaments the same is true, although the exact number will be different because of the greater field size. If you are able to fully understand what ICM is, how it works, and what the ICM calculators are telling you, then you can apply good reasoning to learn when it is appropriate to deviate from their suggestions.

In this case, we have observed that ICM calculators are unaware that the tournament doesn’t end after the exact hand it is analyzing.

Because the tournament must continue, folding trashy cards with a stack of 4 or 5 big blinds can be pure suicide as you will soon have literally zero fold equity and close to zero prize pool equity.

We must do our best to estimate which -EV shoves are appropriate and which aren’t. The short answer is that almost all -EV shoves in the described situation are very appropriate and necessary.

Improve your poker game with CardRunners. CardRunners offers all the tools you need to learn poker, including new videos released daily, strategy forums, pro interviews and more.

Read More PokerListings/Cardrunners Strategy Articles:

Live Poker Tournaments as Vacation Destinations Badugi Strategy! How to Beat Three Common Types of Players Beginner's Guide to Poker Tracking Software Key Differences Between US and Euro Online Poker Sites Swingo! The Best Home Game Variant You've Never Heard Of - Steve Albini Being Responsible with Your First Big Score - John "Nikolak" Kim

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Live Poker Tournaments as Vacation Destinations

Mon, 28 Mar 2011 00:01:00 -0700

PrimordialAA is a HU SNG specialist who also plays MTTs and mixed games. His average stake is $440 but he'll play anywhere from $220 to $5k.

He discovered poker on a high school trip to DC for Presidential Classroom when his roommate taught him how to play. After using his winnings on a Georgetown hoodie, he deposited money online and hasn't looked back.

He's known for his solid, clear analysis and motivational volume prop bets with friends. He finished 143rd in the 2010 WSOP Main Event, and 5th in the 2011 PCA Heads Up Championship.

Take it away Bryan.

Live tournaments are an interesting breed of poker not only because of how they play but because they are spread out all over the world and therefore offer many unique experiences.

Players who enter these tournaments get to play for stakes and in fields much bigger than they might be used to, and they also get to explore new cities and countries. Many players thus find poker tournaments to be awesome vacations, especially if they can find relatively cheap ways to enter.

If you’re thinking about doing some tournament travel, I’d first recommend looking carefully for a location that you want to visit and have the time for.

Don't confine yourself to the casino when not playing poker!

I recommend Europe from March through the fall: some of my favorite tournament spots are Barcelona, Budapest, Vienna, and Deauville. During the winter, there are attractive tournaments at the PCA in the Bahamas, the Aussie Millions in Melbourne, and the LAPT in various Latin American cities.

I have two preferred methods for satelliting into live events: the 3x-turbo rebuy satellites on PokerStars, and the flatter live satellites. (By ‘flatter’ I mean the satellites that award seats to roughly 1/5 to 1/7 of the field.)

The 3x-turbos appear to have a lot of wild play and variance, but I like them because the goal is relatively simple.

Before the add-on, the best strategy is simply to minimize the number of rebuys you take; after, the tournament resembles a small turbo satellite, with just a few tables of players fighting for one or two packages. There are often rebates given to the next handful of players, and these prizes help soften the swings.

Finally, these tournaments are desirable because they take only two to three hours, instead of a whole day.

Live satellites awarding seats to over 10% of the field have larger buyins, of course, but the variance is smaller than in satellites paying 5% or less of the field, and the competition is often much weaker than you will find in any other online poker satellite.

More specifically, these tournaments are much better to play than the $700 weekly satellites online, which are full of tough players.

Going after real-life fish.

Once you win or buy the seat, you have to plan for the trip itself. I would strongly recommend that you arrive at least two days early; three is even better. This will allow you to adjust to jet lag and to get comfortable in the new city.

You will also want to get into a routine that fits the new time zone, because the twelve-hour days you will (hopefully) be playing will be unforgiving if you’ve not adjusted to the local time.

You’ll also want to set aside time before or after the tournament to see the new place. Many people make a point of seeing every notable building and museum, but I prefer not to get caught up in worries about seeing them all.

Such a project is fine for some people, but more often it makes what should be a fun and enriching experience into a chore and a blur. I prefer to relax and experience a new culture: for example, there is often unfamiliar and delicious food available.

It’s worth setting aside extra time and planning ahead to avoid familiar food and tourist traps—you can always grab a burger or some street kebab if you don’t like what you try, but a good meal can be a highlight of the trip.

When you’re going out at night, don’t be shy about asking for recommendations; people are happy to give you ideas.

Asking locals often leads to a much better time in a new city than you would have if you went to a club full of tourists—even if the tourist club is a good time, it figures to be nothing you can’t get at home. Be sure, however, to be aware of what’s around you, and to stay safe.

No big city has only safe districts, and you can get into trouble even if you’re in a basically safe location. So when you’re going out, be smart and bring friends.

Improve your poker game with CardRunners. CardRunners offers all the tools you need to learn poker, including new videos released daily, strategy forums, pro interviews and more.

Read More PokerListings/Cardrunners Strategy Articles:

Badugi Strategy! How to Beat Three Common Types of Players Beginner's Guide to Poker Tracking Software Key Differences Between US and Euro Online Poker Sites Swingo! The Best Home Game Variant You've Never Heard Of - Steve Albini Being Responsible with Your First Big Score - John "Nikolak" Kim

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Badugi Strategy! How to Beat Three Common Types of Players

Mon, 21 Mar 2011 00:05:00 -0700

Mike "Predator006" Six is a PLO8 specialist ranging in stakes from 200-2000. He's been playing since mid-2005 and advocates game selection and proper bankroll management. He also enjoys obscure games like badugi, baduci and Chinese poker.

He found that players online were generally awful at badugi, so he started taking notes on different lines that the few winning players were taking and taught himself.

If you're not familiar with the game click through and get started with our Badugi Rules and Game-Play tutorial.

Take it away Mike.

Contrary to popular belief, the word ‘badugi’ is not Korean for ‘bad poker player,’ although most who play it fall into that category.

Because there isn’t a whole lot of public information about these games competent players have a huge edge!

Badugi can be played online on both Full Tilt Poker and PokerStars. Although it has not yet been included as a WSOP event, there was a recent $1,000 tournament at the Commerce, and there was also a SCOOP event on PokerStars that generated a $28,000 first prize.

With the game’s increasing popularity, some well-known players have tried it successfully, including Shaun Deeb and Jean-Robert Bellande. The game, along with its close cousins baduci and badacey, is now found in many mid- and high-stakes mixed games in Las Vegas.

(Bellande claims to have invented baduci, but the claim has not been verified.)

I have found that most online poker badugi players fall into the following categories:

First, there are players that have don’t have a clue how to play the game. These players will do things like drawing to a three-card Jack and choose to keep the Jack pre-draw because it gives them three different suits.

These players also don’t understand the value of position and how to use it, nor could they tell you the difference between a smooth and a rough hand. They also rarely if ever three-bet a strong three-card hand pre-draw. Other characteristics of these players include:

They will believe you have a badugi when you pat, whether you have it or are snowing. They will never make bluff-raises to try to break weak badugis. They will rarely fold bad badugis even when it is obvious that they are beat. These players often think they get sucked out on when their A5TQ badugi loses a big pot.

Bobby "Baduci" Bellande

Secondly, there are the bad decision makers. Online, these players often click on their decision without seeing what the other players' actions are before them.

They do baffling things like calling a raise and reraise pre-draw and then folding to a small bet after the first draw, when they are getting 7-1 odds or better. Sometimes, these players will open-raise pre-draw and fold to a three-bet. If you find this kind of player, stick around and hope they rebuy when they bust.

Thirdly, there are players who are entirely too straightforward. These players do not adapt and are typically tight ABC players.

In heads-up pots, they will rarely continue to a big bet after the second draw because they don’t include the implied odds of future raises or the chance that the opponent is bluffing. Another example of this player’s tendencies can be found in a three-handed raised pot pre-draw. If the player that is first to act bets after the first draw, I will typically raise with a good part of my range, including decent three-card hands.

This ABC player behind you will fold for the extra bet into a large pot. One of the most important patterns of these players is that they are either very consistent on calling with all three-card hands or they never do.

If they ever snow, make a note, because they will take a similar line when they snow again. Once you notice their patterns, figure out a good counter strategy and run them over.

Lastly, there are players that adapt their style to their opponents. They are typically tricky to play against. These players often incorporate snowing techniques and calling with three-card hands into their strategy.

They raise often in position and value this position more than their hand strength. Good tri hands are three-bet pre-draw. They sometimes bluff-raise to try to get weak badugis to break or fold. These players are obviously the toughest to play against.

One of the drawbacks to online badugi play is for players used to multitable grinding. This is much harder in badugi. I feel comfortable playing 12 tables of other games simultaneously, and have maintained up to 24.

When I have tried to play more than one badugi table, however, I have always lost my edge and started to spew. For the recreational player looking to have fun and make a good win rate, badugi is a great change from your typical grind.

Try out CardRunners with a 7 day free trial. You'll find poker videos for all games and stakes, ranging from micro stakes Sit n Go's to mid-stakes full ring No Limit Hold'em to nosebleed Pot Limit Omaha.

Read More PokerListings/Cardrunners Strategy Articles:

Beginner's Guide to Poker Tracking Software Key Differences Between US and Euro Online Poker Sites Swingo! The Best Home Game Variant You've Never Heard Of - Steve Albini Being Responsible with Your First Big Score - John "Nikolak" Kim

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Beginner's Guide to Poker Tracking Software

Sun, 13 Mar 2011 12:00:00 -0700

Matthew Janda is a professional poker player/coach who specializes in Game Theory.

He is known for his analytical and theory-optimal approach to poker, and has released videos at CardRunners specifically focused on playing optimally preflop, post-flop, and in 3-bet pots. He has also published an extensive series on utilizing softwares like Holdem Manager.

Take it away Matthew.

The ability to use tracking software might be the biggest difference between online and live play. Tracking software allows you to record every hand of poker you play on the virtual felt, which in turn makes it possible to discover your own leaks and your opponents' tendencies.

Yet players new to online poker are often reluctant to invest in Hold'Em Manager or PokerTracker, since a $60-$100 investment might cost them as much as several buyins. These players often aren’t even sure if they’ll enjoy online poker and want to keep playing it.

I would not recommend using tracking software until you’ve played at least a thousand hands, whatever your preferred game type. The pace of online poker is very different from live play, and the extra software might distract or confuse you given that you're not already comfortable.

Nevertheless, even before you get the software it's a good idea to keep your eye out for promotions. Many Internet poker companies have responded to competition by offering deals in which you can get the software cheaply or free. You can also see which software suits you best by trying free trial versions.

The most useful aspect of tracking software for starting players is you can use recorded hands to see if your statistics look “normal.”

Viktor Blom knows how important tracking stats can be.

Are you playing too many hands, or raising too much or too little? By comparing your statistics with those of other winning players, you can get a general idea of where your leaks might be. Of course, many different playing styles can be effective, but seeing where you deviate from most players, and especially from winners, is a great way to begin inspecting your game.

This process is made trickier by the fact that winning players often have very different statistics. For example, some players might 3-bet very frequently, while others use a more narrow range.

Therefore, not every respect in which you differ statistically form winning players will necessarily be a leak. If you’re struggling to win online, however, this process is one of the best ways to start improving your game.

Of course, your newfound potential to analyze huge data sets will not be useful to you before you have even played ten thousand hands. Luckily, tracking software has many other useful features.

You will also be able to record isolated hands to post on poker websites for other players to view. When I’m playing, I constantly mark tough hands to ask my friends about later. Time banks are unforgiving, and I know I learn the most when I revisit difficult hands later to think through them carefully without time pressure. Good tracking software makes the marking-and-reviewing process very easy.

Finally, tracking software allows you to get a better sense of how your opponents play, so you can exploit them. You can study their game when you’re not playing by looking over hands they’ve played; you can also examine their statistics to see if any leaks stick out.

If you use a heads-up display (or ‘HUD’), you can see all of these statistics while you’re playing, and use the reads you’ve previously developed to exploit them. This is of course no excuse for not taking extensive notes, as your most useful information will be more specific and informative than raw statistics.

Although not every successful player uses tracking (though most use it at least for tax purposes), the vast majority realize it is an extremely important and useful tool for beating online games today.

The more information you have in poker, the better decisions you’ll be able to make and the more money that will follow. The best players will use every weapon in their arsenal to beat their opponents, and tracking tools are powerful weapons you should utilize to their full potential.

Find videos from Matthew Janda exclusively at CardRunners, the world's largest poker training website.

Read More PokerListings/Cardrunners Strategy Articles:

Key Differences Between US and Euro Online Poker Sites Swingo! The Best Home Game Variant You've Never Heard Of - Steve Albini Being Responsible with Your First Big Score - John "Nikolak" Kim

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Key Differences Between US and European Online Poker Rooms

Mon, 07 Mar 2011 01:00:00 -0800

James "D_Zoo" Hartt is a former high school teacher who resides in Canada. After discovering the game and depositing $50, he started building his bankroll by grinding $10 NL.

He experienced immediate success and quickly climbed stakes playing games as high as $10kNL. He found his passion for teaching translated to poker well, and now teaches and coaches poker full-time. He can be found playing the $400NL-$1kNL games at various European sites specializing in short-handed no limit holdem.

Take it away D_Zoo.

As a Canadian, I’m allowed to play at almost any online poker site in the world, and I have put this ability to use.

I have tried practically every poker network, as well as many different skins. So, I am qualified to describe the main differences between America-friendly sites (mainly PokerStars and Full Tilt) and European sites.

Differences in Players’ Style and Skill

The play between the two is very different. The America-friendly sites involve more of a preflop game and more of a standard game. By this I mean that the players are fundamentally sound, and play more the way one is taught on training sites. I find it easier to understand how these players are thinking.

The Euro sites have a lot more calling and post-flop play. Players here will call much more pre-flop instead of raising or folding, and they love to play past the flop. They play less fundamentally sound and are a bit more difficult to put on hand ranges. It is also more difficult to figure out what level they are thinking on.

I know many players, even good ones playing stakes like $5-10, that have had trouble moving from America-friendly sites to Euro ones, because they couldn’t adjust to these differences. Your play needs to adjust to accommodate the different style of these players.

Differences in Volume

PokerStars has the largest player pool and the largest selection of tournaments and cash games running around the clock. They have a wide selection for different stakes, and also have good selection for non-NLHE games, such as Omaha and limit hold’em.

The European sites often have good volume for the most popular limits of NLHE, such as $1-2, especially at peak hours. The farther you are from peak times, the less volume there will be, especially at higher stakes.

Games other than NLHE are almost guaranteed to have little or no volume. Finally, at the smaller sites with small player pools, most of your opponents are likely to be the site’s regulars.

Euro sites equal Euro players.

I always found it best to run a couple of Euro sites simultaneously to give myself a wider selection of games.

Differences in Software and Support

Both PokerStars and Full Tilt’s software are much more user friendly then that of the European sites; navigation is easier, and it is overall easier on the eyes.

Some European sites have some awful software that’s just not user-friendly. This is not merely an aesthetic point: bad software can cause you to tilt, misclick, misread the board, pass over the best games, or time out.

The support is also better, hands down, on PokerStars and Full Tilt. Those two sites, and especially PokerStars, will often respond within an hour.

On many Euro sites, you would be lucky to have a question answered within 24 hours. Euro sites also tend to have live help features that have availability tied to European time zones; often, these services are staffed by non-experts with poor English. The larger European sites, however, are more reliable for support.

Size also matters for site stability. Some Prima skins, for example, went bankrupt, and I myself have lost a bankroll on a site that shut down and took my money down with it.

Differences in Rewards

The flat rate deals offered on Euro sites are definitely very attractive. The rakeback is usually high, and there are often also deposit bonuses, reload bonuses, points for cash, etc.

The ‘under the table’ deals offered on these sites are generally outstanding, but risky, as they are not permitted on many of the sites anymore: iPoker is like this. Their ‘poker shops’ also usually have a decent selection, but you will be charged a little more for shipping (deducted from your points, not your cash).

The America-friendly sites offer lower flat-rate deals, but PokerStars has the Supernova and Supernova Elite statuses, which offer a great rate if you take advantage of the freerolls and use your frequent player points optimally.

Their Poker Shops have a wide selection and are very affordable even for a lower-volume player.

So overall, the two kinds of sites offer different poker experiences, with different advantages and disadvantages.

I’ve mainly been playing on the European sites for the rewards, and I enjoy the game flow, which is based more on a postflop game.

I have had both good and bad experiences with their support, but in general I've found that the larger the poker room, the more stable and safe it will be. If software is a very important to you, you have a reason to prefer PokerStars and Full Tilt.

But in the end, poker is poker. You will always need to adapt to your environment and your opponent to get the money.

CardRunners offers daily new videos from the best online poker pros in the world, including Andreas "Skjervoy" Torbergsen, Brian "Stinger" Hastings, and Mickey "mement_mori" Petersen. There are pros specializing in all stakes and games to help you learn poker.

Read More PokerListings/Cardrunners Strategy Articles:

Swingo! The Best Home Game Variant You've Never Heard Of - Steve Albini Being Responsible with Your First Big Score - John "Nikolak" Kim

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Swingo! The Best Poker Home Game Variant You've Never Heard Of

Mon, 28 Feb 2011 01:00:00 -0800

Steve Albini is a mixed game instructor at CardRunners and best-known for his work in the music industry. He actively tours in a band while managing his recording studio, Electrical Audio, in Chicago.

He finished 14th in Event 21 - 7-Card Stud at the 2010 World Series of Poker and specializes in low ball games like Razz and 2-7 Triple and Single draw.

Take it away Steve.

There has been a lot of talk in the poker community about which games will be popular in the future.

While No-Limit Hold'em is certain to retain the lion's share of the casual players' attention, and the online poker high-stakes games are gravitating toward PLO and mixed game formats, the novel and complex game of Swingo has tremendous potential.

The game was invented by some regulars in the Tuesday Game here in Chicago and named after a classic Chicago punk song by the band Naked Raygun.

But it has spread through word of mouth to other places, including private games in the UK and France, and the 2011 Winter BARGE events in Las Vegas. It was also in contention to be added as a special event at the 2011 PokerStars Caribbean Adventure.

Swingo was invented to incorporate elements of other great poker games, so most aspects of play will be familiar to seasoned poker players.

Rules of Swingo:

Pot-limit with blinds is the preferred structure. The game doesn't play well as a limit or no-limit game.

"I think you may be on to something here Steve."

Players are dealt five cards and there is a round of betting. After the action closes, players still in the hand place two cards face down as hole cards and protect them until showdown.

When all players have separated their two hole cards, they expose their three remaining cards, creating an exposed board (as on fifth street in 7-card stud).

There is another round of betting, starting with the player with the highest board, as in stud.

If a player folds his hand, his exposed cards are mucked along with his hole cards and no longer play. After the action closes, there is a final community "river" card dealt, and a final round of betting, starting with the best board (not including the river card).

This is followed by the showdown.

Showdown hands are "cards speak," (the best poker hand possible; there is no declare) made from a total of seven cards: the five cards in the hand as dealt, the river card, and any one of the exposed board cards from the other players' hands.

You may not use another player's hole cards in your hand, only an exposed board card. More than one player may use the same exposed board card. You are not required to use another player's board card or the river card.

The showdown rule is what makes Swingo such a complex game, as the implications of exposed cards become a major factor in all decisions.

There is often a critical balance struck between betting for value and preserving an opponent's board. This makes a strong showdown hand, and complex multi-way situations arise where each player can potentially win at showdown.

Here's a showdown example:

[hole cards] board cards

Seat 1 [K♣ K♦] 9♣ 7♣ T♣

Seat 2 [A♥ K♥] J♥ Q♠ 5♦

Seat 3 [9♠ 5♠] 5♥ 9♦ K♠

River: 7h

If all three players see showdown, Seat 1 has Kings full of Sevens, Seat 2 has an Ace-high heart flush, and seat 3 has Nines full of Fives.

If Seat 3 folds before showdown, Seat 1 has two pair, Kings and Sevens, and Seat 2 has Broadway.

If Seat 2 folds, Seat 1 has Kings full of Sevens and Seat 3 has Nines full of Fives.

If Seat 1 folds, Seat 2 has a flush and Seat 3 has Fives full of Nines.

"The mathematical implications of this game are too much for me."

There is an important rule: Because of the communal nature of the boards, players may not fold without action, and dealers must prevent mucking of boards until the pot has been awarded.

The betting rounds can have tremendous action. For example, one player might be driving the action with a strong made hand, and another player might call, hoping to entice an overcall from a player whose board improves his hand.

He might also raise to try to force a fold from a board that likely improves a different player, turning a second-best hand into a winner. Meanwhile, some hands will have compound draws with the slew of available board cards, and be eager to see the river card.

Every once in a while a situation unique to Swingo occurs, where a player with the nuts can't bet his hand, but a player with a bust or weak hand can bet for value. For example, you are Seat 3, and on the river the following hands are on the table:

Seat 1 [ X X ]3♥ 4♥ 2♥

Seat 2 [ X X ]5♥ T♠ J♠

Seat 3 [A♣ 5♣]6♣ 8♣ 9♦

River: A♥

The action is on seat 2, showing Jack-high. We can assume he was drawing to a straight or flush, but he can't bet it for value and can't call anything because his 5♥ and the A♥ river card make a straight flush for Seat 1.

As seat 3, holding blockers for seat 1's redraw to a straight, you make a pot-sized bet, which seat 1 has to call with any pair on the chance that either seat 2 is oblivious or you are making a play. Seat 2 folds, and your pair of Aces wins a huge pot. Once scenarios like this play out a few times in a game, complex bluffs begin to emerge, where players take representation of hands to extreme levels.

Playing strategies are all similarly complex and related to the exposed cards. Some players tend to expose strong boards, improving their chances of bluffing short-handed pots, while some tend to expose weak, uncoordinated cards to avoid completing big hands for their opponents.

Hands dealt pat tend to try to take pots early, shutting out the myriad draws possible with this game format, while some hands like trips or compound draws are happy to play multi-way.

Swingo is a remarkably complex game, and while that is what makes it appealing to poker players, it is also at the root of its principal drawback.

Post-mortem conversations about Swingo hands tend to drag on and on, and you would do well to institute a no-forensics policy in a Swingo game that gets bogged down by such manhuntering.*

If you have any questions about Swingo theory or practice, feel free to email me at sa(at)electrical.com, or stop by the Tuesday Game. Bring a lot of money.

*"manhuntering" is a term invented by annoying Chicago limit Hold'em nit Andy "Shut Up Andy" Kosinsky. It refers to the Michael Mann film "Manhunter," in which the detective protagonist played by CSI star William Petersen uses a handheld tape recorder to record his dictation of the details of a crime scene, speculating aloud about the villain's motives and psychology. When any player in the Tuesday game begins manhuntering, another player is likely to pantomime holding a tape recorder and repeat his musings in the hushed tones of mockery until he relents.

When he's not busy in the music studio or creating poker games, Steve Albini makes razz videos for CardRunners.

Read More PokerListings/Cardrunners Strategy Articles

Being Responsible with Your First Big Score - John "Nikolak" Kim

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Being Responsible with Your First Big Poker Score

Mon, 21 Feb 2011 01:00:00 -0800

John Kim has played poker professionally for over a dozen years. He's played several million hands at the mid to high-stakes levels at Full Tilt Poker and has amassed over a million dollars in winnings.

He now splits his time between the live games in Las Vegas, where he resides, and playing 15 tables simultaneously online. John is a dedicated father and husband and emphasizes work-life balance as an important trait to his success in poker.

I remember when I had my first significant score. It was in January 2005 and I won the $640 buy-in Party Poker Million for about $250k. That tournament was the original Sunday Million before PokerStars introduced their Sunday Million.

I remember the final hand winning with A7o vs. K9o and the board rolling out AKxxx. The next thing I knew I was jumping up and down with my wife and calling my family to celebrate the win.

The timing was great because my wife and I just bought and moved into our very first house the previous month. Having been a professional poker player for a few years but never having won more than $15k in a single day, this was a significant boost to my bankroll.

So what did I do with the money? Well, since I placed a high priority on family, I gave some money to my parents and my brother. Also I paid off all my debts including credit cards and car payments.

At the time I was playing mid- to high-stakes cash games online and doing well. I was playing $30/$60 limit and $5/$10 No-Limit Hold’em games and was making a good living, so I didn’t feel the need to jump into higher games at the time. I’ve always been a little risk averse when it came to my poker bankroll (mainly because I was married with one child and a mortgage) and even though my bankroll had ballooned, I thought there was a better way to use the money.

I decided to read a few books on investing, and bought a number of stocks and mutual funds. I wanted to invest for the future. I did not want an investment I’d have to stay on top of all the time. My primary focus would still be poker.

So I ended up buying a bunch of shares in companies and mutual funds that were guaranteed long term moneymakers, e.g. S&P 500. To this date I still own most of the same shares I bought back then, but I may have swapped or traded some shares for others. I made sure our retirement accounts stayed healthy and they’re poised to return a good amount when we start withdrawing from them (another 30 years or so from now).

The size of your house will depend on the size of your score.

This goes against the grain of how most of the “pro poker community” would use the windfall. Many would have immediately started playing bigger to see how much more they could make. I do think this is the best route to take for winning players, but it depends on each person’s situation.

I took the responsible route at the time by investing for our futures and would not fault anybody for taking the same route I did.

Reflecting back on it, I wish I’d taken some of the money and taken shots at higher games, although higher games back then were only $100/200 limit or $10/$20nl (UB probably had $25/$50nl back then but we all know how shady the UB games were so it was a good thing I never played on the site then).

I have always been a winning poker player and I should’ve given myself a shot at higher games to see how I did. Who knows how high I could’ve ended up playing had I taken that opportunity.

While I could’ve been a little more aggressive with my newfound money, there is danger in being too aggressive, which I’ve seen happen when other poker players bink a tournament or come across a large sum of money.

Either they play too high, play in games they are not the favorite (just because you win 6 figures in a tournament does not mean you can beat the highest or toughest games), play negative ev games (blackjack, craps, sportsbetting, etc.), or just spend too lavishly.

Soon they are out of the large amount of money they had and are left wondering “wtf did I do with all my money?!” I would recommend finding the right medium (games and stakes) with a minimal amount of risk to maximize one’s profits with the new bankroll.

Turns out a couple of years later we would move into a bigger house and I would win another Sunday major within a month of moving. I won $132k in the FTP $750k guaranteed. Talk about déjà vu. It’s been awhile since I won a big online tournament so I’m trying to convince my wife to move again.

Nicolak is one of many instructors already blogging over at CardRunners. Join CardRunners and get instant access to their poker blog network, where you can find poker blogs by your favorite instructors and start your own blog.

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Side Pot Calculator

Sun, 01 Aug 2010 12:00:00 -0700

Many poker players, even experienced ones, struggle with calculating side pots.

PokerListings' unique side pot calculator is the perfect tool to solve that problem.

Not only can you learn how side pots work, if you bring your laptop to the poker table you can actually use it in real-time to help resolve any disputes.

Click on the blue "Instructions" text above the calculator to learn how it works.

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Ten-Minute Texas Hold'em Crash Course

Thu, 21 Jul 2011 20:30:00 -0700

Here’s our 10-minute Texas Hold'em crash course to get you on your way.

Every couple months or so I'll have someone come up to me and tell me that they're going to Vegas for a couple days and they always ask me the same thing:

"What kind of poker tips can you give me?"

That question led to this article. So if you are going to give poker a shot, read this article first and your chances of success will improve greatly.

Editor's Note: This article assumes that you know the basics of how to play the game of Texas Hold'em.

If you're unsure of the rules and the way the game plays out, check out the Texas Hold'em rules first.

Is Poker Gambling?

The short answer is yes.

The long answer is no, with a but.Poker is gambling insofar as you can't control which cards you get, which cards your opponent will get or which cards will come on the flop.

But you can control when you put money into the pot.

By only putting money into the pot when the situation is favorable to you, and folding when the situation is unfavorable to you, you can win money in the long run playing poker.

You may still lose in the short term because of those uncontrollable elements, but if you regularly make better decisions than the majority of your opponents, you will more than likely make money.

The 30-Second Strategy Rundown

Texas Hold'em is a game about hand strength. Only the best hand wins at showdown. So you want to plan to have the best hand at showdown before you put a single penny in the pot.

It all begins when you're dealt your two hole cards.

You want to play only the best possible hands before the flop because they make the best hands after the flop.

Generally you want to be playing around 18-20% of your hands at a full nine-handed poker table.

It doesn't seem like many hands, and it isn't, but it's the best way to show a profit.

Hold'em is often just as much about the hands you fold as the hands you play. If you play too many hands, you simply won't be able to profit.

You'll be throwing away too much money with weak hands to make it back with your good hands. So play tight. Tight is right.

Your opponents

The Texas Hold'em games you find in the casino are generally very loose. A lot of players at the casino play 30% of hands or more.

When your opponents play weak hands before the flop, they make weak hands after the flop.

Generally, play 18-20% of your hands at a full table.

Weak hands are second-best hands, and your opponent's second-best hands are going to make you money.

Hand Strength

Remember your goal. You want to have the best hand by the time all five community cards are out and the betting has finished.

There is no clear-cut answer as to what hand is good enough to take to showdown. It always depends.

But by playing tight you will ensure that you'll make more best hands and less second-best hands

During each hand you have to take into account the cards that are on the board and the possibilities that they offer.

Think about what type of opponent you're playing against and how the hand has played out.

Poker is a game of information. Be a sponge; soak up as much as you can and use it to your advantage.

Pre-flop

Before you even see a flop you want to think about what hands you can make with the two cards you've been dealt. Your goal is to make "top" pair (no other possible pair in combination with the board cards that can be higher than yours) after the flop with a very good kicker or better.

Or you want a hand that has a reasonable expectation of making a big hand (straight, flush, etc) on a later street.

Check out the hands below to see what you should consider as playable before the flop.Monsters: AA, KK, QQ, JJ

These hands are already huge hands.

A single pair is often the best hand at showdown and these will often make an overpair to the board.

These hands are all extremely profitable and you should raise them whenever you are dealt them.

More best hands, less second-best hands.

With AA-KK and even QQ you can and should re-raise.Top pair hands: AK-AJ, KQ

These hands, when they hit the flop, usually make top pair with a good kicker.

Kickers are very important in texas holdem poker because two players will often flop the same pair and it comes down to the kicker to break the tie.

When you have one pair your kicker is almost always going to play.

For example, on a A♦ 3♠ 4♠ 7♦ 2♥ board, A♠ Q♠ will beat A♥ T♥ because the winning hand of A♠ A♦ Q♠ 7♦ 4♠ is better than A♥ A♦ T♥ 7♦ 4♠. When you play tight you're going to be winning the battle of the kickers and your loose opponents will be paying you off with worse kickers.

Top-pair hands you can also play if there is a raise in front of you by just calling and seeing the flop.

If nobody has raised in front you should raise these hands for value before the flop.

Suited Connectors: QJs-89s

At the casino, many players play any two suited cards.

It's one of the biggest mistakes new players make and they bleed money seeing flops with worthless hands.

Concentrate your efforts on suited connectors because they can flop both straight and flush draws.

When they're suited and connected it doubles the likelihood that they will see a flop they like. Being suited or connected on its own is not enough to see a flop. They have to be both.Suited connectors are profitable because they win big pots when they make straights or flushes. Though they do make big pot hands, they should often be folded to a raise unless the raise is very small.

These hands do very well when you can get in cheap. Look to flop a draw or get out.Pocket Pairs: TT-22These pocket pairs are not monsters.

Often with small and medium pocket pairs the flop will bring at least one overcard to your pair.

When you are holding 6♦ 6♠ and the board comes J♦ K♣ 3♠ your hand is practically worthless. The bulk of the value from pocket pairs comes from when they flop a set (three of a kind).

Three of a kind is a big hand in Texas Hold'em and when you flop a set you should look to get all-in as fast as possible. That said, small pocket pairs benefit from cheap flops as well.

Hand selection is key.

If you can see a multi-way pot against a small raise that's fine too but your main goal is a cheap flop.

If you don't hit your set you're best off folding.

Ace-X suited: A9s-A2s

These are the only weak aces you should ever play.

The reason why A-Xs hands are playable and other ace-rags are not is because they are suited and can make the nut flush.

If you make the ace-high flush you're going to win your opponent's entire stack if he has a smaller flush.

That said, many players get into trouble when they flop a pair of aces, only to be beaten by someone with a pair of aces and a better kicker.

Remember your goal. You want to take a cheap shot at flopping a flush draw. You don't want to get involved with a pair of aces and a weak kicker. A-Xs hands should not be played against a raise unless it's very small and there are many players. Cheap flops are the key.Everything else:

All other hands should be avoided like the plague. It will just be too difficult to turn a profit playing any more than the outlined hands.

Over time as you get better at poker you can gradually add more hands, but when you're learning you want to keep things simple. Good hands before the flop means good hands after the flop. Good hands after the flop mean easier decisions for you.

Keep it simple.

Post-flop

The Flop

As soon as the flop comes out, evaluate your hand.

Look at the board, look at what hands are possible and how your hand stacks up.

Remember: you want to make top pair or better or have a reasonable chance at a big hand. If you have a pair that's smaller than top pair and there's a bet, get out of the way and fold.

If you have top pair with a good kicker, call or bet yourself.

Entire chapters of poker strategy books are dedicated to playing on the flop so we're going to continue keeping it simple here.

Examine how the hand has played out and remember: top pair is a good hand, but if multiple people are raising it may not be good enough.

If you have better than top pair - two pair or a set for example - you should often raise to get value from worse hands.

Cheap flops are key.

A note on draws: A draw is when you can either make a straight or a flush on the next card.

Draws are big hands because straights and flushes are almost always good enough to win at showdown. All draws are not considered equal however.

For example 5♦ 6♦ on a 7♥ 3♥ A♦ board only has four outs - the four 4s - and the draw is weaker still because the 4♥ may also give someone a flush.

When you need the middle card to make your straight it's known as a gutshot.

The better straight draw is known as an open-ender. For example 8♠ 9♠ on a 6♥ 7♠ J♦ board.

In this example there are twice as many outs as a gutshot. Open-enders are much stronger than gutshots. Gutshots should seldom be taken past the flop unless you get a free look or the betting is extremely small. Flush draws have nine outs (based on 13 cards of each suit in the deck) and are very strong.

You generally can call one bet on the flop and if you miss on the turn you should abandon hope unless the betting is small.

The Turn

Usually by the time it gets to the turn there are only 2-3 players left.

When a player makes it to the turn he generally has at least some piece of the board. If you have the lead in the hand (meaning you've initiated the betting) and the turn changes nothing you should often keep betting. If the turn completes the flush or the straight draw you should often tread carefully.

If you bet and get raised, it's often best to just fold.

The River

The last street, the river, is usually contested heads-up.

Use the information your opponent has given you throughout the hand to figure out whether you should bet or call a bet. Each play your opponent makes tells you a little bit more about his hand.

If he raises before the flop, then bets the flop and the turn and now bets again on the river, he usually has a big hand. Conversely if he raises before the flop, bets into you on the flop, checks the turn and checks the river, he's usually going to be weak. Again there are thousands of different variables and going through all of them is impossible.

Use critical thinking to figure out what your opponent may have and act accordingly.

Position

Position is one of the most important factors in Texas Hold'em.

Position refers to your position in relation to the dealer button, which identifies which player acts last during the hand.

Have fun. Poker's a life long game.

Acting last is a huge advantage in poker because you have more information.

When you act last you know if your opponent wanted to check or bet. You get to see everyone's actions before you decide what to do.

Nobody can see the next card or showdown until you say. You are in complete control.

Because of that, when you're in position you can play more hands than you normally would because you will have the inherent advantage of acting last.

Poker's a long term game

Though poker is a game that you can beat in the long term, it's still gambling to some degree.

You make decisions and then random cards come out. You control when you put money in but you don't control the deck. It's that element of luck that makes the game interesting but it's also that element of luck that can make the game extremely frustrating. You can make every decision right the entire night and still lose the session. You can make every right decision all week and still lose.

Conversely you can see some idiot in seat 10 play every hand and win a ton. It's the nature of the game. It's what keeps the fish (bad players) interested, so embrace it. Look at each situation individually and make the best possible decision.

If you do that every time you will be a successful poker player in the long term. Try to downplay the importance of short-term results. And last but not least: Have fun. Poker's a fun game, so don't take it too seriously.

If you're ready to give it a shot online, check out our list of the best Texas Holdem poker sites here.

The Worst Hand in Poker

Thu, 15 Apr 2010 10:00:00 -0700

Not enough thought has been given to this topic so let’s run through some ideas.

Anyone who disagrees can click on the comment button and fire back.

For starters, let's limit ourselves to moderate stakes No Limit Hold em (from about $.50/1 to $5/$10).

At lower stakes some things change and at higher stakes everything changes.

Let's also recognize that what I'm focusing on isn't the + or - EV of each hand played but the EV of each hand dealt!

Okay?

It's Not 7-2 Offsuit

If you answered 7-2 off you're not even close. Yeah, 7-2o is awful.

Any pair is likely beat, you can't make a straight or a flush without giving away one of your cards and when you do it's often beaten by a bigger flush or higher straight.

But that's exactly why it isn't such a terrible hand. You practically never play it.

You don't limp with it; you don't call with it. You just dump it. Most of the time it doesn't cost you a farthing.

It's not the cards, it's you.

Then, every once in a while you get to play it for free when you're the big blind and a limp-fest breaks out. And every once in one of those whiles you hit some magic.

Flop two pair or trips and there's an ace or a king on board and some poor bastard is holding a weak ace or king and is gonna pay you off.

And you just recouped some loose change --- almost certainly more than you gave up those times when you had it in the SB and (wisely) mucked it or got raised off it in the BB.

It's likely that serious poker players are, over their lifetime, in the black with 7-2o or damn close.

Other candidates often put forward are problem hands like pocket jacks ("Ouch! Hate it when an overcard flops and die when another hits on the turn") or K-Q ("What do I do when the ace hits?"), J-Ts ("Yeah, I know I'm not really getting the right odds to draw here but well, maybe in 'implied' odds....") or K-9 (Mike Matusow's nominee).

It's Specific to You

Indeed, these are good "worst hand" candidates but, when the dust has settled, the worst starting hand is the one you play the worst.

It's the one you get into the most trouble with.

The one that you have the most difficulty getting away from when you suspect you're beat, the one that creates situations that you are uncomfortable with, where you are prone to making poor decisions.

For most of the poker junkies who dabble in the range of game we're looking at here, it is likely that your worst hand is one where you call a raise with some combination of unpaired "big" cards, especially one- and two-gappers.

These hands are so awful because of the many situations that pop up that can make you very uncomfortable.

Suppose you call a raise with K-T or Q-T and hit your top card. You can't feel really happy. Even if it's top pair, you might have kicker problems.

If you paired the under card you may already be way behind. If the board comes up all babies you're behind any ace. And there is the lethal tug to peel one.

How about the raggy ace? Although it's losing whatever thin veneer of strength it may have once had, there are still those will play 'any ace'.

Consider the Flopped Draw

Consider A-6. Hit your ace and you could be in big trouble. Hit your six ... well, trust me, you don't want to hit the six.

Let's look at another example, the flopped draw. The problems here aren't in the play. They're buried in the tilt factor.

There are lots of ways to go on tilt but one of the sneakier is to miss a whole mess of draws. You know you're on this kind of tilt when you stop 'doing the math' and start believing that 'you're due' (you're not).

How about the off-beat hands, like 8-7o or 7-5s?

In the past, these 'junk' cards were regarded as close to deserving "worst hand" status and conventional wisdom was to instamuck.

But as some have learned, they don't actually play that badly.

Know thyself.

If you miss and the situation doesn't offer options, they're easy to release - easier than K-J where you may have two post-flop over cards.

If you catch a piece and it's cheap, you can hang around and see what develops. If you catch big you can trap.

They are relatively sneaky hands and hard for opponents to put you on and they have significant metagame impact.

Know Thyself

Which of these starting hands can be played? Which can be pulled from the 'worst hand' dustbin?

If you're skilled at getting away from problem situations, don't mind occasionally mucking what just might be the best hand and are exceedingly sensitive to position, you can play any of them, with great care.

The deeper message? Again, it's one of my favorites, "know thyself."

The worst hand in poker is the one you play the worst.

Take a look at the series of columns we did on "Post Flop Play" for more on this issue.

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

From Hold’em to Omaha: The Fine Edge

Mon, 12 Apr 2010 00:00:00 -0700

To the Hold'em player, Omaha seems like the same game with twice as many cards.

Without understanding the odds and numbers of Omaha a Hold'em player will default to their two-card knowledge, assuming that the numbers they know simply need to be doubled (or halved) to work with Omaha.

It seems logical, since 4 cards are twice as many as 2 cards, the odds should be twice as good.

Since no one likes to sit through a math lesson (or if you do, you'll already know all of this), I'll keep this explanation very simple:

In Omaha you're dealt a four-card hand, not two two-card hands. Because your cards can all work together, like in a wrap draw, the odds increase (and decrease) exponentially.

In the simplest explanation possible: two plus two does not always equal just four.

The Fine Edge

Poker is an odds game. You wait for a situation in which you have favorable odds, and then you bet as much as you can. On the other end, when the odds are against you, you try to bet as little money as possible.

That's the very foundation behind poker strategy, excluding the bluffing aspect.

In Hold'em you will commonly find yourself in white and black situations, where you're either dominating or dominated. If you have aces against anything else, you're a massive favorite to win, and know it.

A WSOP Final Table, the ultimate goal.

Hold'em is full of these scenarios, when you can be almost positive that you're dominating or dominated, making the game (at times) very easy to play.

The best Hold'em players are not the ones who make the most when they have the best hand; they aren't even the ones who lose the least with the worst.

The best players are the players who consistently make a profit when they're playing hands in the grey areas, where the facts are unclear at best, and the edges are fine.

Unlike Hold'em, Omaha is almost exclusively a game of fine edges. With the most dramatic examples aside, almost any hand vs. hand matchup you can come up with will have the better hand at about a 60:40 favorite.

You will play almost every hand of every session of Omaha in this grey zone of fine edges. To be successful in a game like this, you need to be relentless in your value bets, a super nit when you're on the losing end, and absolutely dead on with your reads.

Factor in what we learned in the previous article about the relative strength of hands and you'll begin to understand why Omaha is such a fun, action-filled but dangerous game. Even when you flop the nuts, there's almost always someone with a legitimate chance at catching up by the river.

This is why Omaha doesn't function properly as a No-Limit game. If the game was No-Limit, the player who flops the best of it would be all in on the flop, basically turning the game into a gamble filled, two-betting round shit show.

To play Omaha successfully, you need to understand that you're almost always only a 60:40 favorite at best, but at your worst you're only behind by 20 points.

Once you add four cards combining for multiple draws, and the equity this gives you, you'll begin to understand why Omaha is known as a drawing game.

Large Outs and Faulty Odds

The final point every Hold'em player needs to drill into their head before playing Omaha is the faulty odds associated with a large amount of outs.

If you find yourself with a big wrap draw, sitting on 20 outs, an average Hold'em player will put their odds of winning at 80%.

The full-time grinder will put their odds at "Ship it", not caring about where the actual numbers come in at.

The astute Hold'em player will use the formula (20*4)-(20-8)=68%.

While you have a huge hand with a big wrap, you can't count your outs and your odds as you do in Hold'em, and assume that they'll be correct and accurate most of the time.

If your one opponent has just a single over pair to your wrap draw, you're sitting at around 73% to win.

In the end, it's all about grabbing chips.

If your opponent happens to have a set though, your odds drop to around 54%.

Once you factor in other players, especially other players with blockers and higher draws, your equity can absolutely plummet.

With 36 cards dealt out to players preflop (at a 9 handed table), chances are another player is holding your outs.

This doesn't mean your wrap draw is weak, in fact your hand is probably the best hand at the table, but you need to understand that even the most promising of a draw hand can still be dominated, only with a hand this strong it can take more than one player to do it.

In short, as a Hold'em player you need to take a step back, and shed the confidence that comes along with hitting a big flop. You need to separate yourself from the confidence that comes with holding a massive draw, and you need to understand that often times, regardless of how the situation may appear, you're sitting at about even money.

This game isn't for the faint of heart; it's for the players who are willing to be aggressive enough to put their money behind their hand.

The best Omaha players understand all of the concepts in this article and are willing to put their entire stack on the line knowing that the odds of you folding, along with the 60:40 rule makes betting, on anything, a decent proposition.

If you're not willing, or able to play back at someone throwing pot bets at you all night, on every street, then you should stick to a different game. Omaha is not a game to play super-tight, if that's the only style of poker you're comfortable with you're going to have a hard time turning a profit.

If you're willing to play back at someone throwing pot bets at you like candy, then take some time to digest the information in the articles and understand where you truly stand with your hand. Once you know where you're at, you'll know where you need to get to if you want to come out on top.

From Hold’em to Omaha: Hand Value

Thu, 01 Apr 2010 12:00:00 -0700

The poker world always has been, and always will be, in a state of flux. New games come in and out of favor as the game progresses and changes. Years ago Stud was the main game being played across North America.

It wasn't until relatively recently that Texas Hold'em took the poker world by storm. The simplicity in rules but complexity in strategy allowed all players to play and enjoy Hold'em from day one, but after a few years of non-stop play, Hold'em has begun to hit a wall.

People play poker for different reasons, two of the main ones being:

Making money Learning, progressing and honing your skills

Since the world has spent years focused on just one game, the average skill level of a Hold'em player is far beyond what has been considered "average" for poker. It's easy to see that this is going to make it harder to gain a big edge.

Also, many players have begun to feel like they're no longer learning or progressing in their game. They've read all the books, clicked through the web's poker strategy articles, played countless hours yet are still playing the same games, making the same money they were four years ago.

For all of these reasons, many people feel it's time to move on.

This article assumes you're coming into Omaha with a base set of Hold'em skills. If you've never played any poker, this article is not for you. If you're brand new to poker you'll want to start with the basic rules of poker.

The Europeans have been playing Omaha seriously for years now: Time to catch up.

If you're a Hold'em player thinking about making the change you're in the right place.

Relative Hand Value

The biggest thing you need to understand to play Omaha with any competency is the shift in relative hand value.

Most poker players don't know all the math, or theory, behind the inherent probabilities of poker.

A good poker player understands that a full house is more valuable and less likely than a straight; they might even know the odds of making either hand. But very few poker players can tell you how to calculate these odds, and more importantly exactly what they mean.

Feeling lost? Don't worry, this is all about to make sense. The bottom line is this:

Unless you have a mathematicians' understanding of all probability and odds, you'll approach Omaha by using your collection of poker knowledge and experience, applying and adapting what you know to the new game.

This is good, but there are a few pitfalls to this approach you should be aware of. One of the biggest is understanding the differences in relative hand value between Omaha and Hold'em.

When you flop top-two on a rainbow board with nothing more than a possible gutshot draw, you're probably willing to bet the farm in Hold'em. Your hand is second only to a set: you're in a good spot.

Unfortunately, if you've played a lot of Hold'em, this understanding of your top-two hand value is as much of a feeling as it is a basic understanding of the principals of poker. When you sit in an Omaha game and flop the very same thing, chances are you're going to feel almost the same about it.

Before you lose your head, and your stack, you need to take a second to re-evaluate the situation, rather than relying completely on your Hold'em mindset and experience.

Although flopping top two is a very good start, you are by no means holding the nuts. In fact, it's possible for your opponents to hold wrap-draws with no pairs, but still be treading water at even money.

Factor in the much greater possibility of running into a set, and you're now in a very vulnerable position.

When you allow yourself to feel comfortable and confident with your hand, when you're actually vulnerable and weak, you're setting yourself up for a massive mistake and loss.

To be clear, you do not need to throw out everything you know about poker and start fresh, but you do need to understand that you need to build on your Hold'em skill-set.

The hardest thing in Omaha: Looking at your 4 cards.

Having countless thousands of hands of Hold'em under your belt will help you at the Omaha tables, but it can also give you a false sense of confidence. Understand this before you begin playing the game, and don't over value your hands.

In the end the nuts remain the same, just be aware of all possible draws, re-draws and even backdoors. In Omaha, you're never as rock-solid as you may think.

Rather than evaluating your hand on the flop, then adjusting your evaluation as the turn and river come out, you want to think of it as running a preliminary evaluation on the flop, only really cementing your view of your hand after seeing the turn.

The flop gives you an idea if you want to continue with the hand and a basic idea of the size of pot you're willing to play.

After the turn is out, there are only made hands, and draws. Backdoor draws are out of the question, making things far more straight forward. If you hold top set on the turn, it's very straight forward to see if and how you can be beat.

Your Hold'em instincts and poker intuition at this point are going to be far more valuable, as calculating your opponents outs to draws becomes far more Hold'em-esque, and straight forward.

If you want to succeed at Omaha, you need to stop assuming you can just use your Hold'em experience and everything will be just fine.

Instead, take the time to think through each hand as if you've never played poker before, and then use your Hold'em knowledge to understand and evaluate the situation as best you can. In the end, remember the golden rule of Omaha: If you don't have the nuts, chances are someone else does.

Stay tuned for the second half of Moving from Hold'em to Omaha, where we will discuss the fine edge of Omaha, large outs and faulty odds.

Top 5 “Thin Value” Spots You May Be Missing

Mon, 08 Aug 2011 10:30:00 -0700

But correctly recognizing opportunities and betting when it’s correct can add valuable points to your win rate.

A thin value bet is a value bet that may not be obvious at first.

It's a bet, generally on the river, where your hand is weaker than your normal value range but you realize your opponent can still call with a worse hand.

These are the top 5 common spots you can make thin value bets.

5. When the flush draw misses

Probably the most obvious and yet somehow still the most effective thin value spot.

When there's a flopped flush draw and you barrel the flop and the turn, then the river bricks, your opponent is going to much more willing than usual to call with nearly any made hand - especially if you have an aggressive image. People love to put their opponents on draws so use it to your advantage when that draw misses.

An example:

$1/$2 No-Limit Hold'em; $200 effective stacks.

It's folded to you on the button. You raise J♥ T♥ to $6 and the regular in the big blind calls.

The flop comes 8♠ J♠ 3♣. He checks and you bet $8.

He calls. The turn comes Q♣, he checks and you bet $30.

Thin value can be the difference between having a slide in your condo or not.

He calls. The river comes 2♥ and he checks.

You should be much more willing than normal to bet your second pair with a weakish kicker.

There were two flush draws and they both bricked. Your opponent is going to put you on a flush draw and call with a much wider range than normal.

4. When the top card on the board pairs

When the top card pairs on the river your opponent is often going to discount the fact that you have top pair/now trips because of card removal.

And when your opponent discounts your ability to have top pair, he defaults to calling more often with second pair.

If you have a hand like second pair, decent kicker or an over pair slightly smaller than the paired top card, you can now get value from those second-pair hands.

3. When you're near the top of your weak made-hand range

If you have a made hand that's near the top of your range, even if it's weak, it can be bet for value vs. a thinking opponent.

An example:

$1/$2, $200 effective stacks. You raise in the cut-off to $6 with T♦ 8♦.

The button calls and the blinds fold. The flop comes Q♥ 8♠ 4♣. You c-bet $8 and he calls.

The turn comes 4♠. You check and he checks behind.

The river comes 6♦.

You can bet this river for thin value because it looks like you fired one c-bet, then gave up the turn and are now bluffing on the river. Because you would likely double barrel most top-pair hands your opponent is going to believe you're bluffing.

He'll probably be willing to call with a worse eight - something like 8♣ 7♣, 8♥ 9♥ or a missed gutshot that made a pair.

If you were to check, your opponent would likely check behind with his showdown-value hand. But by betting you can get him to call with that same weak showdown hand because your range is weak.

Your range is weak, but you're near the top of it so you can get value from your opponent's bluff catchers.

2. When an obvious scare card falls against a thinking opponent

This is an obvious second level. When a scare card falls your opponent is going to expect you to bluff at it at a high % of the time.

Thus he's going to adjust by calling down lighter. You can take advantage of this by betting some of your better "showdown value" hands for thin value.

1. When your range is heavily weighted towards bluffs

This is basically the running theme of this entire article and concept. The more bluffs that are in your range, the more you can bet for thin value.

The reasons are blatantly obvious. When your range is heavily weighted towards bluffs, your opponent is going to adjust by calling down with a much wider range. When they're calling with more hands, you can value bet more hands. It's as simple as that

The more bluffs in your range, the more you can bet for value.

Last Words

Value-betting thinly is a skill that takes practice.

You must be acutely aware of both your perceived range and your opponent's range when deciding whether or not to bet the river for thin value.

If you don't really think about both your ranges you're just going to be clicking buttons - and in that case you can't be surprised when you're continually value-towning yourself with a worse hand than your opponent's. However, if you really think about your range and your opponent's, there are a ton of spots on the river you may have checked through in the past where you can actually pick up thin value.

The difference of course is extra dollars in your online poker bankroll and points on your win rate.

How Not to Suck At Poker Examples: Distractions

Thu, 11 Mar 2010 10:00:00 -0800

If you want to be a consistent winner at the game, it's imperative you give poker 100 per cent of your attention, 100 per cent of the time.

We're not just talking about the hands you're in. Sometimes the hands you've folded can be even more important.

In the article How Not to Suck at Poker: Pay Attention, we went over why distractions hurt your bottom line. In this article we're going to explore a couple of examples to help clarify that point.

Troubles with Kings

You're playing $1/$2 No-Limit and pick up pocket kings in the cutoff. A couple players limp before you throw in a $15 raise (standard for the table you're playing at).

You get just one caller from mid position, a forty-something guy wearing a very dirty and faded Denver Broncos hat.

Flop:

Broncos checks to you, you throw in a quarter, $25. He calls.

Turn:

Broncos checks again, you put out another bet, this time $65. He calls.

River:

Broncos instantly goes all in for $250, $40 more than the pot. You think about it and are worried about the nut flush draw having caught an ace, a set or a random two-pair but can't figure out why he would have check called the latter on a dangerous board.

If he did hit his ace, he still wouldn't be sure he has the best hand, making his stop-and-go massive bet feel like a bluff.

What do we do?

If we had been paying attention during the previous hands at the table, our answer would be rather straight forward.

5 Hands Ago

While buddy Broncos was on the button, he got into a hand that would have given you all the information you need to make the correct play in your hand.

Under the gun raises to $12, you fold some sort of trash hand and buddy Broncos makes the call, heads up to the flop.

Flop:

Under the gun bets out $20, Broncos raises to $50, UTG calls.

Turn:

UTG checks, Broncos bets $75, UTG calls.

River:

UTG checks, Broncos bets $100, UTG raises all in for $225.

Broncos thinks for a while, then folds 8♠ 8♣ face up, a surprised UTG takes down the pot.

If you had paid attention to this hand, you would have noticed that Broncos is a scared player, who is only comfortable with the nuts, and not willing to risk his stack. The only thing that beat him would have been a better set, or a couple of clubs for the back-door flush.

Although Broncos had no way of being 100% sure he was ahead, there are too many hands which play the pot this way he has beat (lower set, two pair, top pair, bluff). Not to mention he was getting just under 6:1 on his money, it should have been an easy call.

Any player tight and weak enough to lay that down, is never bluffing on the hand we're playing against him. Having paid attention to this hand will save us $250.

The Erratic All-In

You're sitting with $280 at a $1-$2 No Limit game, watching the game on TV and hitting on the waitress. You figure you're about half of the way to getting her digits when you get dealt 10♠ 10♥ on the button.

After excusing yourself from the conversation you call the $15 raise and see a flop 3-handed.

Flop:

The first player instantly moves all in for $115, the second player folds leaving you to make a decision.

You're calling $115 to win $160, or about 1.4:1 on your money. The odds are not great, but the board is dry and you're holding an over-pair.

Do you make the hero call, or wait for a better spot?

Two Hands Earlier

Had you not been trying to look down the waitress's shirt at the time you would have seen the very same player 3-bet (re-raise preflop) all in for his $60 stack holding 9♠ 4♥. He hit the 9♣ on the turn to beat his caller with A♥ K♥, but still had one arm in his jacket, halfway out the door.

Had you known that this opponent was looking to go home, trying to gamble/double-up to get even or go home broke (far more common live than you may think), you'd know that calling with your tens is a no-brainer.

Although it's possible he has a better pair, it's far more likely he's bluffing, or has some sort of draw, or one pair. Chances are you're good here, and don't need any odds to make the call.

The Bottom Line

The more details you pay attention to at the table, the more hands you watch, reflect on and analyze at the table, the more likely you will be to make the correct decision when your own money is on the line.

The most profitable players are constantly studying the game, as well as their opponents' approach to the game. In the end Phil Ivey probably doesn't know any more stats or random statistics than most geeks with a shelf full of books.

But he does pay more attention, and pick up more information at the table than any other player in the game. Poker is a game of actions and reactions, you have to understand fully what your opponents are doing before you can figure out the most profitable response.

Pay attention, even if you're not sure what you should be paying attention to. Just watch the hands, make a note (mentally) about who's betting, who's calling and what hands they ended up having after making those actions.

Your subconscious brain will pick up far more information than you would believe, giving you the intuition you'll need to make the correct plays down the road. Just watch, observe, reflect then play. Poker is a thinking man's game, it was never meant to be played idly.

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

On Whining About Bad Beats

Wed, 03 Mar 2010 12:00:00 -0800

Bad beat stories have been discussed to death on chat rooms and poker forums. A consensus has emerged:

I. They never get you the sympathy you think you deserve.

But there's a deeper story here:

II. Complaining about your misfortunes at the table is likely to backfire and result in more abuse being dumped on you.

The first is obvious. You don't get sympathy because no one cares. Every poker player alive has had their flopped nuts cracked by a two-outer and doesn't give a rat's ass that it just happened to you. I used to get really ticked at players, especially ones who repeatedly tell these stories and, worse, wouldn't listen to mine.

I finally developed a simple rule. I will listen and nod the first time I get assaulted by someone. But that's their only shot at it. If they come back for a repeat performance, I hand them a card that I carry with me. It reads, on one side:

The look of a man about to earn a new bad beat story.

"Your bad beat story has touched my heart. Never before have I heard a story like that. You have my sincere sympathy. Now fuck off and stop bothering me."

And, just to drive the point home, I flip it over so they can see:

"Pardon me, but you have evidently mistaken me for someone who gives a shit. Here's a quarter. Go call someone who gives a fuck."

Okay, that's one way to take something vaguely annoying and make it amusing. But it's the second point that I want to get to.

There's a lot of psychology going on here, in the bad beat stories themselves as well as the range of responses that people have to the person telling them. Let's get our intuitions rolling by considering two "real world" situations.

Case 1 -- A bad beat to a neutral person: A tornado totally leveled his house and smashed his car. Here, suffering garners sympathy; this person's pain draws others to empathize.

Neighbors, friends and total strangers rally around in a chorus of support. In fact, he can complain about the injustice of it and they will listen and acknowledge. No one doubts his sincerity; no one wishes further pain on him.

Case 2 -- A bad beat to a member of a discriminated group: Hurricane Katrina hit New Orleans. The inner-city poor took the brunt of the disaster. At first, their suffering drew support and concern.

But further complaints of neglect and injustice were often not greeted with sympathy but with continued scorn and not-so-subtle prejudice. This reaction against those clearly suffering was so dramatic that it shocked many.

But most psychologists weren't shocked. For some time we've known that despised individuals and groups who are suffering often garner, not sympathy and support, but further abuse. When we dislike the one in pain, we are quite comfortable with increasing the pain.

In fact, as recent work by Roland Imhoff has shown, this pattern is found even when, initially, there were no negative feelings about those suffering.

I hope you can see how these findings apply to the teller of bad beat stories.

Phil "bad beat" Hellmuth should read this article.

The whiners, the complainers end up getting treated like a despised minority.

We may briefly see ourselves in their eyes, we may even feel a fleeting dollop of empathy, but basically we view them as weak, pathetic creatures who haven't yet learned the lessons of life, poker life. They deserve what they get.

So, even in those cases where the poor sucker you've cornered to bitch at seems to be sympathetic, he's probably not. In fact, he is almost certainly increasing the level of disdain he holds you in and looking to inflict even greater pain on you the first chance he gets.

For the poker player the lesson is dead simple. Stop bitching; no more bad beat stories. Not only are you not getting the sympathy you are looking for, you are lowering your reputation, damaging your image and making it more likely that opponents will want to pummel you more, just to see you suffer.

Is there any upside here? Yes, but it's one that is tough to pull off. It is possible to use whining and bitching as a weapon to put others on tilt or, more subtly, to make them try to target you.

It is a fundamental mistake in poker to try to "get" someone for it almost invariably leads to errors and misplays because you're focusing on the wrong things. I'll have a future column on this.

If interested, you can find Imhoff's research here.

Should You Make the Switch to Rush Poker?

Tue, 09 Mar 2010 18:00:00 -0800

For those that have been living in a cave for the last few months, Rush Poker is a new game introduced by Full Tilt Poker which allows a player to eliminate all downtime between hands, keeping them in the action for the duration of their session.

The idea is that when you fold your hand you're moved to a new table with new opponents and instantly dealt a new hand.

As you can imagine, the game is action packed and a lot of fun. But that doesn't necessarily mean you should make it your regular game.

Before you quit traditional poker and make the switch you should really weigh the pros and cons.

Three Pros

1. Hands per hour - In a regular online Texas Hold'em game you're lucky to be dealt 80-90 hands per hour. Compare that to the 30 you get in a casino and you're laughing. But in Rush Poker you can be dealt over 250 hands per hour - depending on how fast you click!

A rakeback grinder's dream.

With more hands per hour comes more good hands - and more hands where you can exploit your edge. Furthermore, with more hands comes more rake. And with more rake comes more bonuses and rakeback, which for many players is a very high percentage of their total winnings.

2. No history - You're moved to a new table with new opponents every time you fold your hand. Playing a different opponent each hand makes it extremely difficult for your opponents to get a read on you.

You can use that as an advantage any way you like. If you only want to play aces and kings, your opponents probably won't catch on. If you want to three-bet every single button and small blind, same deal.

Rush Poker evens the playing field and takes out the read and tells aspects of the game, which you can use it to your advantage.

3. It's fun - The biggest advantage to Rush Poker is that it's action-packed and fun. It makes grinding less of a chore and the fun factor helps bring more fish into the game.

More hands vs. fish is a good thing. The only problem is that it's sometimes difficult to spot the fish until it's too late.

Three Cons

1. No history - This one's a pro and a con. It's a negative because as a good player you should be formulating reads. You should be observing your opponents and figuring out how they play and then using that information against them.

If you want to be Phil Ivey then Rush may not be for you.

When you change tables after every single hand it's impossible to truly understand how your opponent plays. You have to treat everyone the same and make ABC, generalized, decisions against everybody.

If you're a better player than your opponents, Rush Poker forces you to give up a percentage of your edge.

2. Tilt factor - Because you're playing so many more hands per hour, you're also dealt more bad beats and coolers than you would in a typical session. Add in the fact that players are often turbo-folding waiting for aces and kings, and coolers happen seemingly all the time.

If you can't control the emotional side of your game and are susceptible to tilt you may have problems with Rush Poker - it's even easier to tilt when you can play 1,000 hands per hour on four tables.

3. It stunts your poker growth - Maybe the biggest disadvantage to Rush Poker is the fact that it stunts your growth as a poker player. If you're happy grinding rake and winning a little and making a decent earn at $1/$2, then Rush Poker is great.

If however you would like to move up in stakes and improve as a poker player, Rush Poker is not for you.

To succeed in middle stakes and beyond you have to develop reads and use your reads against your opponents. Rush Poker teaches you to treat all of your opponents as equals. If you try and treat everyone the same at medium stakes and above you're going to bust your roll pretty fast.

Rush Poker is a great game and can be really fun to play. But you have to know what you want to be as a poker player to decide whether or not you should switch to the game full time.

Use my list and think of pros and cons of your own before deciding whether or not to make Rush Poker your full-time game.

How Not to Suck at Poker Examples: Counting Outs

Mon, 22 Mar 2010 13:00:00 -0700

If you haven't already, check out the original article right here.

When counting outs, you need to first make a guess (hopefully it's an accurate guess) about what cards your opponent is playing.

The specifics of your opponents hand will greatly affect the number of outs you may or may not have.

Example 1

Your Hand:

Board:

How many outs do you have? Depending what you put your opponent on, you can have as few as four outs, or as many as ten.

Your straight draw is to the nuts (a nutshot as I like to call it), so unless you run into a full house or backdoor flush, you have four rock solid outs.

If you put your opponent on just a single pair, such as A♦ 9♦ , then you have ten outs (the nutshot along with any queen or jack).

Unfortunately, it's near to impossible to know what your opponent's kicker is with their 9. If they're holding J♦ 9♦, then you're down to only seven outs.

You need to take into account all situations, and play the hand accordingly. When in doubt, it's always better to assume you have the least number of outs, rather than the most. It's always a less expensive mistake to fold when you're good, than to call when you're behind.

Example 2

Your Hand:

Board:

In this hand, you span the gap from drawing dead all the way to 15 outs, depending on your opponent's cards. If your opponent has a full house (or quads), you're drawing dead or practically dead (technically you could catch running JJ or QQ for a higher full house).

If your opponent has a higher flush draw, you're drawing to 6 outs, and you have to dodge 7 hearts as well as as many as 6 higher pair outs.

If your opponent had just a pair, you're sitting with as many as 15 outs (assuming a J or Q doesn't give your opponent a better two pair).

In order to count your outs here, you're going to need a strong read on your opponent. For all the beginners out there, stick to the two following golden rules:

1. Only pay for a draw if it's a draw to the nuts.

2. Never draw to a straight or flush on a paired board.

There are times when you can ignore these rules in poker, but as a beginner you should follow them almost 100%. In the long run you're going to lose a lot of money chasing flushes on paired boards, and you're going to suffer from winning a small pot, or losing a big pot by chasing flushes, not to the ace.

In general, these are the kind of situations you want to avoid. If you can take this draw to the river for cheap, then it's still a decent hand, but it's not one to get your whole stack in play with.

Example 3

Your Hand:

Board:

In this hand you have a gutshot straight draw, and a flush draw. But how many outs do you really have? Let's look at the gutshot. Even if the board was rainbow (rather than all spades), you're drawing to a one-card sucker end of a straight.

If the 9 comes you have 8♠ 9♦ T♠ J♠ Q♠, while anyone with a king in their hand has a better straight 9-K.

If a spade comes, you're sitting with an 8-high flush, the third nut.

Really, the best out you have is the 9♠ for a straight flush, and even then the K♠ has you crushed. Your outs are effectively zero, this hand is a must fold.

When counting your outs, it's crucial to look past the outs your hand has to improve. If improving your hand will make a better hand for your opponent that out is actually an anti-out. To learn more about anti-outs head to Anti-Outs and Money Cards.

The How Not to Suck at Poker series:

How Not to Suck at Poker: Play Fewer Hands How Not to Suck at Poker: Play in Position How Not to Suck at Poker: Count Your Outs How Not to Suck at Poker: Learn Basic Odds How Not to Suck at Poker: Pay Attention How Not to Suck at Poker: Have a Bankroll How Not to Suck at Poker: Stop Bluffing How Not to Suck at Poker: Keep Your Mouth Shut How Not to Suck at Poker: Keep Records How Not to Suck at Poker: Discuss the Game

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

5 Mental Mistakes That Kill Your Poker Win Rate

Fri, 19 Feb 2010 12:00:00 -0800

In golf you can go from shooting 120 to 100 and below just by eliminating three-putts.

Mental mistakes in poker are golf's three-putts - they absolutely destroy your win rate.

Sure, it's possible to still beat the game.

But you'll never realize your full potential if you're regularly making these five critical errors:

1) Playing too long while stuck

You wouldn't be a poker player if you've never played too long while stuck.

When you're losing you just want to get even, so you force things and you play too long.

When you're losing and trying to get even, your game obviously suffers.

It's easy to slip into autopilot during long sessions and even the best poker players are susceptible to tilt.

When you're losing this is all magnified. You may not truly be tilting, but you're certainly not playing your best.

And if you're not playing your best poker, then you're "tilting."

2) Quitting early to book a win

The flip side of the first mental error is booking a win prematurely.

Now, if you're coming out of a downswing, booking any win can be great for your confidence. But if you're regularly quitting as soon as you're up a buy-in, then you have a problem.

If you combine that with playing too long when stuck you have yourself an epidemic.

You'll be playing 2,000 hands when losing and playing your "B" game and then booking small 300-hand wins when you're winning and playing your "A" game.

What happens is that you end up playing your "B" game far more often than you're playing your "A" game. In any sport, confidence is your best friend. Poker is no different.

If you're playing your best and winning and the games are good, keep playing. This is the optimum situation for playing winning poker.

If you were to quit now you'd be leaving money on the table.

3) Poor game selection

In poker you never have to be the best player in the world to make money. You don't even have to be the best player at the table.

You just have to be better than the majority of the table.

If you don't put the time in to find a good table, you're making a mistake every single time you sit down.

There's no reason for it. Search the lobby for potential good tables and sit down.

If they're no good, don't be afraid to quit the game and find another one. Not recognizing when the table has gone bad can be a real win-rate killer.

Always pay attention to your tables and never be afraid to quit them in search of a better table.

4) Making -EV plays against your best judgment

This, above all, is the real win-rate killer.

It's usually at the tail end of one of those long online poker sessions where you're stuck and tired and not playing your best.

You'll be facing a big bet and you know your opponent is very rarely bluffing and yet you'll call anyway with your bluff catcher.

What causes it? Who knows, but if you want to progress as a poker player you have to eliminate that part of your game.

Trust your gut. Don't call just to find out if you're right.

Take a deep breath, think about his range and if you're beat, you're beat. Fold.

Making calls you know to be -EV is a problem that causes too many players to stay stuck at the small stakes.

5) Bad Bluffs

Bluffing is definitely a big part of the game. But bad bluffs shouldn't be a part of yours.

When you bluff you have to be representing a hand. If you're not, a good opponent is going to catch on.

Don't just bluff without thinking; think about what hand you're representing and whether you can credibly represent it.

If you can, good. If you have plan B equity - like a gutshot or overcards - even better.

Bluffing becomes even more effective when you have a back-up plan. That is, if you get called you can still hit your long shot and win the hand.

If you bluff with a back-up plan and you think about the hand you're representing, you'll eliminate the bad bluff.

Last Word:

Mental mistakes are murder for your win rate. Always stay sharp at the poker table, take frequent breaks and concentrate.

You shouldn't be chatting and watching TV.

Winning poker is a business - so treat it like one.

How Not to Suck at Poker Examples: Position

Tue, 16 Feb 2010 14:30:00 -0800

Far more important than the hands you're dealt, the players at your table, or the size of your stack is the position you have in the current hand.

There are other factors that will help determine your success at the game but your position is at the top of the list.

Texas holdem poker is a long term game, but position is a short term idea. To win in the long term, you need to make the correct plays over the short term.

When you're out of position, you're often playing in the dark. In short, it loses you money. Here's an extreme hypothetical example to help give you a clear idea of why position is so important:

You're playing $1/$2 No-Limit, sitting with $300. From under the gun you're dealt A♥ A♠. You raise to $12.

A guy in middle position (10♥ 10♦) calls and so does the player to his left (A♣ K♣). You go to the flop three-handed.

Flop: 10♠ J♠ Q♦

You bet out $25. The first guy raises to $60 and the second guy calls.

With such a draw-heavy board you choose to re-raise to $150. The first guy moves all in, and the second guy snap calls.

Put yourself in a position to make money.

You fold, losing $162 on the hand.

Now let's take the same scenario and put you on the button, instead of under the gun:

You're dealt A♥ A♠ on the button. A guy in middle position (10♥ 10♦) raises to $12, and the player to his left (A♣ K♣) calls. You re-raise to $40, both players call.

Flop: 10♠ J♠ Q♦

The first player bets $100, and the second player instantly calls.

You fold and lose $40.

Both times you lose money, and there was really nothing you could have done in either scenario to avoid that. The difference is how much money you lose.

In the scenario above we got lucky that the player with the set chose to bet out. If he would have checked, chances are we would have lost a total of around $120 instead of just $40.

Even if you don't re-raise in the first example, and you fold after you get raised and called, you still lose $60, $20 more than you lost when you had position.

The increased information we have allows us to make a more informed decision before we have to act. In a scenario like the one above, we can almost always assume that our aces are drawing nearly dead.

To be clear, I'm not trying to say you should fold hands like AA from early position, I'm just trying to impress upon you the value of position, and the disadvantage you have when you're playing without it.

When trying to decide what hands you should play or fold, such as K10 off, position should be the most important factor in your decision.

A simple rule of thumb: Regardless of the style you choose to play, if you're in early position, only play premium hands.

A premium hand will most often lead to simple, easy choices while marginal hands often put you in tricky spots.

The last thing you want to do is put yourself in a difficult situation because you're playing out of position. Don't be a sucker, position or bust.

The How Not to Suck at Poker series:

Internal Tells or Just Plain Tilt?

Fri, 12 Feb 2010 10:30:00 -0800

It's a funny term and he lists a wide range of circumstances as marking an "internal tell".

These include high levels of tension when under pressure (tough hand, lot of money at stake), feelings of unease because of other events in one's life (family matters, business problems), individual differences in the ability to control and regulate emotions and, of course, Hellmuthian tantrums and Matusowian meltdowns.

Silverstein's onto something here and it's worth looking into.

First, I think he's mislabeled it. It isn't an internal tell. In fact, it isn't a tell in anything like the classic sense of that term.

Tells are mannerisms or changes in demeanor or action that reveal information about the strength of your hand.

Tells are, hence the name, "telling" your opponents something that they can use to make more informed decisions. If you're in bankruptcy court it might make you feel less confident at the table but it won't necessarily have any outward effect on how you play K-8 off from the BB.

Silverstein notes that when he talked with professional players about this topic, in his words, they "initially had trouble relating to the idea."

And well they should.

Silverstein is really talking about tilt. If there's an 'internal tell' here it is one that is 'telling' the player that they are, indeed, tilting.

Next to tilt Hellmuth knows no foe.

Tilt is the poker player's most formidable foe. It's been talked about and written about endlessly but still eludes a full unpacking of its nature. Of all those who have broached the topic, Tommy Angelo has made the most progress.

I've recommended his book Elements of Poker before so let me do so again. Angelo would likely resonate to Silverstein's approach, though I suspect he too would rename it.

Why are "internal tells" simply tilt? Because they are internal states that screw with decision making. Sometimes they are cognitive in nature, like when you're depressed or tired and have trouble thinking through the complexities of a hand. Sometimes they are emotional in that business troubles (or a shrinking playing bankroll) are creating gut-churning levels of anxiety, which is known to undermine confidence.

Sometimes they are motivational like those days where you've lost the calm, determined approach to the game, feel twitchy and unsure.

Each of these unhappy states causes tilt because when you're angry or depressed, anxious or unsure, confused or overwhelmed, you cannot make optimal decisions. Non-optimal decision making is the functional equivalent of tilt.

I'm going through this in detail because there is an important point. Tilt isn't just flinging cards or going on some nutty raise-reraise rampage. Tilt isn't normally as obvious and compelling as cussing out an opponent.

Tilt is any time, any, when circumstances conspire so that you are no longer playing at your best.

That's it.

So, if it's that simple, why all the fuss? Well, just because it is that simple --- and just because simple truths oft carry complex lessons with them.

The lesson here? Let's go back to Silverstein, because he's actually got the issue right, even if he mislabeled it.

He counsels listening to your inner voice, learning to take note of your emotional state, searching for calm spaces, ones where you feel at one with yourself and are in the moment.

Un-tiltable.

He relates a conversation he had with Jerry Yang (yeah, I know, none of you think much of him as a player but, hell, he did win the big enchilada). Jerry tells him that he learned that he cannot play good poker when he has other serious matters on his mind.

He says that when "I am calm, not agitated, nothing outside the table distracts me ... I feel almost invincible."

Humberto Brenes (I think we can all agree that his game is pretty good) tells Silverstein that when he is in the zone "I don't even see my cards, I just become my cards." And when he gets smacked hard he puts a favorite song on his iPod and sings to himself until he calms down again.

The keys here are two-fold. First, you have to learn to detect these tilt-generating states. This isn't always easy.

I often find that I'm feeling tense or annoyed or lacking patience and, once I notice this, I ask myself, "When did this start? How long have I been like this? How many non-optimal decisions have I already made?"

I've been playing this game for decades and I'm still working on spotting these internal states. It ain't easy.

Second, you need to learn how to make the mental adjustments to bring you back from tiltiness.

Brenes sings (sometimes out loud!). Yang shuts out uncomfortable thoughts. Angelo meditates and uses controlled breathing (go read the book). Reber, well, Reber still hasn't figured it out but, hell, it ain't easy.

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Leak Finding Using Hold'em Manager

Tue, 09 Feb 2010 09:00:00 -0800

With just a little legwork you can analyze your entire game, looking for leaks that cost you money and hurt your winrate.

The filters in HEM are top notch, and you can use them to take a really close look at your game.

Now obviously you play holdem to make money and you do that by seeking out profitable situations. But what's profitable and what's not may not be immediately recognizable.

You may actually be getting into non profitable scenarios all the time and not realizing it. These non-profitable scenarios destroy your winrate. Luckily with HEM we can use filters to find these non-profitable spots and we can find out why they're non-profitable.

From there it's just plugging that leak and your winrate will see a boost in the long run.

First things first, hit the filter button and filter to your main game. You don't want shot taking at higher limits throwing off the results.

As always the bigger the sample size (300k hands plus) the more accurate your findings.

Another note is that this article is already going to be very long. We'll look a plugging specific leaks in future articles but in this article there's nowhere near enough room to go through them all

Ultimately it will be up to you to do some critical thinking on how to improve your game.

We're through the looking glass here people.

Preflop

Preflop mistakes are the smallest you can make. The betting is small and you're only risking a very small portion of your entire stack.

You can even make up for small preflop mistakes with good postflop play, but in the long run lots of small leaks can add up to big losses.

After all, it's your play before the flop that sets the foundation for the rest of the hand.

Using HEM's filters tab you can look at every single possible preflop action. Through these filters you'll be able to tell which situations are profitable and which are not.

First of all let's analyze your play from early position.

In the main filter tab click early position. This will filter to all hands played under the gun and under the gun +1. First and foremost look at your VPIP and PFR. They should be almost half of your overall VPIP. You should be playing very tight from early position.

If your UTG VPIP and PFR are close to your regular VPIP you've already spotted a leak. Tighten up substantially from UTG.

Filter your UTG results further in the hole cards tab and see how you do with the bottom of your UTG range. Let's say the bottom of your UTG range is something like ATo , Axs, and T9s. Look at each one independently and see if you're turning a profit. You may surprised to learn the results.

You can do the same for all positions by changing your first filter to middle position, cut-off, button and using the hole card filter to get a good idea of which hands you're playing profitably from which position.

Using the preflop action facing player box you can also look at scenarios where you isolate a preflop limper etc. The possibilities are endless so play around with it.

The Main Filters Tab

Next, you want to look at how you're playing against raises. To do this you go back to the Main Filters tab and you select all positions and in the next box preflop action facing player you select vs. 1 raiser.

Make sure your hole cards tab is back to normal and hit save and close.

Take a look at your results and then filter further, by your opponent's position, your position, hand type etc, until you track down where you're bleeding money.

Next we have in the blinds vs late position steal. In the position box hit small blind and big blind. In the action facing player box hit one raiser. In the position of first raiser box, hit button and cutoff, then go to the filter by actions tab, and tick filter by preflop actions, scroll down to call, highlight it, hit save and close and look at your results.

This will show all hands played where you call a raise from the blinds against a late position steal.

As you did before start filtering your results using the Hole Card tab and look for where the money's going.

You can also filter by hands you three-bet to see how profitably you are three-betting from the blinds vs a steal. But we will go over three-betting later.

Now look at blind vs blind play. First use the filters to filter yourself as the small blind and thus the aggressor. Hit unopened in the preflop action box and once again go to the filter by actions tab and select raise in the preflop actions box.

Once again look at all the different hands in your range and see how they stack up.

Anyone can play with the lead though so the real information can be seen by looking at your play from the big blind vs. a small blind steal raise.

Hit big blind in the position box, 1 raiser in the preflop action box, and set the position of the first raiser to the small blind. Once again set the preflop action to call and save and close and repeat the leak finding process.

The Hole Cards Tab

Postflop

The flop, turn and river are where the real money is made and lost.

Each street the betting gets substantially bigger and by the river you're often making decisions for your entire stack.

In light of this it shouldn't surprise you that this is where your leaks really start to magnify.

Again the filters tab in HEM are amazing for breaking down even complex situations..

Let's look at a few postflop leaks commong to many low-stakes players.

Quite a few small-stakes players call too often on the flop turn and river. You can look at your stats by street using the filter by actions tab.

Set preflop to call, flop to call and go from there. Examine each street individually and look at how you do. Some players call too often on the flop (the flop number will be small) and their stats will suffer, others the turn, and others the river (the flop number will start big and get small by the river).

You can further filter it down by using the hand values tab to see where you're bleeding the money. Are you calling too often with top pair no kicker? Or are you simply just playing out of position too often? Use the Hand value tab and the position box in the main filters tab to find out.

Another area of concern for many players is how they play draws.

To look at your results with your draws go to the hand values tab and select the draws you want to look at. You can filter for everything from nut draws to gutshots. Look at each scenario individually.

The hand value tab.

Those are just two examples but you can look at absolutely any scenario using these filters.

Once you get the hang of it it's easy. You can look at how you do as the preflop raiser when you c-bet the flop, check the turn, then call on the river. It's just the setting of the different filters. Play around with it.

Some scenarios to look at are firing three barrels as a bluff, playing hands with showdown value (with or without the lead), playing out of position without the lead, etc etc.

Three-bet pots

Today's six-max games are so aggressive it seems like half of your play is in three-bet pots. As such you should be spending a good deal of time thinking about your play in three-bet pots.

To look at your play in three-bet pots with the lead in the main filters tab set preflop action facing player to one raiser and one raiser plus callers, then switch to the filter by actions tab and filter by preflop actions, and select raise.

From there you can look at hands where you're three-betting light or three-betting for value by using the hole cards tab.

You can even go further and use the filters to see how you play in three bet pots from the blinds, how you do on the turn when you're called etc. Go through all these options.

Next you want to look at your play in three-bet pots as the caller. For this you want to use the filter by actions tab and select raise call and call call.

Filter by actions tab.

That will bring up all three-bet pots where you don't have the lead.

Again play around with the filters to get the random scenarios you're looking for.

Find Leaks Then Plug Leaks

Leak finding is not an easy job, in fact in can be quite mentally tiring going through all of the possible scenarios. But it's completely necessary.

Poker is a game where you can trick yourself into believing that every play you make is plus-ev, when in reality it may be a losing proposition.

You may continue to make money despite having these leaks and if you never do leak finding you'll never actually know they exist.

But every leak costs you money.

Familiarize yourself with how to use the filters and go through regular, everyday scenarios in your head and adjusting the filters accordingly.

The possibilities are endless and if you've never taken a really hard and honest look at your game you may be surprised at what you find.

Once you find those leaks, it's up to you to plug them up. There are countless articles on this site and sites like it. There are coaching videos and personal coaches. Use a combination of these to fix your leaks, or just use some good old-fashioned critical thinking.

As dogishead says, "Poker loves only the diligent and hates only the lazy." Be diligent and review your play with an unbiased eye and the sky's the limit.

Rush Poker Strategy - Guide to Winning at Rush Poker

Fri, 30 Jul 2010 16:00:00 -0700

But what’s the correct strategy?

For those of you that don’t know, Rush Poker is Full Tilt’s latest brainchild. Poker for the action junkie, Rush Poker automatically deals you into a brand new hand at a brand new table the very second you fold.

There’s no downtime at all - fold and you’re instantly back in the action. There’s even a quick-fold button that allows you to fold the second you get your hand, regardless of your position.

The Obvious Changes to the GameThe biggest change to the game by far is that you instantly change tables when you fold your hand. Meaning you never have history with your opponents.

Each hand is at a new table with new opponents. You don’t know who the fish are and you don’t know who the regulars are. Everyone’s just a blank face. Because you can’t develop reads through playing multiple hands with the same opponent, you have to treat each opponent the same. But that works both ways.

Since you can’t develop reads on your opponents, they can’t develop reads on you. In Rush Poker you don’t have to worry about leveling, balancing your range, or anything like that because your history with your opponents is going to be minimal.

So How Should I Play?In small-stakes poker the bulk of your profits come from fish.

Even if you’re the best small-stakes player in the world and you regularly own other reg’s souls, the majority of your profit is still going to come from playing the fish.

Even durrrr was getting down on the Rush Poker action.

Unfortunately in Rush Poker you may not know who the fish are and who the regs are until after the hand's over. And by then it’s too late. So the best way to play is a basic ABC poker game.

In fact you can play even tighter than you would normally because your opponents are never going to notice and never going to be able to adjust.

When you’re moved to a new table it’s a clean slate. They have no idea that you just hit quick fold twenty times in a row and are now cold four-betting AA from the blinds.

They’re just thinking, “Wow, I’ve got AK. I’m supposed to felt AK.” And they call it off, drawing nearly dead and chalk it up to a cooler. Just like when you first started playing poker, tight is right. The mantra is especially true for Rush Poker. Wait for big pairs, AKs, set mine, make top pair or better and value-bet relentlessly. That’s how you’re going to make money in Rush Poker.The Not-So-Obvious Differences Of course the whole game is changed by the fold and quick-fold buttons. Players don’t have to wait around for a great hand. They can just fold their junk and move on to a new table and a new hand. That means your average player’s range is going to be significantly tighter. The fish are going to be fish and do what they always do: play strange hands and take them way too far after the flop. But the regulars are going to be playing a much tighter range. It’s because of the quick-fold button. If you’re sitting with 6-8o in the small blind, are you going to wait around and see if you get the chance for a BVB steal? No, you’re going to hit quick fold and move on to another table. So when you raise from under the gun and get called in the small blind you have to realize that that player had the chance to quick-fold and get a new hand at a new table but he didn’t. He waited around to play against you. Either he’s a fish or he has a pretty damn good hand.

Because he didn’t choose to quick-fold you can already start assigning him a range. It looks something like JJ-22, AQ and maybe AJs. Anything else is definitely too wide vs. a UTG raise in Rush Poker. From there, as the hand plays out, you do what you always do. Start narrowing his range down until you have a good idea of his actual holdings. The Big Blind

The big blind is the only position where you can’t insta hit quick-fold. That’s because you have the big blind invested already. You have to wait until there is a raise before you can quick-fold. Meaning that the above is not as true for the big blind in unraised pots. He didn’t have the opportunity to quick-fold his hand, so if it’s folded to you on the button or in the small blind and you raise, when he calls it doesn’t mean his range is necessarily tighter.

A mass multi-tabler's rakeback wet dream.

For that reason, as of now, the majority of “light three-betting” comes from the big blind. Because any other position wouldn’t wait around until their turn to three-bet some trash hand, they’d just fold and move on.

The big blind doesn’t have that chance so he gets mad and three-bets those steal raises far more than he would from the small blind. Obviously not every player plays the big blind like this, but it’s something to be cognizant of.

Shorthanded vs. Full RingLike in any form of poker the difference between shorthanded and full ring is very real, only in Rush Poker it’s absolutely huge. A six-max Rush game plays only slightly different than a regular six-max game. With so few players and everyone playing so fast, you often can’t even hit quick-fold before the action is on you. While everyone’s early position ranges tighten up, the late position raises remain wide. In full-ring the tightness is extremely magnified. Why even bother calling a raise with ATo when you can just insta-fold and get a new hand? There’s no reason. Ranges are, or at least should be, tighter across the board.

There’s just no need to be involved with marginal hands.RakebackAs the novelty of these games wears off and more people start playing a better Rush strategy, I think the real value in these games will be for the rakeback you can make. Eight-tabling $100nl Rush (four six-max and four full ring) nets you 2,000 hands an hour. In those 2,000 hands you pay approximately $100ish rake. At 27% rake back that's $27/hr in rakeback alone. If you can beat the game on top of that, you’re going to be making a pretty good wage.Last Word

Rush Poker is a fun, action-packed game. This article was written on the second day of its existence. This is the proper strategy in my opinion for the games that I've played at this point. I’ve only played 10,000 hands and I have no idea how the games may change and evolve in the future. As of now, tight is right is the best strategy for Rush Poker. Rock it up, and rake it in. In the future I may be re-writing this article.

More Strategy Articles from Dan Skolovy:

When to Call the Flop with Less Than Top Pair Firing the second barrel The C-bet for Beginners When not to continuation bet Fixing your redline: Making better c-bets

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

How to Interpret Your Opponent’s Poker Stats

Thu, 28 Jan 2010 12:00:00 -0800

In addition to keeping accurate details about your wins and losses, programs like Poker Tracker and Hold’em Manager will track every move your opponents make.

using the heads-up display (HUD) you can convert that information into easy-to-understand stats and display them beside your opponents' names in real time, right on the table.

The information on the HUD tells you precise details about your opponents' playing tendencies, and understanding these stats can make a huge difference in your win rate.

Stats are something that all winning players use to a degree, but very few use to their full potential. Learn to master this powerful tool and you'll reap big benefits.

A quick run down of the most popular stats:

Preflop Stats

VPIP%

This is the average total % of times your opponent puts money into the pot voluntarily. That could mean raising preflop, cold calling, completing the big blind, etc.

The higher a player’s VPIP, the looser the player. The lower the VPIP, the tighter the player. For six-max no-limit hold’em most regulars fall between 19-25% VPIP. Any tighter or looser, though possibly profitable, is by no means optimal.

See the side picture for a PokerStove of 19% VPIP to get an idea of what hands that player would play.

If you're not familiar with PokerStove get the details here.

PFR%

This is the Pre-Flop Raise stat and it’s pretty self explanatory. It’s how often your opponent raises before the flop. Most players' PFR fall within 4-6% of their VPIP. I.E if they play 20 VPIP their PFR is usually between 14%-19%. The bigger the gap between VPIP and PFR the more often a player cold calls.

For example a player with a 35% VPIP and a 10% PFR has a 25% cold-calling range and is most likely a fish.

19% PFR

3b%

This is how often your opponent re-raises before the flop. As an example a 3% three-bettor would be AA-TT, AKs-AQS, and AQo and would have no light three-bets in its range. You can adjust from there.

F3

This is how often your opponent folds to three-bets. This stat is extremely helpful when deciding which hands to three-bet and which to call with before the flop. Obviously someone with a high fold-to-three-bet stat is a player you can three-bet light relentlessly. Someone with a low fold-to-three-bet stat you can three-bet wider for value.

These are the most popular pre-flop stats. While most players understand what each stat means, few take the time to think how they are all related.

For example a player with a very close VPIP and PFR is also normally going to have a higher three-bet% because he is cold-calling less often. Conversely a player with a wide gap between his VPIP and PFR is going to have a very wide cold-calling range and thus will have many weak hands in that range.

It’s not just about knowing what the stats mean. You must understand how to use them to draw real and useful conclusions about your opponents' games.

Postflop Stats

AG

This is your opponent’s aggression factor. It tells you how aggressive he plays. Most players fall between 1-3. Anything less is very passive and anything more is very aggressive. If a player with a 0.5 AG is playing back at you, he's probably not bluffing and you would need a very good hand to continue.

On the other hand if someone with a 6 AG is playing back at you, your top pair is starting to look pretty good.

WTSD%

This is how often your opponent goes to showdown after seeing the flop. Most players fall between 20 and 32%.

Having a low WTSD can mean two things: He either folds very often before showdown or he makes his opponents fold very often before showdown. A good way to tell is use WTSD in conjunction with AG. If your opponent is passive and doesn’t go to showdown often, then he's weak tight.

AE Jones checking his iPhone for Hud stats at the PCA.

If your opponent is aggressive and has a low WTSD, he’s making people fold before showdown very often. If your opponent shows down 35% or more, he's showdown happy. Again, you have to examine WTSD and his aggression stat to get an idea of how he plays.

If his aggression is low he may not be betting with the lead often enough and intuitively lets his opponents showdown much more than they should.

If, however, he is aggressive yet still has a high WTSD, he probably also calls way too often with weak hands on the river. Seeing a number and knowing how often a player goes to showdown is helpful but seeing a number and figuring out why he goes to showdown as often as he does is invaluable.

CB

How often your opponent continuation bets on the flop as the pre-flop raiser.

Most players continuation-bet on the flop between 55% - 88% of the time.

CB% should be looked at in conjunction with the PFR stat. The lower the player’s PFR%, the higher the player’s CB%. That’s because the fewer hands the player is raising pre-flop the stronger the hands. The stronger the hand pre-flop the more often he’ll make strong hands worth betting on the flop.

As a player’s PFR gets higher, he is going to miss the flop more often because he’s raising so many more marginal hands before the flop. If his CB stat remains high then he is going to be c-betting air very often and therefore is exploitable.

2B

This is how often your opponent second barrels as the pre-flop raiser when his flop c-bet is called.

Obviously it should be used in conjunction with the CB stat. If your opponent has both high flop c-bet and turn c-bet stats then he is just going to be barreling his air very often and you should, in turn, call him down lighter. If your opponent has a high flop c-bet and a low turn c-bet then you’ve identified your opponent as a one-and-done player. These guys fire one barrel at the flop and give up when called.

If your opponent is a one-and-done player then floating becomes your best friend.

FC

How often your opponent folds to flop continuation bets.

The higher a player’s FC, the more “fit or fold” he plays. The lower the number, the more often he calls the flop with marginal hands. Used in conjunction with the VPIP stat you can really get a feel for a player’s overall game.

A player that has a large VPIP and a small FC is going to be seeing a lot of flops and a lot of turns. And, chances are, he's a fish you can play as such.

Stats paint a picture of how your opponent plays.

Or, if he's a regular and has a low FC, you can use the pop-up stat and look at his bet-when-checked-to stat. If that is high, then you’ve found an opponent who loves to float.

F2

How often your opponent folds to a second barrel.

Some fish love to call pre-flop and love to call the flop but won’t continue past the turn without a decent hand. You can instantly tell these types of players if they have a low FC stat and a high F2 stat. Obviously you should punish these types of players by firing second barrels more often.

Sample Size

The thing about stats is that they can be extremely misleading without an accurate sample size. Hold’em is a variance packed game and in the short term stats can vary considerably. One of the biggest mistakes you can make is treating a player’s stats as gospel when you have a small sample size - only to find in real life they play in a completely different manner. Hold off from drawing advanced conclusions about how someone plays until you have logged enough hands. What “enough hands” means varies from stat to stat. While 100 hands might be more than enough to draw conclusions from the VPIP and PFR stats, it’s not nearly enough to understand WTSD, barreling frequencies, or three-bet stats. As with everything in poker, the bigger the sample size the better.

A Tool Not a Crutch

Stats are a tool, not a crutch. Too many players rely only on stats in a game. They’ll paint everyone with similar stats with a broad, sweeping brush when in actuality everyone plays differently. You can have three different players all with stats that are very similar. However one player might crush the game for 4BB/100, one might break even and one might beat it for 1BB/100.

If you treat all of those players the exact same, you're making a big mistake. Relying too heavily on stats leaves you playing an ABC, robotic game and will stunt your growth as a poker player.

Stats are just one tool in a successful player’s box. They need to be used in conjunction with observation and non stats-based reads.

Stats only give you an average of how your opponent plays against all different types of opponents. It’s up to you to figure out how he plays against you and you can only do that by paying attention and taking notes.

When you're able to look past the basic information contained in a stat and start to draw real conclusions about your opponent’s play, looking at his stats as a whole and how each relates to the others, you'll start to get past your inner ABC poker robot and you will start to play better poker.

If you can do that - while observing and taking non-stat notes on your opponents - you're going to be a force to be reckoned with.

Tight vs. Loose: One Mo’ Time

Fri, 08 Jan 2010 07:00:00 -0800

It’s also a topic gaining in importance because, as noted in a recent piece: Know Thyself: Post-Flop Play Part VI, the games have become a lot looser and a lot more aggressive.

Today’s column is written with my friend Max Weiss. Max and I are members in the Wednesday Poker Discussion Group. The WPDG is a group of poker junkies who meet regularly in Vegas, usually at some joint with a large room and decent food.

All manner of speakers come by and the room is routinely graced with several “bracelets” and folks whose pictures hang in Binion’s.

After trading emails about the relative importance of tightening up at the table, we realized that we were approaching the issue differently. I mainly play a single table; Max muti-tables. We soon recognized that these two contexts were very different.

A style that is effective in one can easily lose value in the other. In particular, the LAG game that is erupting all over the internet may not be optimal when multi-tabling.

We argue here for tightening up, sometimes almost beyond reason. There are times where it will be to your advantage to give up playing spots with small +EVs for the sake of greater playing efficiency, lower error rates and reduced variance.

A Quick Example

Let’s take two hypothetical players, Victor, who plays 10% of hands and Vickie, who plays 30%. Victor relies on cards, positional play and his tight image; Vicki on her loose image and post-flop abilities. Both are positive EV players with similar bankrolls and life styles.

Victor will miss opportunities, mostly ones with small +EV but will gain by staying out of difficult situations, stealing more and bluffing more successfully.

Vickie will lose money on the bottom 10% (or more) of her hands, no matter how skilled she is but will get paid more on her good hands and be able to make more value bets in certain situations. And it’s not unreasonable to think of them ending up each year with the same sized bankroll.

Ilari "Ziigmund" Sahamies, well known for his super aggressive multi-table play.

Okay, that’s obvious. “What,” you ask, “is the point?”

The point is that we presented this example with the implicit assumption that both are playing live. This relationship between these two canonical players changes with online multi-tabling.

Vickie may now find that those small +EV hands whose gains come at the meta-game level will lose their glow. When you’re playing six tables things get complicated and messy.

These hands require a good bit of thought and thought extracts its metaphoric pound of flesh. It increases stress, wears you down mentally and, above all, it takes time --- and time is the enemy of the multi-tabler.

Victor, who is prone to tightening up under duress, cranks it down further with each new table he opens. He may begin to do things like muck hands that have, theoretically, +EV because of these same psychological factors.

To see this, let’s give them each AJ off UTG in a $1/2 NL game. This hand, for most decent players, has modest +EV and in a live game or a single-table we expect both to play it, albeit differently. But if they’re playing six tables things will likely change.

Vickie will probably play it, maybe even more aggressively. Victor will muck it. Both will gain; both will lose. Both styles can be made to work; both are found in professionals.

But psychology favors Victor’s path. When multi-tabling you want your decisions to be as routine as possible. You’ll experience less pressure and be able to sustain high levels of play longer. The average Victor will able to play solidly longer than the typical Vickie.

By following Victor’s lead, the swings will be damped and, because you are making fewer tough decisions, your error rate will stay low. And, critically, you will rarely suffer one of those catastrophic “cascade failures,” where warning bells from other tables start ringing, tables start timing out and pots get lost by default.

In short, when multi-tabling it’s perfectly ok to:

(a) get pushed out with marginal hands, especially if you don’t have a good read

(b) get bluffed

(d) give up your blinds, even to what looks like a naked steal

Sure, there are plays that can be used in these situations but they do not necessarily have long-term positive EV, not when other tables with equally complex situations beckon, not when pressure is constantly being applied by opponents, not when you’re starting to feel tired.

In fact, their main gain is in the meta-game and in these online situations the role of the meta-game drops.

We appreciate that our point of view here may not sit well with many. That’s okay. We learned long ago that there’s no one way to play this game. Feel free to comment.

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Cash Money: It's a Good Thing

Mon, 21 Dec 2009 08:30:00 -0800

I love the feel of it with its slightly raised surfaces rich with ink, embossed with faces, slogans, monuments to greatness past and imagined. I love its smell; I love the texture of the stacked edges laid side by side.

I love the sound of counting out stacks of hundreds each slipping off the other with a gentle swish. I’m a guy. I’m a gambler. I’m a poker player and a horse junkie.

When I was young, a mere slip of a kid, a pretender in these games I kept my money in my wallet, tucked into the back pocket of my jeans where its bulk made the obligatory ring on the leather surface (hey, you never know….).

Then I learned. Real men don’t use wallets; they fold their bills. No ostentatious money clips, no bejeweled snap-shut baubles; just an elastic band to hold my stash, wrapped twice about the wad thick with importance and shoved into my left front pocket where I could run my finger tips along its edges as I walked.

My elastic-wrapped talisman. It is always with me.

My wife says, as we head into the supermarket, “Do you have money for the groceries?”

“I do,” I smile, for I do. I always do. It is my amulet, my wad, my bullet proof shield and it has, almost always, a couple of thou’ (hey, you never know….).

Everbody likes money.

It is the first thing that gets shifted into the new left hand pocket of my clean jeans for I am naked without it, insecure without it. If I get broke in a big game I go get more for I am fragile and weak and feel less a man without it.

I’ve been this way with money for so long that it has begun to bother me. It felt like a drug. Like I was hooked. On slow, cold evenings I would take out my roll and count it, slowly and lovingly. And I would feel better about life.

Why should this be? The money in my pocket is actually a pittance. It’s nowhere near what’s in my bank, my pension funds, my portfolio, my house, my car. I don’t get out my bank book and rub it or flip through its pages. I’ve never had any desire to pull out my stock holding summary sheets and rub them against my cheeks.

Why the folding stuff? It’s really weird and forty-plus years of studying the human condition has taught me that when these kinds of anomalies pop up, something’s going on. But what?

Then I ran across an article in the journal Psychological Science and I smiled. It turns out that not only is my fascination with wads of hundred dollar bills fairly common, it has a straightforward, though somewhat surprising basis to it.

Money, indeed, acts like and has many of the properties of an addictive drug.

Xinyue Zhou at Sun Yat Sen University in China and Kathleen Vohs at the University of Minnesota and her colleagues (if you’re curious, check out Vohs extensive and fascinating research here) have discovered some rather amazing facts about money, especially paper money.

We know that rejection and physical pain are unpleasant. Zhou and company found that the simple act of handling money reduces both physical pain and the psychological distress of rejection. And it isn’t just the act of handling paper with similar shape and feel. The effects are dependent on it being real bills.

Professional poker player Roy Brindley, in his book Life’s a Gamble, goes on lovingly about the “cash in the pocket” life style. I thought it a bit odd at the time but now it makes sense.

Zhou and colleagues also found that having money in your pocket increases confidence and improves mood. Even more remarkable, these effects have symbolic features. Simply being reminded of money spent or money lost increases psychological distress and imaging oneself having money reduces social anxieties.

The message for poker players? Simple. Carry cash. Carry it in rolls that are easily touched and can serve as reminders of its presence.

If you go bust, go get more cash. Fat rolls are best. If you’re short on hundreds, get a bunch of tens or fives. Fold them over in a wad, wrap an elastic band around them and, when you get the chance, sit down and count them, smell them, let the loose symbolic taste of money penetrate your brain.

It is a drug. It is stimulating the release of endorphins, of dopamine. Your nucleus accumbens is dazzling with activity.

And you will feel more confident. Your game will improve and you will win more money and need a bigger elastic band.

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

How Not to Suck at Poker Examples: ABC Poker

Wed, 16 Dec 2009 14:00:00 -0800

Unless you’re playing against a table of opponents who have watched, studied and remembered every hand you’ve played that session, chances are that getting creative is simply costing you money.

In the article How Not to Suck at Poker: Stop Bluffing from our How Not to Suck at Poker beginner strategy series we went into this concept in detail. Today we’ll give you a few specific examples to show you exactly how you can apply it in action.

Scenario 1:

Here’s a scenario from a live $1/$2 game where being creative on the button ends up being an expensive choice.

Our Hero has been at the table for a couple of hours and has been splashing around, raising a lot, and showing down dubious hands. His image is loose-aggressive and that he’s prone to bluff.

He’s sitting behind a stack of around $500.

On the other end of the table is a nitty lady who likes to call the Hero’s bets and always seems to assume he’s bluffing. She’s raised three of the last four hands and got folds pre-flop or on the flop to all of them.

From early position the lady raises to $15. The player to her left calls and so does the player to the right of the Hero.

The lady says “No one believes me!” before the Hero looks down at A♦ A♠ and calls. The next player, a half-senile old man, calls, and so does one more.

The flop comes 4♥ 6♦ 3♣. The lady bets out $35 and the first caller is the guy on the right of the Hero. The hero again just calls, as does the old man.

The turn comes 9♠.

The lady checks as does the guy on the right of the Hero. The Hero bets $130. The old man thinks about it, says a bunch of random crazy old man things, and then calls for his last $76.

The lady insta-calls and the guy on the right of the Hero folds.

The river comes 5♣.

The lady checks. The Hero checks behind. The guy on the left of the hero yells “send it all!” and shows 7♠ 3♠ for the straight.

Unfortunately, Paola Martin is not the lady from my story.

Analysis:

As you can see, about everything that could have gone wrong in that hand did. The lady, it turns out, held K♠ K♣ and the guy on Hero’s right held Q♥ Q♦.

The Hero lost about $100 on the hand simply because he didn’t play ABC poker – both pre-flop and post-flop. If the Hero had three bet pre-flop, the lady (who always believes he’s bluffing and would never fold KK pre-flop) would have four-bet.

Chances are the queens would have folded. But after the Hero ships it all in, the lady would call. So instead of losing $100, the Hero would have (likely) shipped a $1,000 pot.

Scenario 2:

You’re sitting on a $.50/$1 online full ring game, you have $120 in your stack and have been playing regular TAG poker. You’re sitting on the button and get dealt 8♥ 8♠.

A player with a $245 stack raises to $4 from middle position. You call on the button and head to the flop heads up.

The flop comes 6♥ 8♣ 9♥, you flopped middle set and are sure that you’re ahead of your opponent. He’s not the type of player to have raised with anything that could have flopped a straight.

Your opponent bets $7, you just call.

The turn comes Q♠

Your opponent bets $18, again you just call.

The river comes 10♥

Your opponent checks and you check behind. Your opponent turns over 8♠ 9♠ for two pair. You win the $58 pot with your set.

Analysis:

You won the pot, but you lost as much as $182 because you tried to get fancy and trap. You also left yourself wide open to get rocked by a straight or flush.

Your opponent flopped a monster hand. Most likely he was making the same assumptions you were, that it was highly unlikely you could have flopped the straight. He puts you on an overpair, or a flush draw. Either way, chances are he’s not getting away from top two cheaply.

By pumping the flop (which ABC poker would dictate), you will create a much larger pot, and help eliminate the possibility of your opponent drawing out on you (in case he does have the flush draw).

By slow-playing your hand, you kept the pot small in a scenario where you had heaps of equity, and let the board get too dangerous to value bet.

Getting fancy cost you a lot of money.

Only at a table like this should you consider some XYZ poker.

Conclusion:

Yes. Poker is not results based – it’s decision-based. Both examples show you how getting fancy and playing your hand incorrectly for the situation can end up costing you money.

The fact the old man hit a gutshot in the first example is irrelevant. Even if the river hadn’t given him the straight, the Hero still would have made less money than if had played it by the book.

If you have aces pre-flop and are up against an opponent who you think holds a big hand and who is more than willing to stack off to you, you’re making a mistake by doing anything but raising.

Players still developing their game often start to have thoughts like “If I re-raise here they’ll know for sure I have aces,” when in reality your three-bet could mean anything your opponent wants it to mean.

When playing low-to-medium stakes your opponents will make plenty of mistakes and will typically have no idea what you’re doing at any time.

Especially when you’re in an action pot, stick to the ABCs and your long-run results will thank you.

The How Not to Suck at Poker series:

In Defense of Limit Poker

Mon, 07 Dec 2009 10:00:00 -0800

I’ve got a point to make here and I happen to think it’s a good one. There are some damn good reasons for shifting over to Limit poker. Here’s a few:

First, because so many people are playing No-Limit and Pot-Limit poker, a lot of them have gotten good. The games are tough and are getting tougher as I write.

More and more young players with a deadly serious approach are pouring in. They are getting good faster than you can imagine. If you’re a recreational player, that “discretionary income” you use to bankroll your game isn’t going as far as it did just a year or so ago and its life expectancy is getting shorter by the day.

Why? Because the fish are going broke.

As Ingo Fiedler and Jan-Philipp Rock at the University of Hamburg's Institute of Law and Economics reported in one of the most careful analyses of online poker, the vast majority of Internet players buy in, play fewer than 100 hands, go broke and never log in again.

The obvious message? The game isn’t a cakewalk and there aren’t many easy games out there these days.

Jennifer Harman at the WSOP

Second, NL and PL play has become significantly more aggressive and aggression raises variance. Increasing variance isn’t just a matter of withstanding cash fluctuations; it’s managing the psychological elements that accompany the swings.

High variance is the mother of tilt. Tilt is the enemy of us all. I see more tilt these days than I did just a few months back. Hell, I tilt more these days.

Third, Limit poker is more tightly built around reasonably well-known heuristics.

Solid, tight positional play is a far more effective strategy at Limit than at No-Limit, for the reasons just acknowledged. It is easier to learn and requires fewer hours of experience to become a decent winning player at modest stakes.

By “modest” levels I’m including limits from $4/$8 up through $15/$30 - although admittedly it is difficult to consistently beat the rake at $4/$8 and when you get to $15/$30 and above the game can be tough.

I usually start with a dime on the felt in both a $5/$10 No-Limit game and a $20/$40 Limit game. I’m occasionally picking green felt out from between my teeth in the former but rarely in the latter.

For those ready to switch to Limit play, do some reading. Good places to start are Lou Krieger’s Hold ‘em Excellence and More Hold ‘em Excellence. If you want solid insights into the game played a tad more aggressively, see Jennifer Harman’s chapter in Doyle Brunson’s Super System 2: A Course in Power Poker.

For Omaha/8 I recommend Mark Tenner and Lou Krieger’s Omaha/8 and Bobby Baldwin’s chapter in Super System 2 (full disclosure here; Lou and I wrote a book together and we are friends. But even if I hated his guts, I’d still recommend these books.)

Fourth, if you get interested in Limit play you will suddenly discover a lot of other poker games that are only played with fixed stakes. In recent months I’ve become a big fan of Stud, Stud/8 and Razz. It all began when I started playing in H.O.R.S.E. tournaments and discovered that most of my opponents do not know how to play the Stud games.

Jeffrey Lisandro, the Stud king.

In fact, the discrepancy in skill here is so great that I’ve hit on a workable strategy, which I offer to you free of charge. During the Hold ‘em and Omaha/8 rounds, only play premium starting hands and never draw to anything but the nuts (always good advice in Omaha/8 where even the nuts can get you quartered).

Try to break even here and build your stacks on the Stud rounds. To get you started on your education, try:

Stud: Konstantin Othmer’s Seven Card Stud - that’s right, “Othmer.” You almost certainly never heard of him, which is good because your opponents won’t have either. It’s the best book on Stud I’ve seen.

Stud/8: Todd Brunson’s chapter in his Daddy’s Super System 2.

Razz: The chapter in David Sklansky’s Sklansky on Poker and Linda Johnson’s chapter in Championship Stud co-authored with Max Stern and Tom McEvoy.

I’ve had so much fun in these tournaments that I’m now putting in more hours playing cash Stud games. Not only has it been good for the bankroll, it has been good psychologically.

I feel more in control in these games. I enjoy the newer strategic plays that I am learning and, best of all, I am beginning to grasp how much more there is to poker. To be a complete player you do need to master the game in all its varied forms and digging into the nuances of the Stud games is a good way to start.

Everyone likes to say that Phil Ivey is the best player alive. Of his 7 WSOP bracelets, exactly none of them are NLHE.

Interesting, yes?

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Creating your Own Luck at the Poker Table

Tue, 01 Dec 2009 16:00:00 -0800

All poker players are familiar with the idea of a table image. But it’s your micro image that actually affects how your opponents play against you.

If you’ve spent some time reading articles on this site, you might remember an article by Dan Skolovy on Exploiting your Table Image.

If you haven’t read it, take a second to read it first as it’s crucial to understand the basics of table image before trying to grasp micro image.

Your Table Image

How you look, what you wear, how you talk, what you say, what you don’t say - and most importantly how you play - will all affect your general table image. The more time someone spends playing with you the more detailed your table image will become for that person.

In general, your opponents will use your image to file you into a broad category of poker players. Are you a fish? A regular? Strong; weak; a rock? Totally wild?

Your general table image will include some noted specifics about how you play. And if you don’t bleed any huge tells, these will be few and often forgotten.

But it’s these basic elements of table image that become the foundation of your micro image.

The Micro Image

Your micro image has three elements:

Sometimes luck finds you anyways.

Your table image - all micro images have to fit into your perceived table image Your history at the table How you’ve played the previous few relevant hands.

While your table image will rarely change (you’re wearing the same clothes and talking the same way now as you were an hour ago), your micro image is always dynamic. It’s also specific to how you’re actually playing your current hands.

This is always what your opponent uses when judging how best to play against you. Your table image will affect how your opponents plan to play against you over the session, but your micro image will affect how your opponents play against you in the current hand.

Creating your own luck at the poker table then comes from knowing how to exploit that micro image.

Step 1 in Creating your Own Luck

Before you can exploit your micro image you need to know what your opponents assume about your game and how that affects the way they play against you.

Look in the mirror and be honest with what you see. Do you look like someone who is tight with money or someone who doesn’t care about it? Do you look reserved or outgoing? What about how you play? Do you splash around or are you a rock?

If you can, talk to a good honest friend who can tell you exactly what your image is at the table. The more you know about how others perceive you the better you can exploit your micro image.

Step 2

Step 2 is the easiest. All you have to do is play cards. Feel out your table, play your standard opening game and observe your opponents.

Take note of whose paying attention and who thinks he can pull one over on you. It’s during this opening phase your opponents decide on your general table image.

Since micro image is an offshoot of general table image, you have to spend enough time at the table for players to fully form a picture of your image. Once that’s happened, move on to step 3.

Step 3

Hellmuth's table image is ideal for micro image exploitation.

Despite the title of this article, it’s impossible to actually create luck. What you’re going to do is create the opportunity for luck, then take advantage when things fall into place.

It’s your job to create the opportunity for good luck as frequently as possible. You’re going to use your micro image to set up these situations and count on luck to finish the job.

If you have the table image of a strong, aggressive player, players will be cautious. Your general image then does not lend well to making money - so you have to use your micro image in its place.

An Example:

Say you make a button raise with a marginal hand such as 8♣ 9♣. You’re raising a real hand but it’s not a premium.

This isn’t a reckless - or even a really loose play - but it’s something a rock will never do. Either way, you bet the flop and take down the pot.

The next hand you’re dealt A♥ Q♣. As you’re in the cut-off you raise again, this time getting two callers. The flop comes 7♥ Q♠ 4♦. Your opponents check to you and one player calls your three-quarter pot-sized bet.

The turn brings the 10♣ and your opponent checks. Since you almost certainly have the best hand, you bet again and get a fold from your opponent.

The next hand you’re dealt A♥ A♦. You open for a raise and everyone folds to you.

At this point, you’ve only raised and bet because you’ve had strong hands. You haven’t done anything reckless or absurd. But to your opponents (who haven’t seen any of your cards), you’ve raised and bullied three hands straight.

Your current micro image is you’re a table bully or are simply bored and raising everything. At this point, your opponents will want to take a stand and put a stop to your aggression.

The next hand you’re lucky enough to be dealt A♥ K♣. After a few limps you make your standard raise and actions folds around to the button. He slowly makes a raise 3x your bet.

At this point, you’re now poised to take advantage of your micro image.

Creating your own luck: like taking candy from a baby.

Yes, it’s possible your opponent fell into AA or KK here. But chances are he’s playing back at your image rather than playing the strength of his own cards.

He thinks you’re bullying, so the best thing you can do is nurture that belief. You instantly ship all in when action is folded around to you. Your all-in is for the rest of his stack - about 7x the size of his 3-bet.

If we’re correct, and he made his raise simply on the notion we’re being a bully, he can have any two cards here. Chances are he has a weak ace or a small pair and is raising thinking he has a slight edge on your random two cards.

Your overbet here is also way too strong and reinforces the idea you’re actually weak and being a bully.

End result: You get a call and play a 300bb pot with A♥ K♣ against his A♦ 9♥, all-in pre-flop.

Key Takeaways

As you can see from the example, exploiting your micro image requires the perfect set up. This will seem as if you’re a complete luck sack to your opponents.

But you should be constantly monitoring your micro image and making plays that allow this sort of situation to materialize. You spend all night working on exploiting your micro image and then you hope the cards come through for you.

Yes, you got lucky. But you would never have had the opportunity to get lucky if you hadn’t created the situation leading up to it.

Your goal is to repeat Step 3 as many times as you can. The more you play and the more often you set up a situation that allows you to be lucky, the luckier of a player you will become.

Remember: that player would never have put it all in with A♦ 9♥ against you on his own - it was the situation you created that allowed that to happen.

All it takes is attention to detail, thoughtful plays and the eye to take full advantage of the situation when luck does show up. Rather than just thinking about the hand in progress, think about how your actions in this hand could benefit you in a later hand.

Once you’re operating with this mindset, you’ll bring your game to a whole new level.

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Playing Poker for a Living

Sat, 01 Dec 2007 00:00:00 -0800

Before deciding to choose this path, let me warn you of the disadvantages first. Poker has many benefits, but it also has many negative consequences that come with playing long hours.

This guide will allow you to make the right decision by learning from someone who actually plays for a living.

Poker for a Living

The first thing you need to play any game for a living is patience. Playing every day, all day, can get extremely tiring.

Staring at a computer screen for hours on end can literally drive you insane. In addition, your fortunes online are prone to wild swings. You will occasionally sit down at a table and not get any cards for hours.

Be prepared to take the worst beats of your life along with huge runs that will make your bankroll soar.

Playing for a living requires extreme mental discipline and a steady game plan. It's a good idea to record how many hours you play each day and what your total profit for the day is.

Do this for a month or two before you make the switch to becoming a full-time player. This will allow you to analyze your play and find out how much you make on average.

Drawbacks of Playing Poker for a Living

1. No set income: Some months you'll actually experience a loss in total earnings. You must be able to cope with this and still have the confidence you need to win. You'll encounter some horrible runs along the way so be prepared.

2. Exhaustion: You'll constantly be tired if you're playing all day. If you're playing really high limits, you may not have to play all day to make a living. The fact is that most of us will need to grind it out all day to pay rent and bills and buy food.

3. Reduced family time: Since you must make your money playing poker, you'll tend to spend less time with your family. When a good poker player encounters a bad run, he or she will grind it out until they prevail.

This may call for some extremely long hours of play. Be prepared to play poker at any time. On losing months you'll need to spend even more time on the computer or at the casino.

Advantages of Playing Poker for a Living

There are many advantages that help balance out playing poker for a living. I love that you get to choose your own hours to work on any day you wish.

You can take off as many days as you want and never be hassled to wake up at 8 a.m. - or, god forbid, earlier. You'll also be playing one of the most intriguing games in the world for money. Who could ask for more? It's a great lifestyle if you're a winning player.

The fact is, most people can't handle the swings that are unavoidable in full-time play. Every time you sit at the table you must change your personality and play with ice water in your veins.

When you take a bad beat, you can't let it affect you. You must deal with the swings on a regular basis. You must also be a dedicated soul who will play even when the cards aren't going your way. You must be a very disciplined and winning poker player to play for a living.

I hope this article hasn't discouraged you if you have dreams of playing professionally. If you believe you can do it, you'll buy every book and read everything you can get your hands on to become a winning player.

See you at the tables.

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Know Thyself: Post-Flop Play Part VI

Wed, 25 Nov 2009 22:44:00 -0800

In the early years when few played NLH, the conventional wisdom was only to see a flop with a premium hand.

David Sklansky and Mason Malmuth became the most respected teachers in the game because they understood this principle first and developed it to a higher degree than anyone else.

Obviously, this is no longer the case. Players now open with a far wider range of hands than they used to. They will raise and call raises with hands that your "standard" poker text-books tell you should be mucked.

Three-bets, even four-bets, have become routine and often made with a wide range of holdings.

The more successful of the modern players know and understand post-flop play deeply and as long as they sense that they have an edge after the cards hit the board, they will want to see flops.

And it isn't just the world-class pros. The new generations of Internet players are rapidly developing these skills. They are sitting down in $1-$2 and $2-$5 NL games and they can make you squirm in your seat.

Even if you know the post-flop strategic gambits we've covered in previous columns, employing them isn't easy.

Many call for more aggression; others require taking more risks and establishing looser calling criteria. All increase variance, a factor that will impact you on two interlocking psychological planes: your emotional well-being and your bankroll.

Playing with your emotions.

Emotions: Emotional states have a far greater impact on the "bottom line" than most players realize. High levels of emotional arousal are, for most of us, not good.

Arousal is a stressor; stressors elevate blood pressure, cause hormonal and neurotransmitter imbalances, compromise decision making and make us feel, in a word, shitty.

When you first begin to use some of the ploys we've discussed you're likely to find them less than satisfactory. They aren't going to work every time (duh!) and when they don't they're going to cost you. Mistakes become expensive.

Trying to fight what you suspect is a c-bet with a check-raise is going to cost you a chunk of change if your opponent hit the flop.

If this possibility concerns you, the best approach is to avoid ploys that call for excessive aggression. This will help keep variance down and your emotions in check.

Begin with ones that reduce the post-flop difficulties rather than those that increase them and introduce the others only gradually. This approach will help at first, but it has an acknowledged down side: opponents will suss you out and you won't get much action when you have a hand.

Over time you should find yourself getting better at handling the larger swings. If not, there's usually a limit table waiting for you.

Bankroll: You have to be sufficiently 'rolled to go down this road. Even after you've dealt with the emotional elements you still have to deal with the financial. Playing more hands and playing them more aggressively means you need a bigger base or you're liable to 'get broke.'

Bankroll issues have been discussed to death although, alas, not always very insightfully. As Kristin (one of the more insight folks in our poker discussion group) notes, there are "playing 'rolls" and there are "life 'rolls."

The Wall Mart of poker players.

For a pro, these are the same --- like the asset base of the green grocer on the corner. If you lose it, you're out of business or trying to raise another stake.

But for most of us they are different. Our bankroll is a much squishier thing because our game is actually funded from outside.

For the typical, online recreational player it goes like this: You buy in for XX dollars. That's your playing 'roll. If you lose it, you click on the deposit button and --- viola, you have a new 'roll. Live play is similar but the button is on the ATM.

How much you buy in for, how much the new stake is, how much you can lose without hurting yourself, whether to move up if you start accumulating cash in your account, when to pull out the profits --- these and a host of other questions are not ones that I, or anyone else, can answer.

Only you can answer them and you can only do so for yourself.

My counsel? I fall back on that old, hackneyed line: "Know thyself." Know the level of risk you can deal with psychologically, understand what your comfort level is, filter these issues through basic parameters like your age, your other responsibilities, your non-poker income.

Bankroll management is tricky and it is personal. And I am rarely happy when I read the advice others offer.

So, that's it from this end. I appreciate that a lot of the strategy covered was more relevant to cash games than tournaments. I also recognize that most of it dealt with live play rather than online.

It also focused primarily on Hold 'em. Space was limited and, I suspect, so is your patience.

What Does He Think I Have? Post-Flop Play Part V The Sunk-Cost Effect: Post-Flop Play Part IV The Naked Raise Plus: Post-Flop Play Part III This One is Tricky: More on Post-Flop Play The Simple Psychology of Post-Flop Play

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

The Trick to Table Selection

Sat, 21 Nov 2009 00:28:21 -0800

You have to exercise game selection if you want those soft, 2006-style tables. In fact, game selection may be the single most important skill a poker player can have.

In poker you don't have to be the best player at the table to be a big winner. You just have to be better than the majority of your competition.

This is why game selection is so important.

An average player that practices excellent game selection, only plays in games he's a big favorite in, and leaves whenever the table gets bad is going to be significantly more profitable than a very good player that exercises zero game selection.

What to Look For:

When you first fire up your poker client, look at the lobby. The best way to find good tables is to sort by viewed-flop percentage.

Generally, more players seeing the flop means more multi-way pots. This means more limping, which almost always means more fish.

Pro Tip: Try and keep aggro players to your right.

What percentage makes for a good table is debatable and varies from site to site and from limit to limit. But a higher number usually means a better table.

Of course viewed-flop percentage can't just be used on its own. Many tables have an artificially high viewed-flop percentage because they've recently been playing shorthanded.

A way you can tell if the table has been playing short is to look at the hands per hour. Generally the more hands per hour, the more chance the table has only just recently filled up.

A good six-handed game should rarely be getting more than 100 hands per hour. If you see a table with a 50% viewed-flop percentage and 150 hands per hour, you can bet the table only recently filled up and there's no guarantee it's any good.

Color-code Your Fish

On sites like Full Tilt, you also have the option to add color-coded notes.

A great practice to get into is to tag the fish you find a certain color. That way when you look at the lobby and see the player names at the tables you can instantly recognize the tables with fish on them.

But don't just stop at color coding the fish. Color code the regulars you fear, bad regulars you don't and note short stackers as well.

When you've finally put in a good sample size of hands you can almost instantly recognize good tables and bad tables just by looking in the lobby.

Color code your fish if possible and you'll be able to see them from the lobby.

Start Your Own Tables

An almost surefire way to get some good tables is to start the games yourself. Go to an empty table and just sit.

Often you'll very quickly be joined by short-stacked fish. More players will then be drawn by that fish and a game will start.

Or you can hop in with another regular sitting alone looking to start a game. If you're even semi-competent at playing heads-up it's a very effective way of starting games.

Usually you won't have to wait more than a few hands before a fish jumps in.

When two regulars start a game, the third player to join is almost always a fish as no regular in the world wants to play in a game with two other regulars.

More Tricks for Spotting Fish

Another great trick for spotting fish from the lobby is to look for players that don't play with a full stack.

Not short stackers necessarily though, as there are plenty of short stackers that aren't fish. But most regulars maximize their edge by having the most allowable on the table at one time.

A regular wants to have a full stack on the table at all times so when he makes that big hand he can win his opponent's whole stack.

For that reason, he always has auto top up on. If he loses a 20bb pot, the software automatically tops his stack up to 100bb and he always has the maximum on the table.

A fish doesn't. A fish plays with whatever he feels like. If he buys in for 100bbs and loses a pot - or even just pays his blinds - he doesn't top back up.

In other words, he's more than happy playing with less than 100bbs because he doesn't have an edge to maximize. He's just playing.

When you see players with 88bb or 94bb at the table, these are almost always fish with nearly full stacks. And fish with money means a good table.

If you want a Phil Ivey-like win rate and you're not Phil Ivey, spend some time table selecting.

It Just Takes a Little More Effort

Really, it just takes a little more effort.

When you're starting your session, look at the viewed-flop percentages. Look at the players from the lobby - do you recognize their names? Are there fish playing?

If so, hop right in.

So many players spend all their time studying the game and debating very close decisions, yet jump into games with no thought put in to whether they're good or not.

With just a few seconds more effort, though, you can add untold points to your win rate.

A Final Tip:

Part of playing only good tables also means recognizing when those tables are no longer good.

It doesn't matter that you're stuck two buy-ins at that table. If the fish leaves and you're left with five other regulars, continuing to play at that table is a giant mistake.

Constantly re-analyze your tables. Close the ones that are no good and find better ones.

People love to lament that the games are tougher, but there is always a good game going. You just have to put more effort in to finding it.

The players that put the effort in are going to be the most profitable.

Looking at the Hand As a Whole When to Call the Flop with Less Than Top Pair Firing the second barrel The C-bet for Beginners

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Poker Hand Ranking

Sun, 20 Apr 2008 09:00:00 -0700

Royal Flush

A straight from a ten to an ace with all five cards of the same suit. In poker all suits are ranked equally.

Straight Flush

Any straight with all five cards of the same suit.

Four of a Kind

Any four cards of the same rank. If two players share the same Four of a Kind (on the board), the bigger fifth card (the "kicker") decides who wins the pot.

Full House

Any three cards of the same rank together with any two cards of the same rank. Our example shows "Aces full of Kings" and it is a bigger full house than "Kings full of Aces."

Flush

Any five cards of the same suit (not consecutive). The highest card of the five determines the rank of the flush. Our example shows an Ace-high flush, which is the highest possible.

Straight

Any five consecutive cards of different suits. Aces can count as either a high or a low card. Our example shows a five-high straight, which is the lowest possible straight.

Three of a Kind

Any three cards of the same rank. Our example shows three-of-a-kind Aces, with a King and a Queen as side cards - the best possible three of a kind.

Two Pair

Any two cards of the same rank together with another two cards of the same rank. Our example shows the best possible two-pair, Aces and Kings. The highest pair of the two determines the rank of the two-pair.

One Pair

Any two cards of the same rank. Our example shows the best possible one-pair hand.

High Card

Any hand not in the above-mentioned hands. Our example shows the best possible high-card hand.

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Why You Call When You Told Yourself to Fold

Tue, 10 Nov 2009 14:12:00 -0800

He's just pushed a stack of greenies at you on the river. You missed your draw; you've got middle pair and, basically, can only beat a bluff.

So you sit there looking at your cards, at the board, at your opponent.

You've got a good read on the situation and know precisely what you should do with your hand. In fact, this is exactly the situation you've been warning yourself about over and over again in recent weeks.

Do NOT make marginal calls in situations like this one because they have long-term negative EV (indeed, very negative).

Yet you feel an odd twinge deep below the surface of your mind. You know that you should fold. You plan to fold.

The cards are almost in the muck, you're going to slip quietly away when you see an ethereal hand, one that looks a lot like yours, though acting like it belongs to someone else, grab a bunch of chips and you hear a voice that has a fretfully familiar tone to it and seems to be coming from your mouth say, "I call."

This extremely muscular hand looks like mine, but I did not say to reach for the chips.

And, of course, he wasn't bluffing and you've just shed another buy-in on a truly idiotic move that felt like it was made by some demon inside you, for you would never have been so stupid.

From my psychologist/poker junkie perspective, the really interesting part of this tale is not that you just did something moronic but that you did exactly the thing you've been trying to banish from your game.

If the word "irony" comes to mind now, it should. If the name Daniel Wegner comes to mind, I'll be really surprised.

Dan is a psychologist at Harvard. He's an old friend and even though he's not a poker player, I'd like to tell you a bit about how his research applies to our game and how, if we can work this out carefully, his insights can help reduce the number of silly and financially damaging actions we take.

Wegner studies irony. He's been fascinated all his life with those situations where we tell ourselves that we should do X and avoid Y like the plague then, bingo, we end up Y'ing.

Dan's research is slowly yielding an understanding of why these situations arise and why we keep doing the very wrongest things.

Here's his analysis, in simplest terms:

When we consciously suppress the thoughts about the thing we do NOT want to do, we don't actually banish them from our minds.

Loves him some poker irony.

They take on a life below the surface and sit there, unnoticed, in what is technically known as "implicit memory" (if you want to call this your "subconscious" that's okay).

It takes a certain measure of mental effort to keep these unwanted thoughts in their mental jail.

If I ask you to NOT think about white bears or NOT to spill any red wine as you carry your glass across the carpet or NOT to think about calling a pot-sized bet from the tightest player at the table, two things will happen.

First, you WILL think about those things. Second, you will manage, most of the time, to suppress that thought ... for the moment.

But what Dan's research has shown is that this suppression doesn't always hold.

When it does, fine. You won't waste time imaging white bears on (vanishing) ice floes, dumping a glass of Merlot on someone's beige wall-to-wall or donating a stack of greenies to the rock in seat 8.

But what Dan has also found is that when stress levels go up, when pressure is put on us, or we are distracted, these unwanted thoughts and actions become surprisingly likely to occur.

Ask someone NOT to use a particular word in conversation and, if they get distracted or stressed they are far more likely to blurt that word out than if the initial request was never made.

If you sit there and think something like "calling pot-sized bets on dangerous boards is something I will simply not do anymore" you run the risk of making it more likely that you will do the very thing you've counseled yourself against, if you're under stress or distracted or are put under heavy mental load.

We're all familiar with settings that are likely to produce these unhappy ironic outcomes.

We're all familiar with settings that are likely to produce these unhappy ironic outcomes. You've been losing. You're on tilt because you've been bluffed twice and both times the bozos showed you.

You're in the cash game because you bubbled the MTT. An old girlfriend just walked in the room hanging on the arm of some idiot with a shaved head and his shirt unbuttoned down to his belly button.

You just realized you forgot to pick up your wife's prescription ... whatever. All invite bouts of terminal irony.

Is there a cure for this affliction? Not really. Just take your time when stressed. Think through the situation.

And, of course, practice helps. Experienced players usually handle stress better and are able to suppress thoughts that might leap up and take control of your hands or your vocal cords.

Poker isn't an easy game. But you can make it less painful if you work on combating this ironic tendency - the one that Edgar Allan Poe called the "imp of the perverse."

More psychology articles from Arthur S. Reber:

What Does He Think I Have: Post-Flop Play Part V Why You're Afraid of Value-Betting the River Grit and the Grind: How Great Players Get Great F U: Why Swearing in Poker is Good For You

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Looking at the Hand as a Whole

Sat, 31 Oct 2009 18:37:00 -0700

In reality, each and every play you make affects the entire course of the hand.

The problem with taking each decision as it comes is that you don't take into account the potential cause and effect of each play - you just act, and then are surprised when you're left with a tough decision.

Good players understand that each decision affects the final outcome of the hand.

They know that what they do before the flop and on the flop is going to dictate what happens on the turn and river. And they plan ahead for probable outcomes.

Taking each decision as it comes

An example:

$1/$2 six-max game, effective stacks $200. A fishy player under the gun raises to $6 and you call on the button with T♣ T♠. Everyone else folds and you take a flop heads-up of T♥ 4♠ 3♥.

Your opponent bets $8 and you raise to $16. He calls. The turn is the 4♥. He checks, and you check behind to slow play.

The river comes 2♣. He checks. You bet $35. He calls and shows A♥ J♥. Your full house beats his flush and you win a $117 pot.

Each play you make is not separate. They are all connected.

Because you took each decision as it came, you lost out on a lot of money. If, instead, you had a plan for the hand, you would have played the entire hand differently.

When you flop big, your goal is to win your opponent's stack. So plan for that and make it a possibility.

If you had a plan

$1/$2 six-max game, effective stacks $200. A fishy player under the gun raises to $6 and you call on the button with T♣ T♠.

Everyone else folds and you take a flop heads-up of T♥ 4♠ 3♥. Your opponent bets $8 and you raise to $34. He calls.

The turn is the 4♥. He checks and you bet $65. He calls

The river comes 2♣. He checks and you bet your remaining $95. He calls and shows A♥ J♥.

You still win, but this time because you thought about the entire hand and had a plan to build the pot, you win his entire stack instead of just a small portion.

A few changes in strategy and you win almost four times as much.

One more set of examples:

Taking each decision as it comes

$1/$2 six-max game, effective stacks $500. It's folded to an aggressive regular on the button who raises to $7. You feel you're better than his raising range so you three-bet to $30 with the J♥ J♣. He calls.

The flop comes T♥ 5♠ 6♣. You c-bet $40 and he calls. The turn comes 4♣.You bet $90 and he calls.

The river comes 2♥. You bet $140 and he shoves for $310.

You're now in a miserable spot and talk yourself into calling. He tables 7♥ 8♥ and wins the $1,000 pot with a straight.

You didn't think about the hand as whole. You just took each decision as it came and you ended up getting into a tough spot and losing a ton of money.

If you had a plan

$1/$2 six-max game, effective stacks $500. It's folded to an aggressive regular on the button who raises to $7.

Plan your hand and profit.

You realize that one pair plays poorly deep and you will either win a small pot or lose a big one. So you elect to just call and play pot control with the J♥ J♣.

The flop comes T♥ 5♠ 6♣. You check. He fires $10 and for the same reasons you called pre-flop you just call again on the flop.

The turn comes 4♣. You check and he bets $22. You once again just call. The river comes 2♥. You check. He bets $55.

You know he's capable of value-betting worse, and three-barreling air to try and get you to fold a hand like 8-8, so you call.

He tables 7♥ 8♥ and still wins with his straight. But this time you lose just $95 rather than $500 (or even $300 if you fold the river in the other example).

You looked at the entire hand as a whole and had a plan.

You didn't needlessly build a giant pot because you know one pair doesn't play well deep - and that your opponent could put you in an extremely difficult spot in a big pot.

You ended up losing, but you lost the absolute minimum because you weren't just mindlessly making a decision every time the action was on you.

Re-cap

Each time the action is on you, look at the hand as a whole and realize the possible ramifications of each potential decision.

Each decision changes the course of rest of the hand, and if you don't realize the ramifications of each possibility, you're going to be left in difficult spots on the later streets.

Know your goal for the hand and plan your play around that goal. It's a little more work, but the potential effects on your win rate will be very real.

When to Call the Flop with Less Than Top Pair Firing the second barrel The C-bet for Beginners When not to continuation bet Fixing your redline: Making better c-bets

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

When to Call the Flop with Less Than Top Pair

Tue, 14 Feb 2012 08:58:00 -0800

Playing with less than top pair can be tricky when you don't have the lead.

You're playing a guessing game and gambling that your opponent doesn't have you beat.

But that guessing game can be made easier by paying attention to three critical factors.

1) Your Opponent

You have to study your opponent. Look at how often he continuation-bets on the flop.

Look at how often he checks the flop and on what kinds of boards. Look at how often he double barrels the turn.

Pay attention to how often he plays pot control with showdown-value hands.

Always suss out your opponent.

If he always checks back any non-top-pair hands, only bets top pair and bluffs on a J♥ 7♠ 3♣ board, you know when he's betting he either has top pair or a bluff.

If that same opponent seldom double barrels the turn, you'll also know that when he bets that turn again he has top pair or better.

A general rule is that you should be less inclined to call with a weak-ish second-pair-type hand if your opponent is likely to keep the heat up on the turn and river.

2) Board Texture

One of the most important factors when deciding to peel the turn with a second-pair-type hand is the board texture.

There are just some boards that aren't as likely to have hit your opponent.

For example, 8♠ 7♠ is more likely to be good on a J♥ 8♦ 4♠ board than it is on a K♥ 2♣ 7♣ board. Thus you should be more inclined to call.

Get to know your opponent's pre-flop raising range and every time you're facing a bet gauge how likely it is to have hit his range.

3) Outs and Equity

As with anything in Texas Hold'em you should be more inclined to call if you have additional outs.

Outs add equity to your hand.

You're hoping your opponent will shut down when you call, but you want to have equity in case he chooses to continue.

An example:

You're playing $1/$2 online six-max, effective stacks $200.

You're in the big blind and a decent regular raises to $6. The flop comes Q♥ 6♠ 3♠. You check and your opponent bets $10.

Which hand would you rather call with: 8♦ 8♣ or 6♥ 7♥?

Though the pair of eights is the "better" hand in absolute strength, 6♥ 7♥ is the better hand to peel with. The reason is the 6♥ 7♥ has more "Plan B" potential.

When you're beat with the pair of eights you have two outs to improve - the two remaining eights. When you're beat with the 6♥ 7♥, you instantly have more outs.

There are two sixes as well as the three remaining sevens. That's five outs right there.

You also have the backdoor flush and straight draws, meaning there's a ton of cards that can come and improve your hand on the turn.

Don't just call and give up on the turn.

So the "better" hand to call with is the 6♥ 7♥ - despite the fact it's worse in absolute value than the 8♦ 8♣.

Remember:

There's a lot of value in playing hands worse than top pair - especially against opponents that c-bet too often.

Get to know how your opponents play certain hands and pay attention to their barreling frequencies.

Don't just call and give up on the turn every single time.

Pay attention to how the board runs out and weigh that with how likely they are to double or triple barrel.

Folding every hand that isn't top pair is essentially leaving money on the table. But if you start calling every hand without thinking, you'll burn even more money.

Just think about how your hand stacks up vs. your opponent's range and play poker.

And remember that a potential Plan B really adds equity to your hand.

Firing the second barrel The C-bet for Beginners When not to continuation bet Fixing your redline: Making better c-bets

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

What Does He Think I Have: Post-Flop Play Part V

Mon, 19 Oct 2009 10:29:47 -0700

Not quite sure why but maybe 'cause I thumped some fish last night and I'm stoked. So, let's begin with the obvious:

Grow steel cojones. In virtually every competitive enterprise aggression carries benefits.

One of my favorite lines comes from the inestimable Mike Caro, "aggression is rarely wrong in poker, and when it is, it isn't wrong by much."

But there is more to the "steel cojones" bit than just naked aggression. Virtually every social scientist can tell you that mindless attack ultimately succumbs to tactical counter thrusts.

Aggression gains its advantage, not so much as a device for taking down individual pots, but as part of the meta-game. If you become known as an aggressive player you will instill two emotive states in your opponents: fear and confusion.

For example, every once in a while you're going to have to fire not just one, not just two but three bullets. Or play like you flopped a set when you've got air.

Dwan: Master of fear and confusion.

Sometimes this will work, sometimes not.

Your variance will go up. If you can live with it, fine, because when used appropriately your bottom line will improve.

Aggression is situational: This is a corollary to the above. There are more than a few circumstances where your cards are essentially irrelevant. This may seem a bit extreme, but it often isn't.

A nit limps UTG and a weak, timid player calls from middle position. A raise is obligatory here. Your hand is irrelevant, only the size of the raise is important, and that decision will be based on your position and sense of the situation.

In short, focus and control your aggression. Mindless belligerence isn't effective at a poker table. Mindful and unpredictable aggression is best.

Attack good players: Yup, that's what I said, attack solid players more often than weak ones.

Standard advice is go after the fish, abuse the fearful, trap the maniacal, intimidate the timid. There's nothing wrong with this advice but, for the most part, you do not need to attack the piscine opponents.

They will make their mistakes without you having to prime them.

If you're in the mood for a little throw-down, most of the situations that will prove profitable will come from timely attacks on strong players, particularly if they don't know you and don't have a read on you.

A good player is far more likely to lay down a decent hand than a weak one. You have a much better shot at bluffing a top-flight pro than a rank amateur.

Standard advice is go after all the fish, but timely attacks on good players will pay off.

The fish will look you up 'cause they don't want to be bluffed and they often just "want to see" what you're raising with. The solid players are more interested in protecting their chips.

Aim to play on Level 3: Level 1: my hand. Level 2: my read on my opponents' hands. Level 3: my read on what my opponents think I'm doing.

Solid players know they must do this. Alas, when the pressure is on the tendency is to fall back to Level 2 and we stop with "what range of hands can I put him on?"

Often (more often than you can imagine) the real question to ask is, "what does he think I have." This is what's driving his action.

Stakes impact decisions: Like the above, this is a simple credo, but often neglected in the heat of battle.

Here are some examples where the stakes have an impact on the EV of a "standard" play:

Low stakes. Here, most players are betting their cards. They are vulnerable to steals when they miss and can be outplayed when they hit a small piece.

Board texture is important here. But take care, as players become more tuned to these moves they lose their edge.

Mid stakes. Here, position rules. Standard gambits become less effective because they may be countered. Be unpredictable. Keep opponents guessing.

The more they guess, the more mistakes they will make.

High stakes. Here, you will need moves that rarely occur at more modest stakes.

Where's the psychology in post-flop play? It's everywhere.

Players enter pots with a wide variety of holdings. They work on being hard to read and trying to keep opponents off guard. There are wheels within wheels of strategy and counterstrategy.

To get a feel for this kind of thing, go check out some hands on this site from the news reports and, of course, sit down and watch a couple of hours of High Stakes Poker or Poker After Dark.

The strategic ploys that are effective at this level will not prove profitable in lower-stakes games.

So where's the psychology in these? Actually, it's everywhere.

Virtually every piece of advice here on post-flop play is based on one or another psychological principles involving intimidation, aggression, ego, self-awareness, anxiety, fear, confusion, decision-making.

The more psychology you know, the better your poker game will become.

There's one more piece in this series. It'll be a look at emotions and bankrolls.

The Sunk-Cost Effect: Post-Flop Play Part IV The Naked Raise Plus: Post-Flop Play Part III This One is Tricky: More on Post-Flop Play The Simple Psychology of Post-Flop Play

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

When to Float the Flop in Online Six-Max

Tue, 13 Oct 2009 18:15:05 -0700

That's a huge opening for smart players. Calling those flop c-bets with the intention of taking the pot away when they check the turn is essentially a license to print money.

Your Ideal Opponent and a Note on Equity

The best candidate for a flop float is a player that habitually c-bets too often but doesn't fire nearly enough second barrels.

If you're playing with a HUD (heads-up display), the stats you want to focus on obviously are "flop c-bet" and "turn c-bet." If the flop percentage is super high and the turn percentage is super low, you've found a potential victim.

A quick note on equity however: Any time you're bluffing in Hold'em, some equity is better than no equity.

Plan A is to make your opponent fold, but with equity you have a Plan B. You can hit your hand and still win. It doesn't even have to be much equity. But some equity is always better than none at all.

So when you plan to float, make sure you have at least some equity. An overcard(s), a gutshot … hell, it can even be a backdoor flush draw.

You just want something to fall back on in case he does fire that second barrel or he decides to check-call that turn bet. You want to have at least some outs.

When to Float

If you have no equity at all but still really want to float, don't. Next orbit that player is still going to be on your right and he's still going to be mindlessly continuation-betting.

Just wait until you have some equity. You rarely should be pure floating.

Good regulars know when their opponents c-bet too often only to give up on the turn.

Example One:

$1/$2 six-max game online; $200 effective stacks. An ABC multi-tabling TAG who meets the description above raises to $7 from the cut-off.

You make the call with 7♥ 8♥. The blinds fold and the flop comes A♦ 5♥ 9♠. Your opponent c-bets $12.

This flop more than meets the criteria to float a serial c-better, so you call.

The turn comes 3♠ and your opponent checks. You bet $30 and he folds. A successful float.

Example Two:

$1/$2 six-max game online; $200 effective stacks. An ABC multi-tabling TAG who meets the description above raises to $7 from the cut-off.

You make the call with 7♥ 8♥. The blinds fold and the flop comes A♦ 5♥ 9♠. Your opponent c-bets $12.

You call with the intention of stealing on the turn when he checks. The turn comes J♥. He fires $30.

Uh oh, it didn't work. He didn't check the turn. Now what?

This is why you float with equity. On the flop, you have a gutshot and a backdoor flush draw. It's insurance!

Jcarver says equity = insurance.

Even if your opponent continues, you can hit 10 cards that improve your hand on the turn. And that's just what happened. The J♥ improves your hand to an open-ender and a flush draw.

Now you can call again and, chances are, you can win a big pot if you hit your hand. Especially because your opponent double-barreled an ace-high board when he rarely double barrels - meaning he has a big hand and your implied odds are very good.

So you call again and the 6♠ hits the river. Your opponent bets $85. You shove. He calls his last $66 and shows A♣ J♣, which is no good vs. your rivered straight.

This is the insurance, your escape hatch. You call the flop with the intention of stealing the pot when he checks. But you have a backup plan of hitting your long-shot hand.

When he fires again, you're lucky enough to have turned a big draw. You hit it on the river and stack him - something you can expect a small percentage of the time.

Those times he fires the turn and you don't improve, you simply fold. It's that easy.

In a Nutshell

Keep your goal in mind when you call the flop. The bulk of the money you make is going to come from when he check-folds the turn. The rest is gravy, which is why you choose a hand with some equity.

Don't be as bad as those mindless c-bettors and don't just fold every time you miss the flop. Look for opponents with high c-bet frequencies and low second-barrel frequencies and call.

These opponents are going to give up an awful lot on the turn. And when they do, it's free money in your e-pocket.

Firing the second barrel The C-bet for Beginners When not to continuation bet Fixing your redline: Making better c-bets

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Why You're Afraid of Value-Betting the River

Fri, 09 Oct 2009 11:13:07 -0700

The first player, who's been check-calling all the way, checks again.

The button, who's been pushing the action, says, "Okay, I check. The pot's big enough," and shows down pocket queens on a K♠ Q♠ 6♦ 9♣ 6♠ board.

A simple scene, yes? Also not an uncommon one.

Just think how often you've witnessed something like it. Here's a guy with the third-best possible hand checking the river.

Sure, the check-caller could have rivered quads, but we've all heard that comment made when the button has the stone-cold nuts.

It's actually not a simple situation at all. It's rife with financial and psychological elements, mostly taking place inside the head of the guy with the pocket queens - largely unconsciously.

Simple Money Mistake or Deep Human Paradox?

It's clear from a basic strategic perspective that failing to bet the river here is a money mistake. Dan Harrington has argued that it's one of most common and costly errors that otherwise good players make.

Failing to value bet in such situations can, over the long haul, turn a small winner into a break-even player or even a loser.

Action Dan: Still amazed when good players miss value bets.

So, why do so many players do this? Why would they give up a chance at considerable gain and accept, in its place, a more modest win?

Is this an individual, chancy thing, like stupidity? Or is it possibly the result of some deeper feature of human conduct, some tendency we have to behave in less-than-optimal ways?

It turns out that the latter is closer to the truth. There is a fascinating, deeply paradoxical and surprisingly common aspect of human behavior behind it: it's called the uncertainty effect and it's found whenever people are involved in situations that lack full certainty.

It may seem weird that poker players would be averse to uncertainty, but under the right conditions they will be. To get a better feel for how this mechanism operates, let's get away from the green felt and out into the "real world."

Here's the deal you're offered. You can purchase either:

A $50 gift certificate to a storeA lottery ticket where the prize will be either a $50 or $100 gift certificate (to the same store) based on the flip of a coin.

How much would you pay for each?

Astonishingly, a recent study found that the average amount people would be willing to pay for the first was MORE than for the second.

And this wasn't just one nutty outcome. This paradoxical result has been found in study after study in all sorts of circumstances.

We are a weird species.

Uri Simonsohn, at the Wharton School, University of Pennsylvania, chalked it up to a "literal distaste for uncertainty" and reports finding it in a variety of real-world settings including book stores, restaurants, whatever.

And, of course, we see it in sharpest relief when a poker player checks on the end with what is almost certainly the best hand.

As I've often pointed out in these columns, we are members of a very weird species. We are simply not the rational creatures we like to think we are.

We do not make optimal decisions, even when we ought to know better, even when we think we know better.

Emotional Cost vs. Cash Cost

Now, knowing that people make these silly decisions is amusing but it's only half the story. Why do we do these things? Why are we so ridiculously irrational?

The reason stems from a deeply ingrained human characteristic: risk aversion. Settings that contain risk or have uncertain elements make many of us feel uncomfortable; they produce distinctly negative emotional experiences.

From an evolutionary point of view, being risk averse is adaptive. Being wary in risky situations dramatically increases likelihood of survival.

If you don't know what's out there waiting for you, you're far better off being cautious and guarded - even it means you forgo occasional gains.

Value-betting the river: fraught with emotional cost.

While this worked fine eons ago, in the modern world it yields this odd paradox where we will devalue an option that is obviously better in material terms because it is wrapped in uncertainty and loses value in psychological terms.

In short, it just may cost more emotionally to bet on the river than it's worth in cash.

About now I can hear some of you howling, "Not me doc, no way would I do anything that stupid."

Well, maybe you wouldn't ... and maybe you would. We don't know since we haven't collected the data. But do ask yourself if you've ever checked the river in this kind of hand.

And, in case you're curious: Simonsohn's data shows that the uncertainty effect is found in over 60% of the population.

More psychology articles from Arthur S. Reber:

The Sunk-Cost Effect: Post-Flop Play Part 4 Grit and the Grind: How Great Players Get Great F U: Why Swearing in Poker is Good For You The Naked Raise Plus: Post-Flop Play Part 3

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Top 7 Signs You're a TAGfish

Wed, 15 Dec 2010 20:00:00 -0800

But to go along with these good, money-making TAGs there's a growing number of break-even or slightly losing regulars known as TAGfish.

On the surface, it may be hard to distinguish a TAGfish from a winning regular. He buys in full, tops up every hand, has decent enough stats and plays what he thinks is good poker.

But he can't seem to win.

That's because there's more to poker than having good stats. Poker is a thinking man's game; you can't just imitate what you've read and become some money-printing robot.

You have to be able to apply what you've learned and make good decisions each time the action is on you.

A TAGfish doesn't. He just plays the same game all day, every day no matter the situation. And he perpetually loses/breaks even, thinking he's the most unlucky player on the face of the earth.

These are the signs you're that guy:

1) You think about your opponent's range but never your own Everyone knows you have to try to put your opponent on a range. It's one of the most fundamental skills in poker.

But a TAGfish doesn't think about his own range in doing so. An opponent is going to play the hand a few different ways according to what he thinks you have.

You'll never be able to accurately put your opponent on a range without first thinking about your own perceived range.

If you take Brian's lessons and apply them incorrectly, you're probably a TAGfish.

2) You misapply skills you've learnedA TAGfish tries to learn to play better poker. He watches videos, read articles and studies the game extensively. But he misapplies the information he's learned. He'll learn that continuation betting and giving up is bad, so he'll just fire every second barrel.

He'll learn that to exploit players that c-bet too much you can float the flop and take away the pot on the turn, but he'll float with pure air instead of gutshots or hands with backdoor capabilities. He'll learn that three-betting light is profitable, but he'll do it regardless of his opponent's three-bet calling frequency. And he'll do it with the wrong hands.He only learns half the skills. He knows what to do, but then misapplies when he should be doing it and who he should be doing it against.

3) You call the same range in the cut-off as you do on the buttonA TAGfish treats the cut-off and the button as the exact same position. If an opponent raises from early position, he'll call in the cut-off with 6♥ 9♥ thinking it's perfectly fine because he'll be playing the pot in position.

But that just isn't the case. You've still got one more player to act behind you and if he's any good, he can make your life a living hell.That player can three-bet with impunity whenever you call with your weak, speculative hand, he can call and steal your post-flop position and he can punish you after the flop.Where good TAGs abuse the button, a TAGfish allows himself to be abused by the button.

4) You overestimate your implied oddsA TAGfish thinks every time he makes the nuts he's going to win a stack. He thinks if he calls from the blinds with a pocket pair and nails a set, he's going to win an opponent's whole stack every time.So he calls with his speculative hands post-flop, check-folds when he misses and, when he finally makes that huge hand, he makes his opponent fold. He bleeds all his money trying to hit that hand and then when he does hit, he never makes that money back.

5) You have leaks post-flopA TAGfish typically plays fine pre-flop. He has that part of the game solved to a degree.

He knows he can't limp Q9o upfront and expect to show a profit. He knows AK needs to be raised for value, etc. But once the flop comes, his mistakes start to compound. Knowing when to fold pre-flop is easy. But knowing when to ditch top pair, bad kicker isn't. Knowing when to double barrel and when to triple barrel is hard. A TAGfish plays his own cards too often and the situation and his opponents not nearly enough.

The real poker game is post flop. Pre-flop is easy.

6) You look at each decision as a separate entityA TAGfish gets caught up in a tough decision and thinks, "Man, this spot sucks. What the hell do I do?"

Really, it's not what he just did that put him in that spot; it's what he did earlier in the hand.He doesn't have a plan in mind for the hand. He just acts and figures it out from there. He plays reactive poker instead of proactive poker.7) You tilt too muchA TAGfish doesn't tilt in the true "five-bet ship 58o" sense of the word.

But when he's losing, he definitely doesn't play his best. He rushes decisions. He slips into auto pilot. And, worst of all, he plays far too long.A TAGfish loves trying to get unstuck and will play all day trying to get unstuck - all the while playing C-game poker. Yet when he has a winning day, he'll quit early and play small sessions, booking a small win.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

If this sounds a lot like you, don't worry. TAGfish syndrome is curable.

The answer: concentrate on making the best decision every single time the action is on you and take your time. Sometimes the best possible play won't come to you right away.

But if you do your best to think about the benefits of each possible decision, you'll be making more good decisions and less bad ones.

If you want to win more money - and stop being a TAGfish - that's exactly where you need to start.

When to Turn a Made Hand Into a Bluff Hand Selection: Fish vs. Regs Three-Betting a Polarized Range How to Improve Non-Showdown Winnings

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

When to Turn a Made Hand Into a Bluff

Thu, 01 Oct 2009 17:01:34 -0700

If a worse hand is never going to call and a better hand is never going to fold, you've successfully done just that - made a big mistake.

But quite often a better hand will fold and you can take the very bottom of your showdown-value range, turn it into a bluff and get a laydown.

Basically you take a hand that has some showdown value and give it more value as a bluff.

An example:

$1/$2 No-Limit game; effective stacks $300.

You're dealt 7♥ 8♥. Your good, hand-reading opponent raises to $8 and you call on the button.

The flop comes 8♦ J♣ K♥. Your opponent bets $14 and you call. The turn comes J♥. Your opponent bets $30 and you call again.

The river comes 3♠ and your opponent bets $70. You raise to $248 all-in and your opponent folds.

You took a hand that had some showdown value (a pair of eights) and turned it into a bluff to get a fold from a better hand (a pair of kings).

In a spot like this, turning your hand into a bluff works especially well because your eights don't have a a ton of showdown value. You basically can only beat a stone-cold bluff.

Calling here vs. his range is probably bad. If you look at your opponent's third-barrel range, it's much wider than just hands that can bet and profitably call a shove.

Our opponent can be barreling with missed draws, value-betting good kings, value-towning with aces and, of course, he could be firing with a jack. Of those hands, only the three jacks can really profitably call your shove.

Your hand has to be weak enough to gain equity by turning it into a bluff.

The best part about this scenario is that you can't often be bluffing in this spot in your opponent's eyes. You flat-called the flop and flat-called the turn.

Generally that's a sign of a made hand, and opponents won't expect you to all of a sudden turn that made hand into a bluff. Your range in his eyes seems very strong, and with the second jack falling you can very credibly rep that jack.

Which is why it's such a profitable play. Your opponents don't expect it. You're bluffing in a spot where you can only have made hands. It makes your bluff that much more credible.

The key component in turning your made hand into a bluff is that your hand strength can't be so strong that you have more equity in seeing a showdown. Your hand has to actually gain equity when you turn it into a bluff.

If it meets that criteria and you're up against someone that can read hands, you have a great spot to do it. Your opponent will never expect you to ruin a hand with showdown value by bluffing it!

Turning Your Hand Into a Bluff Hand Selection: Fish vs. Regs How to Avoid Making a Bad Bluff The Bluff Catcher

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Weighty Issues: Don't Let Cheap Chips Get You Down

Mon, 28 Sep 2009 10:49:45 -0700

They were solid, heavy with sharp, crisp edges and a kaleidoscope of colors around the edges. They felt important.

I felt rich ... although no more so than any of the others sitting there running through their own special rituals, stacking, restacking, riffling, flipping, drop-and-twisting.

We were late in getting started (big surprise!) and I found myself mentally wandering to other venues where I had played and the kinds of tournament chips I've riffled and flipped.

The one that stood out was the Taj Mahal in Atlantic City where I often played when I lived on the East Coast. The Taj had regular tournaments from baby events to major competitions including the US Poker Championship, which they held annually.

Thinking back, I had this vague sense that there was something "cheap," something vaguely unimportant about those Taj events

This didn't make a lot of sense, because many of the tournaments I'd played in there were a lot bigger and more prestigious than this one here, the one we were all waiting to start.

One way to fix the light chip problem? Build a giant stack of them.

But there it was and I've learned over the years to trust my intuitions. But still, it didn't add up.

Well, today I read an article by Nils Jostmann and his colleagues at the University of Amsterdam and suddenly, it all made sense.

I do love it when things that are murky and muddled in my mind suddenly become clear and make sense --- especially when poker is involved and it is psychology that provides the answer.

It turns out I was reacting to a fundamental psychological principle that, until Jostmann's work, was almost completely neglected.

As he puts it: "weight is an embodiment of importance," for what Jostmann and his colleagues discovered, as strange as it sounds, is that heavy things are more important than light things.

In other words: They have greater significance and greater emotional value.

Jostmann simply handed a clipboard to people and asked them to fill out a questionnaire evaluating the worth of a variety of objects.

If the clipboard on which the survey was placed weighed about 1,000 grams people rated the objects in the list as worth significantly more than if the clipboard only weighed some 600 grams.

And remarkably, while people are holding the heavy clipboard they rated reasonable decisions as fairer than when they held the light one and, even more impressively, they engaged in more elaborate thinking.

I assume there is a limit to this effect (handing people a clipboard weighing 10 kilos is probably not going to produce this effect) but within the range of weights they tested the effects were quite strong.

Now I understood. Those tournament chips at the Taj were embarrassingly cheap. They were light and flimsy. They had none of the heft and solidness of the truly majestic ones I was (attempting to) riffle.

Moral of the story: casinos should use solid, heavy chips at the tables. If they don't, make them heavy with your mind.

And, totally unconsciously, I was taken in by Jostmann's little demonstration. The Taj chips didn't feel important, but these new ones did!

If you can catch a rerun of one of Taj-run US Open events on TV, check out the chips. You'll see what I mean. I'd always hated those cheap pieces of pastel-colored clay the Taj used.

Now, thanks to Nils Jostmann and his colleagues, I know why.

Is there a moral here for the world of poker? Well, sort of. Casinos should use solid, well constructed chips at the tables. It won't really change much in who wins and who loses.

But, and I guess this is important, everyone will have a better time, rate the games as better and of greater monetary value and they will have a more satisfying, solid experience.

I don't know Jostmann personally, but if you visit his web page where his research is described, the guy certainly looks like a poker player.

More psychology articles from Arthur S. Reber:

Grit and the Grind: How Great Players Get Great F U: Why Swearing in Poker is Good For You The Naked Raise Plus: Post-Flop Play Part 3 This One is Tricky: More on Post-Flop Play

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Three-Betting a Polarized Range

Sat, 19 Sep 2009 23:28:00 -0700

Three-betting light works for a variety of reasons. The games, first of all, are so aggressive that your average regular is raising 18% of his hands or more.

Of that 18%, very few can stand up to a re-raise. Meaning your aggressive opponent is going to be folding very often when you re-raise.

Also, when you three-bet light, your opponents take notice. They in turn play back at you, netting you more profit on your big hands: AA-QQ and AKs.

If you only three-bet monsters, why would your opponents ever play with you? They wouldn't. When you three-bet more, your opponents can't be too sure what you have when you do it.

But we already knew all that. What we're getting into in this article is three-betting a polarized range.

Three-betting a polarized range means you still three-bet your good hands for value but your "light" three-bet hands have no value in seeing the flop.

The basic idea is you want to take a hand you'd normally fold and three-bet it as a bluff to try and get your opponent to fold.

What those hands are vary by opponent, position, prior history, etc. It's a sliding scale. The unchanging aspect is it's a hand that's not profitable to call in that very situation.

Why three-bet 93o when you can three-bet a hand that at least has equity when called?

You want to three-bet light with a hand that you would normally fold because it adds value to a hand that would otherwise have none. For example you don't want to three-bet T♥ 9♥ on the button because there's far too much value in seeing a flop.

So what hands make good polarized three-bet hands?

There's a simple rule for that. The best hands to three-bet light with are at the very top of your folding range.

Say, for example, that a good regular in the cut-off raises and the worst possible hand you could profitably call with is A9o. Your best possible three-bet light hand would then be A8o.

But if I can't call with A8o, why can I three-bet with it?

It's different because when you call with it, you're playing post-flop poker. You either have to hit and somehow extract money from a worse hand, or you have to make him fold after the flop.

When you three-bet him instead, your goal is to make your aggressive opponent fold. But if he doesn't, you still have your hand strength to fall back on.

Which is why we choose the very top of our folding range to three-bet. It's our back-up plan.

If we think about our opponent's likely calling range, it makes perfect sense. Our opponent is going to four-bet AK, AA-JJ, and he's going to call with AQ and some smaller pocket pairs. Everything else he's going to fold.

When we three-bet the best portion of the range we would normally fold, we have that back-up. If our opponent is going to call with TT, we can still flop an ace and win.

If we choose to three-bet a hand like 56o, we'd have to hit both our cards to beat TT. So we pick the hand with the best possible equity should we be called.

How often does our opponent have to fold to make our three-bet profitable?

If your re-raise is three times the original raise, your opponent only needs to fold 66% of the time to make your re-raise profitable.

Math says if your opponent folds to three-bets 67% of the time, your three-bet will be immediately profitable.

That means instantly profitable, with no more streets. If your opponent folds to more than 66% of your three-bets, then the second you three-bet him it's a profitable play.

That doesn't even take into account those times he calls and you either out play him on the flop or you hit your hand and win. So take a look at your opponent's "fold to three-bet" stats before three-betting.

A word about domination

For a long time the common mantra was to not three-bet dominated aces because our opponent's calling range will crush us and we'll end up flopping an ace and going broke.

But that really isn't the case. Our average opponent's (aka the people we want to three-bet) calling range actually will rarely consist of dominating aces.

After all, he'll be four-balling AK and really only regularly calling with AQ - even sometimes four-betting that. So our opponent's calling range will usually be made up of pair hands, of which we can choose to barrel him off or hit our hand and win.

There's a small risk of domination, but it's just that: small. And our goal isn't to flop a hand and play for stacks. Our profit comes from those times we make our opponent fold before the flop. The rest is gravy.

So keep that in mind. Your goal is to make your opponent fold before the flop.

If he folds to more than 66% of three-bets, your re-raise is instantly profitable. You three-bet the best part of your folding range as a back-up plan.

Those times you do get called, you can still hit and suck out. It's just like double-barreling. When you turn equity, your goal is to make him fold. But if he doesn't, you can still hit and win.

So go out there and make your opponent fold - because he's going to. A lot.

Related strategy articles:

Sizing Your Three-Bets Playing Three-Bet Pots With The Lead Don't Overuse the Light Three-Bet

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Hand Selection: Fish vs. Regs

Sun, 13 Sep 2009 00:59:01 -0700

There are, though, some hands that do better against certain types of opponents. And knowing which hands are profitable vs. which opponents makes all the difference between being a good player and being a great player.

Obviously, no matter who your opponent is, the top portion of your range remains the same. You're always going to raise AA-TT, AK-AJs, etc.

These hands are just so strong raising them will always be profitable in a six-max game. It's the bottom portion of your range that should change depending on your opponent.

Playing Against Fish

The first thing you should ask yourself is "Where is my profit going to come from?" Against a fish, your profit comes from when they call down with inferior hands - which they do often.

That's what makes them fish. They play without regard for position, they call too often pre-flop and they take their hands too far post-flop.

Your profit will come from making top pair or better and value-betting relentlessly. So against a fish you adjust by adding more hands with top-pair value - meaning hands that make top pair and that will have a better kicker than your fish.

Hands like KT, KJ, QT, AT-A6 etc. all become raises when fish are likely to call because the fish will still play hands that you dominate.

Fish make mistakes regulars won't. They'll call a raise with A♦ 2♥ and be happy to call three streets on an ace-high board.

Fish love to call so add more top pair hands.

In other words, when your opponent plays a wider range of dominated hands then you, you should widen your range of dominating hands.

Playing Against Regulars

Your profit from a regular isn't going to come from him calling you down with a dominated hand. He just isn't going to do it that often.

A regular isn't going to call all three streets with that same A♦ 2♥ on an ace-high board. You may get one street of value from your weak ace, but if there's action on a second street you're probably beat.

Your profit against a regular comes from making him fold the best hand.

Against a regular your top-pair hands go down in value and your bluff implied-odds hands go up in value.

Suited connectors are the best hands to play versus regulars. When they hit they make big hands - hands that you're willing to go to war with stacks with.

But the best part about suited connectors is they often flop or turn a draw and are great for firing multiple barrels.

A good example:

$1/$2 effective stacks $200. You have 6♣ 7♣ in the cut-off and raise to $7. A regular in the big blind calls.

The flop comes 8♣ 3♠ 2♦. He checks and you bet $12.

(Now a regular is going to peel almost any pocket pair here because he knows you're going to be c-betting a lot.)

He calls and the turn comes T♣. He checks and you fire $25.

Now can he really call profitably? He has no idea if you have an overpair, an eight, a ten, or what. He just knows the board is getting worse for him.

You've also improved. You now have a gutshot straight-flush draw and even if you're called you can hit any one of your 12 outs and win the hand.

That's what makes suited connectors such great multi-barrel hands. They improve on the turn a high percentage of the time.

If you have one card of your suit on the flop, you're going to pick up a flush draw on the turn 1 in 4.7 times. And when you have as much equity as nine outs, it's always a great time to fire a second barrel.

Add in the fact you're going to be barreling overcards, your opponent is going to be forced into making tough decisions all the time.

Regs are tough to get value from, but easier to bluff.

It's not bluffing in the true sense of the word, where you bluff with nothing. It's better. It's bluffing with equity.

When you turn equity, it's always a great time to fire a second barrel because your opponents are going to fold a lot. When they don't, you can still either hit your hand and win a stack or miss, fire again and win by making them fold.

Bluffing with equity is always better than bluffing with no equity because it gives you an escape hatch. You're banking on them folding, but when they call you're not dead in the water as you can still hit.

Where fish are happy to stack off with dominated hands, regulars won't. Those times you do get a regular to call three streets with a dominated hand, it's probably a cooler.

But you can't count on making money from regulars with coolers. In the end, they'll cooler you just as much as you cooler them.

The difference in your win rate is going to come from you making him fold with the best hand more often than he does you. And that's done by firing multiple barrels.

Suited connectors are great for that.

It's a Numbers Game

You won't be able to tailor your play perfectly all of the time, but depending on the table you should be able to tweak your play depending on where the button is.

For example if you're in the cut-off, there's a tight player on the button and two fish in the blinds, you should be opening more top-pair hands.

However if you're in the cut-off and there are two regulars in the blinds, you should obviously be opening more suited connectors and less weak top-pair hands.

It's a game of adjust and re-adjust. Just look around the table and figure out which style you should be using against which opponent and play accordingly.

It's an easy adjustment to make and it will dramatically improve your results.

The Sunk-Cost Effect: Post-Flop Play Part IV

Tue, 08 Sep 2009 19:49:15 -0700

1) Avoid problem situations and problem hands.

Position and previous action are keys. If you want to make your life a living hell, limp into pots early with hands like KJ and A9. And don't tell me they were suited!

These are problematical hands. They "look good" and have the potential for making big hands.

The problem lies in the disjunction between the probability of the big hand and that of catching a minor piece of the flop. The former doesn't occur often and when it does, it typically won't win enough to cover the losses when you catch second best.

Here's an example we've all seen (or done!): Mid-position limps with A♠ 9♠, gets raised 2.5x by the BB and (reluctantly) calls.

The flop is 9♣ 7♠ 2♣. BB bets half the pot. MP calls. Turn is 4♥. Another half-pot bet, call. River's a brick. Bet, crying call. BB shows JJ. Reload.

You're never pot commited if you're drawing dead.

Let's dig into this situation a bit and see why it is creates such havoc.

The initial limp isn't awful. Sometimes we get away with it and see a cheap flop. The problem comes when we get raised pre-flop and call or when we hit a piece of the flop and end up calling several bets.

Why do so many players make these calls? Well, one reason is that this situation invites what behavioral economists call the "sunk-cost effect" - that is, you get pulled into continuing with a line of action because you've already "sunk" costs into it.

It's analogous to the notion of being "pot committed." However, here we really aren't pot committed - certainly not pre-flop and usually not on the flop.

But the tug to go with a hand that has outs after we've already "sunk" valuables into it has a strong emotional pull, partly because we tend to overestimate the potential positive outcomes.

That is, once the slide into the sunk-cost dilemma starts, people caught up in it overestimate the potential gains.

Jackson and Dixon at USIC have looked specifically at how this effect plays itself out in Hold 'Em. And, for the curious, take a look at Dixon's research exploring the psychological links between choice, self-control and gambling.

If you're not careful your chips might slide away.

These problems are ubiquitous in economic settings and finance and haven't been satisfactorily solved so don't be too surprised when you see poker players falling into them.

There are, alas, other difficulties with these hands. Action junkies get pulled in because when they hit, they produce large "reinforcements" (flop two pair with A-9 and you can do a lot of damage to A-K).

As we've discussed numerous times, large rewards have a significant impact on shaping our emotions and our approach to the game. But elementary game theory tells you that the play has negative EV.

Worse, these hands suffer from information poverty. You typically do not know where you are in them. Your opponent's range of hands is large, as it often is when you've limped into a pot.

In addition, you're acting first in these situations and this is never good.

Save yourself a lot of heartache and cash and stay away from these hands. Even the very best players have trouble with them. If you don't see a flop, you don't have to worry about post-flop play.

2) The half-bet from the SB, call or fold rags.

This one has been hotly debated over the years. The standard argument for calling is that you're getting attractive odds, particularly if there are several limpers and a relatively passive player in the BB.

This isn't crazy but it needs to be filtered through some subtle screens.

First, appreciate that you don't really know your implied odds. If there are three callers and you're looking at T♠ 2♦, it's bloody unlikely you're getting the 9-1 you need (against random hands) to justify the call (assuming the BB doesn't pop it).

Second, you'll be out of position all the way to the river. I don't know about you, but this rarely makes me comfortable.

Is defending your blind worth risking your stack?

Third, once you've made the call you're going to be caught up in the "sunk-cost" problem. And if you catch a piece of the flop it'll get even tougher to bail out of the hand.

BTW, I chose the T♠ 2♦ example here for a reason. It is, of course, known as "Doyle's hand" or "the Brunson" since he won the WSOP Main Event with it twice and found himself psychologically committed to it (as noted, "reinforcement works").

If you saw a telecast of High Stakes Poker last year, it had a magic moment. Brunson picked up T-2, looked at it and dumped it in the muck while making the classic spitting sound people make to ward off evil.

Later he said that he can't begin to count the money he's lost playing that hand.

Calling the half-bet with junk is a long-term risky play. Here's a simple rule: Don't call with any hand that you wouldn't play for a full bet in early position.

The Naked Raise Plus: Post-Flop Play Part III This One is Tricky: More on Post-Flop Play The Simple Psychology of Post-Flop Play What's Luck Got to Do With It?

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Fixing Your Redline: Stop Playing OOP

Wed, 05 Oct 2011 23:01:06 -0700

Stop playing out of position!

It's been said a thousand times, but if you're playing out of position you're going to lose money. And when it comes to non-showdown winnings, it's extremely true.

When you play out-of-position you're at an extreme disadvantage. You have to act with no information and your opponent gets the huge bonus of getting to see what you do before he acts.

What that means for your redline is that you're going to be left guessing a ton.

You're going to peel with your second pairs and your weak top pairs, and then you're going to fold to further action.

Putting money into the pot and folding = redline cancer.

An extremely basic example, and one that happens several times a session:

$1/$2 game online; effective stacks $200. You're in the big blind with A♣ T♣.

It's folded around to the regular on the button who makes it $7.

The small blind folds and you call. The flop comes J♥ T♠ 3♦. You check and he bets $12 into $15.

You make the call and the turn comes K♥. You check and he fires $28 into $39.

Now here's your problem.

You know that the K♥ is a great barrel card. And you know your decent opponent is going to second-barrel it with almost 100% of his range - just because you're going to fold so often.

Playing OOP is like prop betting with Huck Seed. You got no shot.

So your options are fold and forfeit 10BB, or call and hope he shuts down on the river.

If he fires the river, you definitely have to fold and now you're forfeiting 23.5BB.

Neither option is good. Especially if your opponent is capable of firing multiple barrels.

Because your opponent is in position, he's entirely in control of the hand.

He decides whether to bet or whether to check, and he always has the last say.

If you lead, he can fold, call or raise. If you check, he can check or bet.

Where your hands are tied, he has complete control. With similar hands taking place all the time, it's easy to see how you can bleed money from out of position.

Though it's impossible to completely avoid playing out of position (you can't just fold TT because you're out of position for example) you can (and should) tighten up your out-of-position calling range.

When you play fewer hands, you play better hands pre-flop. When you play better hands pre-flop, you'll make better hands post-flop.

When you make better hands post-flop, your decisions will be easier and you won't have to check-fold on later streets nearly as often.

The end result is you'll save money and you'll improve your non-showdown winnings.

And, most importantly, your overall win-rate will improve.

Related strategy articles:

Fixing Your Redline: Playing Fewer Tables Fixing Your Redline: Making Better C-Bets Fixing Your Redline: Playing Draws Aggressively How to Improve Non-Showdown Winnings Firing the Second Barrel When Not to Continuation Bet

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Online to Live: Seven Rules for Making the Switch

Wed, 12 Oct 2011 20:21:21 -0700

Maybe it's time to try your hand at those juicy live games you've heard so much about? How different can it be?

Yes, the rumors are true - live games are incredibly juicy.

But if you can't adjust to the subtle intricacies of live poker, you won't be as big a winner as you should be (or think you should be).

Below are the major differences and how to adjust your game:

1) Games are Slower

The biggest change, and it will hit you right away, is that live games are slower. Much, much slower.

Not only are you forced to play just one table, but the game itself takes much longer to play out.

While you may get more than 80 hands per hour per table online, you'll be lucky to get 30 live.

Fewer hands mean a lot more folding. And a lot more boredom.

But don't just shut your brain off - use your free time to observe your opponents,

If you can stay sharp, watch your opponents and break down their playing styles, when you end up in a hand with them a few hours down the road you're going to have a huge advantage.

Average tables are much, much softer.

2) Average Tables are Much Softer

Making up somehwat for how slow the games are is how much softer your average table is.

When you play online, you may consider it a good table if there's one full-stacked fish.

When you play live at $5/$10 and below, your average table consists of two real fish, two gamblers (the fishy kind), four super-tight "regulars" and maybe two good players (including, you hope, you).

The whole table is softer. The fish are fishier and the regs are more predictable.

There are even players that are so tight you can guarantee any time they raise it's either KK, AA or the nuts.

These players would be eaten alive online, but because there are so many more fish live they can still beat the game.

As easy as it is to wait for the nuts and relentlessly value-bet against the fish, it's just as easy to raise the tight regs and push them around.

When they push back, fold. It's an easy game.

3) Games are Loose-Passive

If you've come from the online six-max arena, it's going to be shocking to you how passive these games are.

Online, it may be profitable to four-bet shove/call shoves with AK from any position pre-flop. If you do it live, you'll find AA-KK every time and you'll get killed.

Light three-betting is almost non-existent. When most players re-raise, it's almost always for value.

Watch your opponents - they may go a whole session without a single three-bet. Some players even just flat-call QQ and AK, opting to play poker on the flop.

If you're regularly getting AK in pre-flop 100bb deep (or more) in a live game, you're going to have a tough time booking wins.

Limp, limp and more limp.

Moving past just pre-flop play, the whole game is much more passive. Rather than raising with draws, players will just call and hope to hit.

They'll also slow play monsters rather than build a big pot, and they'll miss obvious river value-bets.

4) Pre-Flop Limping is Rampant

Connected to #3 above, there's a ton of limping pre-flop in live games.

Online, you can tell who the fish are by who limps. Live, it isn't the same.

Everybody limps - and limps a lot.

If you tried to isolate every single time someone limped, you'd just find yourself taking 4- and 5-way flops regularly.

Live players like to see the flop.

So, rather than iso-raising with T♣ 8♠ off the button, you may just be better off seeing a flop 6-way.

5) Pots are Contested Multi-WayOnline, 90% of pots are heads-up to the flop. Live, your average pot is usually 2- or 3-handed.

With more players comes more chance someone has a real hand.

As the pre-flop raiser, you should continuation-bet less.

You'll also need, on average, a better hand to win at showdown.

6) Games are Deeper

If you're a winner online, you've mastered play with a 100bb stack. But when you play live, you'll find yourself 200bb deep (or more) very often.

Just play your game.

Adjusting to deep-stack play can be very difficult.

You'll often play hands where, if you were 100BB deep, you'd just happily get it in on the flop. But if you're 300bb deep, it's no longer profitable.

Should you choose to call, you'll have to call large bets on the turn and river as well.

7) Just Play Your Game

Whether it's live or online, your goal remains the same: either make your opponent fold before showdown, or have the best hand at showdown.

Watch your opponents, study their playing habits and play your poker game. The rest is just experience.So get up from your computer, go be sociable for a bit and take advantage of the softer games.

You may be surprised with what you've been missing.

Related strategy articles:

Making The Switch: Live Full-Ring to Online Six-Max Switching from Cash Games to Tournaments How to Crush Live $1/$2 No-Limit Hold'em Why You Want to Play with Bad Players

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Grit and the Grind: How Great Players Get Great

Fri, 25 Jun 2010 00:34:00 -0700

He's got a deep interest in psychology as well as poker, and that makes some of the things he's written about very relevant to this space here.

In a recent piece in the Boston Globe, he extols the virtue of grit and perseverance in the struggle for success.

He notes, correctly, that popular tales about how greats like Newton made scientific breakthroughs are myths.

We Too Have Our Myths

The notion that Newton discovered gravity when an apple bonked him on the head is just plain wrong, as is the one about Darwin discovering natural selection when he encountered various finches in the Galapagos.

These scientific urban myths don't just mislead - they distort the very essence of how true, deep, understanding is achieved.

Newton and Darwin were both brilliant. But so were many of their contemporaries.

The key is that both were intensely focused on their work. They spent years - in Darwin's case 20 - sifting data, pouring over models, reading, absorbing ideas, pushing the envelope of understanding.

Magical talent? Maybe a little.

In the poker world, we too have our myths. We believe that some just have a natural affinity for the game and can pick it up on the fly.

A couple of dozen hours at the felt and, bingo, they become solid, winning players.

If you think that Darwin just took a cruise around the world and got hit in the head with a really cool idea, you might also think that Phil Ivey got where he is because of some magical talent.

Or that the young Internet stars popping out of their bedrooms with million-dollar bankrolls are just cool guys with a flair for playing risky games.

Ability Combined With Zeal and Hard Labour

Lehrer quotes, approvingly, a line from Sir Francis Galton (who, interestingly, was a psychologist before there was a psychology as well as Charles Darwin's first cousin) to the effect that high levels of achievement depend on "ability combined with zeal and the capacity for hard labour."

And herein is the lesson for today.

I'm a recreational player. I put in a couple of hours a week either flipping chips at my local card room or zinging electrons around the world at virtual tables.

I read a lot and I think a good bit about the game and how I play it. But I'm a dilettante and I know it.

It's more than just a flair for risky games.

But I have friends, good friends, who are serious and successful pros. And I am astonished at the efforts they make, the time they put in, the intensity they bring to the game.

They don't just read books and articles. They play astronomical numbers of hands, keep records, make notes, rehash hands, review sessions, carry out intellectual autopsies on tournaments.

They go back over these data and rethink things. They deliberately try out different strategic moves and clock how those sessions went.

They spend endless hours with friends of like minds and similar skills going over all of this stuff.

The best are also brutally honest with themselves. Just like a good scientist, they know the data do not lie.

Lehrer spent a week exploring these issues with many top pros at the WSOP and, as he told me, "It was pretty clear.

These players succeed, not because of any special 'talent,' but because they have found something that they love so much that it doesn't feel like a job.

"They need to do this. They are putting in literally thousands upon thousands of hours of focused, concentrated study."

Old and Honored Reasons

The successful young poker pros, those rising to the top, are getting there for old and honored reasons.

Sure, they've got some natural talent; they're smart, not particularly risk-averse and have a natural (or quickly learn) emotional stability.

To be great, you need grit.

But these qualities alone won't do it. It'll just make them smart, easy-going players who make a couple of bucks at the game.

As Lehrer put it, "What they've got to have to become among the best is good old-fashioned grit.

They've got to be focused, motivated and have a deep desire to get better, to succeed, to become truly great at what they do."

Lehrer also notes that success and IQ are only weakly correlated. IQ isn't the same thing as intelligence and who succeeds at life's games is more tightly linked with factors like perseverance, grit and sweat.

One of the most intelligent people I've known was a professional racehorse handicapper. Not many people can make a living doing this. He did.

We were friends for nearly twenty-five years. He told me that when he took the Army IQ tests he scored a shade below average. Fascinating.

And, for what it's worth, I suspect that many of the better poker pros might easily have (or may yet) become artists, writers, businessmen.

The formula for making it is pretty much the same for all.

Author Bio:

Arthur Reber has been a poker player and serious handicapper of thoroughbred horses for four decades. He is the author of 'The New Gambler's Bible and coauthor of Gambling for Dummies'.

His new book 'Poker, Life and Other Confusing Things' from ConJelCo Publishing was just released and is available on Amazon.com.

Formerly a regular columnist for Poker Pro Magazine and Fun 'N' Games magazine, he has also contributed to Card Player (with Lou Krieger), Poker Digest, Casino Player, Strictly Slots and Titan Poker. He outlined a new framework for evaluating the ethical and moral issues that emerge in gambling for an invited address to the International Conference of Gaming and Risk Taking.

Until recently he was the Broeklundian Professor of Psychology at The Graduate Center, City University of New York.

Among his various visiting professorships was a Fulbright fellowship at the University of Innsbruck, Austria. Now semi-retired, Reber is a visiting scholar at the University of British Columbia in Vancouver, Canada.

More strategy articles from Arthur S. Reber:

F U: Why Swearing in Poker is Good For You The Naked Raise Plus: Post-Flop Play Part 3 This One is Tricky: More on Post-Flop Play The Simple Psychology of Post-Flop Play

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Fixing Your Redline: Playing Fewer Tables

Fri, 21 Aug 2009 11:36:45 -0700

Instead of the grueling 20 hands an hour you may get live, online you may be able to get 1,000 hands or more.

Though more hands an hour is an obvious plus, there's also an obvious negative. The more tables you play, the less attention you can give each one of them.

Let's say your win rate is three big bets per 100 hands (3BB/100) over a large sample size when you play one table. If you double the amount of tables you play, in theory you double the amount of money you make.

But you can't just keep doubling your tables and keep making more and more money. Eventually, as you add more tables, your game will start to deteriorate.

You'll no longer be able to give each decision the required amount of thinking. You'll rush decisions to act on other tables, and you'll slip into auto pilot.

Not everyone can play a million tables at once, ElkY-style.

Auto pilot is one of the major factors of a downward-sloping redline. When you slip into auto pilot you stop thinking.

And when you can't give each decision the required amount of thought, you'll make countless little mistakes.

No longer are you thinking, "My opponent is tight-aggressive and will probably peel with 99 on T♣ 3♠ 4♦." You're just thinking, " I raised pre-flop I c-bet, hurrrr."

You don't think, "If I c-bet this board I am going to have to fire multiple barrels."

So when you c-bet that flop and he calls, you shut down on the turn. He bets the river and you fold. Bam, you just wasted a bunch of money and hurt your redline.

Now picture doing that on 10 tables for two-plus hours. Similar situations pop up all the time, and if you're consistently on auto pilot, you'll be making mistakes like this all session long.

When your session is filled with small mistakes, your win rate - and especially your non-showdown win rate - is going to suffer.

How many tables should I be playing?

That's up to you. Only you know when you're giving each decision proper thought. You know when you're struggling and rushing your decisions.

Some people can play 12 tables at once without rushing decisions or going on auto pilot. Others may struggle with two.

Its up to you to figure out how many tables are right for you.

If you want to be durrrr, play less tables and focus on every decision.

But I make more with a smaller win rate and more tables

Well, that's probably true.

It doesn't take a rocket surgeon to figure out if you win at 3BB/100 playing two tables and 2BB/100 playing eight tables, and your only goal is making money, then play the eight tables.

If, however, your main goal is to improve as a poker player and move up in limits, then you may be better off in the short run playing less tables, making less overall money, but playing better poker.

When you massively multi-table, you may make more money but you stunt your poker growth.

It's up to you to decide what your goals are. Do you want to move up in limits and improve as a poker player? Or are you happy with where you are and how much money you're making currently?

If it's the former, you're better off playing less tables and paying more attention.

You'll make less money in the short term but down the road you'll be a lot better player than that massive multi-tabler - plus you'll have a super sexy upward sloping redline.

Related strategy articles:

Fixing Your Redline: Making Better C-Bets Fixing Your Redline: Playing Draws Aggressively How to Improve Non-Showdown Winnings Firing the Second Barrel When Not to Continuation Bet

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Pre-Flop vs. Post-Flop Poker

Mon, 17 Aug 2009 21:05:35 -0700

Although all forms of Hold'em have pre-flop and a post-flop play, one of them will typically be more dominant during the course of play and will require the focus of your skills.

It's crucial to understand which form is most prominent in the game you're playing and make sure your play is suited to fit it.

The rule of thumb obviously is if the majority of your major decisions happen pre-flop, you're playing pre-flop poker. Likewise, if the majority of the decisions you make happen post-flop, you're playing post-flop poker.

These are some common poker situations and what style of poker each requires:

Situation Style Deep-stacked cash game Post-flop Late stages of online tourney (average stack 7bb) Pre-flop Heads-up cash game versus 10bb short stacker Pre-flop Heads-up against a vastly inferior player Post-flop

Play To Your Strengths

If you're a player who likes to run elaborate bluffs, or you feel you have a knack for maximizing value and minimizing losses, you're best suited to play post-flop poker.

If you're a player who likes to play "small ball" poker, exploit weakness and play a very fine-edged mathematical game, you're best suited for playing pre-flop poker.

This is the reason some players are naturally more profitable in sit-n-gos while others thrive in deep-stacked cash games.

While many post-flop oriented players think a pre-flop game is simply gambling compared to the chess-like approach of post-flop play, no one style is better or more profitable than the other.

Once you understand which style of player you are, it's in your best interest to seek out and play only in games that match your style.

If you're a strong pre-flop player, it doesn't make sense to lose money sitting deep-stacked in a cash game.

The Cards or the Player

Short stack = Pre-flop.

When playing pre-flop poker, the player decides the "when" in making the move, but in the end it's the cards that decide his or her fate.

That's why there's so much variance in a typical donkament; even if you always get it all-in as a 4-1 favorite, eventually you're going to lose to that 20%.

This reason alone is why you'll see some of the best players choosing to just call, or even limp, into pots pre-flop in tournaments, choosing to use their obvious skill advantage in post-flop play.

The wider the gap in skill between you and your opponent in post-flop play, the less your hand value matters.

If you're not as strong as your opponent, don't afford them the luxury of outplaying you post-flop. Force them to play pre-flop poker against you.

This means you should be raising instead of limping, re-raising instead of calling and folding any trouble hand you would be forced to play post-flop - especially if you're out of position.

The Luxury of Choice

Most poker players understand what their strengths are. Regardless of the game's overall leaning to one particular side, each player will try to manipulate the play of the hand to their preferred style.

Unfortunately, not all poker situations let you make this choice.

When you start playing pre-flop poker in a scenario suited to post-flop poker (or vice versa), you're going to start running into trouble.

For the most part, your general game selection will determine what style of poker needs to be played. But there are times when you will have the opportunity to choose what style of poker to play while at the table.

It's important to identify these moments and force the play of the hand into the style of your choice. Maybe even more important, try to force the style of play into one where your opponent is uncomfortable.

For example: You're in $1,000 buy-in live tournament with only 200 players left from the starting 800. Thanks to a great blinds structure and a couple lucky pots you have a large stack of around 250bb.

You've been feeling out the table for the last two hours and have a pretty good handle on your opponents. One player, an online MTT grinder with a stack of 100bb, raises in middle position, the table folding to you.

Large stack = Post-flop.

Looking down at your hand you see A♥ Q♥. Although in most tournament scenarios a three bet would be the obvious choice here, you know that your opponent is accustomed to playing tournaments with the average stack being a fraction of what you hold now.

Rather than three-betting, and allowing your opponent to play the majority of the hands action pre-flop, where he's very confident and comfortable, you choose to flat call, forcing your opponent to play post-flop out of position.

Every edge you can gain over your opponent puts you step closer to winning the pot.

Choose the Right Game

There's nothing wrong with being a pre-flop player, as long as you can admit and embrace it. Some of the most profitable online poker players in the world made their rolls playing this exact style.

If you're uncomfortable with pre-flop play and would rather wait until you see a board, that's fine as well. The key is to understand how you want to play and find a game to suit.

In the world of online poker, you're a click away from almost any variation of game in virtually any size. What you play, and for how much, is entirely up to you. There's never a reason to play out of your element.

If for some reason you must play in a game that doesn't naturally lend itself to your skills, you need to find a way to adapt to the game at hand.

For example, if you're a pre-flop player seated at a deep-stacked cash game, you might want to consider buying in short. By limiting the amount of chips you have, you force the other players to play you pre-flop, where you're more comfortable.

Know your own game, understand where your game is weak and then adapt your play to suit.

Related strategy articles:

How to Beat Your Friends at Poker Three Reasons You Lose Money Playing a Single Ace Understanding and Fixing Mistakes How to Crush Live $1/$2 No-Limit Hold'em

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

How to Beat Your Friends at Poker

Mon, 10 Aug 2009 18:31:02 -0700

Busting your friends at a poker table.

If you're a semi-to-regular poker player with a solid understanding of the game, chances are you're miles ahead of most of your friends when it comes to Texas Hold'em strategy.

But that doesn't guarantee you'll beat them at your regular home game.

Even though you have more experience and have read more articles and books, none of this will be useful if you don't adjust your game to their individual levels of play.

Who's at Your Table?

Almost every home game is going to have a standard cross-section of playing styles.

These for the most part are made up of:

Pre-beginners Beginners Intermediates Intermediates who think they're pros

Every action you make at a poker table is part of a poker conversation you're having with the other players.

If you're making advanced moves, far beyond the scope of your friend's poker comprehension, it's as if you're speaking another language.

If you want to be the one walking away from the table with the biggest pile of chips, there are some very simple formulas you can use to maximize your edge against each type of player.

The $5-$20 buy-in range - which is pretty much the standard in most non-pro home games - is generally going to bring out a lot more beginners and low-end intermediate players than high-end intermediates or semi-pros.

These are the key playing styles you'll need to tailor your poker game for.

Player: Pre-Beginner

Typically a friend of a friend, or a girlfriend of a regular, these folks have never played poker before let alone a structured game of Texas Hold'em.

Usually a friend of a friend.

They don't know any poker rules, they don't have any idea what you're talking about and they're clueless as to what's happening on the poker table.

This kind of player should be viewed as an antique army-surplus landmine. They're completely unpredictable.

So although you should have no problems walking all over them, sometimes stepping anywhere near them will take off your legs.

They'll move all in with the nuts or with absolutely nothing.

They also have no idea what they hold, making them impossible to get a read on.

Your Best Strategy: Avoidance

The best way to deal with the pure beginner?

Let everyone else play the guessing game.

You'll have an easier time getting those chips from the other players anyways.

An Example:

You raise from middle position with K♠ Q♠. The button calls and the Pre-Beginner min-re-raises from the small blind.

You both call to see a flop.

Flop: Q♥ 10♠ 8♦.

The Pre-Beginner opens for a bet about twice the size of the pot.

Although there's a decent chance you're ahead, there are lots of hands that have you beat here.

Rather than play the guessing game, hope the button makes the call instead. Fold and wait for a better spot.

Player: Beginner

Although these players understand the raw fundamentals of poker, they only ever play the most basic strategies.

Expect first-level poker with all decisions made purely on the strength of the two cards they hold.

These players are effortless to handle as you'll always know exactly what they're doing and what they're holding.

If they show strength, they have a strong hand. If they show weakness, they're going to fold.

They also are known to commit 90% of their stack into a pot then fold to a final bet, leaving them with one or two chips.

Best way to beat beginners? Aggression.

Your Best Strategy: Aggression

The best way to consistently beat these players is to play a very aggressive poker game.

Your goal is to try take down almost every hand dealt at the table.

When these players try to play back at you, or show any signs of strength, ditch the hand and let them have it.

An Example:

You raise the first six hands dealt at the table. Each time, you either steal the blinds or any callers fold to your continuation-bet on the flop.

The next hand, with two callers on the flop, your c-bet gets raised by a beginner.

To a true poker beginner, your image means little to nothing.

You just got raised because he has a legitimate hand. Fold out, and raise the next pot.

Player: Intermediate

If you play with the same players every week eventually most of them will become intermediate players.

These players have a basic understanding of the game and are starting to mix up their play a bit.

Most importantly, these players are making fewer mistakes than the beginners.

Your Best Strategy: Aggression

The best way to deal with intermediate players is the same way you'd approach playing a beginner.

Put heavy pressure on them with aggression and force them to fold out of most of the hands they play.

When someone plays back at you, ditch your hand or punish them if you actually have a good hand.

If the other players show strength early, they probably have a hand.

Let them fight amongst themselves; you want to be the aggressor rather than the caller.

Best approach against intermediates? Heavy pressure.

Example:

After you've been annoyingly aggressive at the table, intermediate players will start to get upset.

Every time they've had a hand they wanted to play, you made them fold.

Every time they've been dealt a premium hand and raised, you've folded.

They'll call your raise with A♥ K♥ and see a flop of A♦ 10♠ 7♠.

This is where they think they're finally going to give you a taste of your own medicine.

Unfortunately for them, you're holding 10♥ 10♣. But the key is to play the hand exactly the same as you've played your junk hands.

Expect to be check-raised. Then, either instantly raise them back or just call.

If you call, they'll bet out the turn where you can raise them.

If you upset them enough early, they'll make an emotional all-in and you'll win a large pot.

Player: Intermediate Who Thinks He's a Pro

Depending on where you are, these players will range from extremely rare to the majority of your game.

It's important to spot these players early as you need to take a slightly different approach when taking them on.

There are a few telltale signs of a delusional intermediate:

He'll talk about how great he is at poker He can't wait to talk about the exact odds your hand has He likes to use the expressions "pot committed" and "pot odds," regardless of the relevancy to the situation at hand

Your Best Strategy: Wait for the Dumb Move

These players play the same game as the regular intermediate but with a few twists.

The occasional move or bluff will come out of these players.

Wait for this guy to make a dumb move.

Fortunately for you, their skill level isn't high enough for them to make consistent quality moves.

Lean on them, let them bluff and wait for them to make a dumb move at the wrong time.

Luckily, these players typically have serious ego problems.

Snapping them off can cause immediate tilt, and since these guys think they're pro they also think they're ballers so they'll be sure to rebuy.

Example:

Unless you have the hand locked up, when these players make a strong play that smells like a bluff, chances are you should just fold.

It's far better for you - both short term and long term - to let them run bluffs rather than have them stack you on a bad read.

Play the same game you play against the intermediate players and wait for them to make a move at the wrong time.

They'll pay lots of attention to the texture of the board but will have little understanding of the betting story.

Bluffs from these players are only as in-depth as, "he can't call unless he has a king in his hand."

Luckily you not only know that he doesn't have a king, but that he has to believe you have one if you move in over the top.

Related strategy articles:

Three Reasons You Lose Money Playing a Single Ace Understanding and Fixing Mistakes How to Crush Live $1/$2 No-Limit Hold'em Texas Hold'em Starting Hands Cheat Sheet

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

F U: Why Swearing in Poker is Good For You

Wed, 02 Feb 2011 14:00:00 -0800

There isn't a soul this side of a two-year-old minister's daughter who doesn't know how to flip those letters.

Yet if you do, and someone is offended by it, you may find some defender of the laws of 'decent folks' writing you a ticket for "disorderly conduct."

We all know this is just f*ck*d up b*ll sh*t --- but we can't really say it.

And, anyway, as Mike Matusow has found out at the poker table, repeated offenses get you repeated fines - up to 10 minutes per F-bomb even.

It isn't just poker rooms, bars or other hang-outs of the young and restless that swearing dominates conversations.

Ever look at the transcripts of the tapes Richard Nixon secretly made of the lofty deliberations in the White House? I have.

They're not easy to read. Indeed, it's tough to figure out what Tricky Dick was saying at all because essentially every other word was "expletive deleted."

You say mother, I say day.

Swearing is Fundamental

Swearing is a fundamental feature of human talk.

President Obama noted that Mother's Day had an odd ring to it for Rahm Emanuel, his chief of staff, because "Rahm isn't used to hearing the word 'day' follow 'mother.'"

If you take a quick look back at the history of languages and how they've changed, you'll find that every generation has its 'cuss' words. And they change.

'Bitch' and 'bastard' originally referred respectively, and rather benignly, to a 'female dog' and a 'person born out of wedlock.' They slowly wended their way into use as effective insults.

As such, they functioned as words that 'offended' others - which is sufficient to have them fall under some loosely structured disorderly conduct laws.

Consequently, they were 'banned' from the airwaves in the US as unsuitable for the ears of 'decent folk.'

Nowadays, bitch and bastard have become so common they've lost much of their affect.

They're barely offensive and hardly insults - and are printed with vowels rather than asterisks.

The only TV show where you won't hear them is Sesame Street.

Not much out there about non-verbal release, but Todd Brunson has always been a bit ahead of his time.

Why All Societies Have Swear Words

Ever wonder about cursing? Why it's linguistically universal? Why all societies have swear words?

Universality alerts psychologists to the possibility that we've stumbled on something fairly deep.

Much of the early research on swearing wasn't very illuminating, since it tended to be clothed with concerns about morals and ethical conduct.

But Timothy Jay, a psychologist at the Massachusetts College of the Liberal Arts has carried out some research that cuts through all the trivia and gets right to the heart of the matter:

Cursing is good for you!

Yup. It turns out that swearing has real and important psychological functions.

Its immediate impact is to lessen tensions and release frustrations.

When you're really pissed (note, not 'p*ssed') when some donk-brain sucks out on you on the cash bubble, it's psychologically uplifting to let loose with a couple of juicy 'expletive deleteds.'

There is, in addition, a secondary gain of even more significance (from the point of view of smoothing social interactions) --- the release of tension also makes it less likely that you'll resort to physical abuse.

And, as we know, when a particular behavior makes you feel better, it's a psychological certainty that it will become an action deeply ingrained and oft-repeated.

F penalties! Even the WSOP says there's no harm in some directionless cursing.

Empty Swearing Hurts No One

So, is there a poker message here? Sure. And interestingly, the WSOP has figured it out. "Empty" swearing, venting, is okay.

It's no longer a violation to hurl a "WTF" when the one-outer hits the board.

But it's still a violation to turn to the guy who slurped out on you and call him a "dumb mother f*ck*r" ... and it should be.

The offense isn't in the sound of the words; it's in the intentions of the speaker to harm another.

The real crime is "verbal assault." This is where the "indecent" element comes in.

I'm a big fan of what I guess we call "directionless" cursing.

It can be an art form, a way to express political and social ideas, a device for exploring the edges of meaning.

And now it turns out that it can actually make you feel better. Or play better.

I feel better already.

Author Bio:

Arthur Reber has been a poker player and serious handicapper of thoroughbred horses for four decades. He is the author of 'The New Gambler's Bible and coauthor of Gambling for Dummies'.

His new book 'Poker, Life and Other Confusing Things' from ConJelCo Publishing was just released and is available on Amazon.com.

Until recently he was the Broeklundian Professor of Psychology at The Graduate Center, City University of New York.

More poker strategy articles from Arthur S. Reber:

The Naked Raise Plus: Post-Flop Play Part 3 This One is Tricky: More on Post-Flop Play The Simple Psychology of Post-Flop Play Skill vs. Luck: Let's Get it Right

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Fixing Your Redline: Making Better C-Bets

Thu, 22 Sep 2011 13:20:43 -0700

When you fire c-bets with reckless disregard, you're more often than not just going to end up folding later in the hand.

Add up all of those folds over the course of a session - or a month, or a year - and you can clearly see that's going to cost you a lot of "non-showdown" winnings.

Indentifying bad c-bets

Bad c-bets are ones where the only thought that enters your mind is, "I'm the pre-flop raiser, so I should bet again." Simple as that.

The problem with thoughtless continuation-betting is that when your opponent calls, you usually give up on the hand when he bets on a later street.

When you fold, you forfeit your pre-flop raise, your c-bet and the rest of the pot without a fight.

When you put money into the pot and fold, not only will your overall bottom line suffer, your "non-showdown" winnings take a big hit.

In Poker Tracker terms, that means a sharp, downward-sloping "redline."

(For a more complete definition of the redline and how it effects your game, check out these articles here and here.)

Losing a raise and a c-bet might not seem like a big deal, but it's a leak that can repeat itself countless times in a single session

Do it often enough and it can become a massive leak for a player with an otherwise decent game.

Your main goal with a c-bet? Get a fold.

C-betting better

If the main factor in bad c-betting is thoughtlessness, the way to become a better c-bettor is, naturally, to think about your c-bets. Every time.

What do you think about?

You think about what your goal is.

As the c-bettor, your goal is to use the initiative you've gained being the pre-flop raiser and get a fold from your opponent.

Mark these words: To get a fold!

When you c-bet, you want your opponent to fold.

Focus your c-betting on situations when he's likely to fold; check instead when he's likely to call.

Dry boards with big cards are the best boards to c-bet

It's human nature for your opponent to put you on big cards when you raise pre-flop. When the board comes A♥ 3♠ 8♣, it's an easy c-bet.

The board is dry, and he's very likely to have missed.

You're the pre-flop raiser, so you're more likely to have an ace than he is. In this case, your continuation bet is likely to succeed.

On the flip side, when you raise and the board comes 3♥ 2♠ 6♣, you're probably not going to get credit for a real hand that often.

It's probably better to check, unless...

Mutli-barrelling can become extremely profitable.

You plan on firing multiple barrels

A board like the one above may not be great to c-bet if you plan on going "one and done" on it - meaning firing one c-bet then giving up when called.

It may still be profitable to c-bet, but only if you plan on firing multiple barrels.

On a low board, or a board with one medium-high card like T♥ 4♣ 2♠, your opponent is liable to peel with almost any pocket pair.

He hopes you'll give up when your c-bet is called and he can go on to check it down and win the hand.

This article, though, is to get you to stop that mindless "one and done" c-betting and get you thinking.

On these types of boards, "one and done" c-betting just isn't profitable.

When you think about your opponent's range in most of these cases however, multi-barreling on these types of boards can become extremely profitable.

Your opponent's range is usually made up of weak, one-pair hands. You can often just fire the turn and river and have him fold out a very high percentage of the time.

More bad c-betting spots:

Multi-way pots. Multi-way pots just mean more opponents that can catch a piece of the board and call you.

When you're looking for a fold, that's obviously not ideal.

Draw-heavy flops If you raise in early position with A♦ K♥, get called on the button, and the flop comes 6♠ 8♠ 9♠,

it's probably best not to fire that c-bet. That flop just smashes your opponent's calling range.

Vs. calling stations. It's basically the age-old adage: Don't bluff calling stations. You can't bluff a guy that never folds.

Flops that don't help your perceived range These are the boards that you either plan on firing multiple barrels on or you don't c-bet.

If a board looks like it didn't help your range, making a single c-bet then giving up is literally flushing money down the toilet.

Either plan on firing good turn cards (i.e. big cards), or just check.

Bottom line: Be a Thinker.

Showdown-value hands.A flopped hand that has good showdown value but isn't quite strong enough to bet for value is a good one to check through.

A good example would be A♥ 7♦ on a K♦ 7♠ 2♣ board.

You're likely to have the best hand, but betting will just fold out everything you're ahead of.

No worse hands ever call, making it perfectly fine to check behind when in position.

When you actually think, your c-bets improve.

Bottom line is if you want to make better c-bets, you have to think through every situation.

Think about your opponents and their playing styles.

What boards are likely to have helped their pre-flop calling range and what boards they think helped your pre-flop raising range?

Always c-bet with a plan. The main thing: ditch the "one and done" approach.

If you plan on firing one barrel and giving up, don't. It may be better to not fire any at all.

Related strategy articles:

Fixing Your Redline: Playing Draws Aggressively How to Improve Non-Showdown Winnings Firing the Second Barrel When Not to Continuation Bet

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Cracking Aces

Fri, 31 Jul 2009 17:30:06 -0700

This is one of those few scenarios where you can be almost certain a player has aces.

Although extremely rare, the legend of the player who only plays aces is actually based on fact. There really are players who only play the very best hands - and sometimes only if they have position.

Although this article is specifically about playing against one of these fossils, it's not limited to them. There are lots of times when you can be as close to certain as you can be that a player has aces or kings.

Even if it's in their range to have queens, jacks or ace-king, for the purposes of this article, we're not even going to consider those as possibilities - and neither should you at the table.

When you're playing to crack aces, you're hoping the player really does have them, regardless of what they truly hold.

The End Goal

Your goal when playing to crack aces is simple: Get out of the hand cheap, or take someone's entire stack.

Anything in the middle should be considered a mistake, and a costly one at that.

Some Percentages

Here's how a variety of hands hold up against A♣ A♦ over five streets:

A♠ Q♥ - 8%A♥ K♥ - 12%T♦ 5♠ - 13%2♠ 3♠ - 16%6♣ 8♦ - 17%K♣ K♦ - 17%K♠ Q♠ - 18%4♣ 4♦ - 18%J♣ J♦ - 18%7♠ 8♠ - 23%

What you want to take away from this list is the general range of how hands fare against aces. The worst hands are as low as 8% while the best climb as high as 23%.

The goal is a small risk, for a large reward.

Face value, your odds are poor.

All About Implied Odds

Since the best percentage you can get for five cards comes in under 25%, you're almost guaranteed to never get pot odds to make this a profitable call.

Even if five players make a pre-flop call along with us, the chances all of them call all bets to the river are slim to none.

The reason you're playing against the aces has nothing to do with pot odds; you're only playing for implied odds here.

Before you can even think about playing your hand, you need to make sure of four things:

Your opponent has a lot of chips (we're talking 100bb minimum)You have a lot of chips (ideally, more than your opponent)Your opponent will be willing to go broke with acesYou have a hand that can get paid

Without all of these things coming together at once, you're wasting your time and money even considering playing the hand.

But if you do have all of these things in order, you have a double green light to see a flop.

Hand Selection

Some hands are more likely to be paid out by aces than others. You need to be sure the hand you're playing, if it hits, will actually make you money.

So you want to play cards that can hit a very large, but hidden, hand.

Some Examples:

Your Hand The Flop Get Paid? 4♥ 4♦ 7♣ 4♠ 10♥ Yes 10♠ J♠ 7♥ 8♥ 9♣ No K♠ Q♥ K♥ Q♦ 6♠ No 6♦ 8♦ 5♦ 7♥ 9♦ Yes

Pocket pairs are always great options when trying to crack aces. When playing a pocket pair, you're essentially "set mining" - looking to hit a set on the flop.

When you hit, it's hidden and it's huge. When you miss, it's an easy fold.

Even hands such as 6♦ 8♦ (suited one-gappers) are wonderful. When they hit a straight or two pair, it's difficult for anyone to put you on the hand. In other words, you get paid off.

A hand like 10♠ J♠ or K♠ Q♥, on the other hand, is going to get you into trouble.

For one, when it does hit large enough to crack aces, it's going to be on a wet board where most players won't go broke with just one pair.

For two, if you're wrong and your opponent has kings, hitting top two with K♠ Q♥ will leave you broke.

Only hands which stand a reasonable chance at getting paid should be played. Leave the rest in the muck.

Playing the Flop

When you're playing to crack aces, the flop is by far the most important street. You're looking for a perfect or near-perfect flop.

On the flop there are only three possible scenarios:

You missYou hit huge (minimum two pair, ideally a straight or set)You hit a huge draw

When you miss the flop, poker is easy: fold out and wait for the next hand. Getting out cheap is what you're looking to do over 90% of the time.

Due to short stacks in tourneys, this article is mostly cash-game specific.

When you do hit huge on the flop, your only goal is to get your opponent to put in as much money as possible. You need to find the balance between not giving away what you hold and still building a pot large enough to warrant the aces getting it all in by the river.

Many players with aces will assume they have the best hand and are trying to value bet you. These players will make small bets trying to lure you into calling.

Most often, a player's bet sizing will always be directly proportionate to the size of the pot. If you're just check-calling small bets, the pot will never grow large enough to warrant an all in.

When you flop a huge draw, how you play the hand is up to you.

Typically you want to try and keep the pot small and cheap until you hit. If you flop an open-ended straight-flush draw, you're sitting in great shape to win the pot, but only half your outs will get you paid.

Flushes scare people. And because your opponent fears the flush, your implied odds on your draw may not be nearly as large as you would like.

Unless you know you can get paid from all of your outs, you need to keep the pot small until you have the boss hand.

Once your draw completes, and you're holding the nuts (or a hand large enough to be considered as such), your only goal is to pump the ever-loving bejesus out of the pot, and take your opponent's whole stack.

Related strategy articles:

Poker Trouble Spots: Way Ahead or Way Behind Part 1
Ace-Queen Part 1: The Worst Best Hand Poker Trouble Spots: KK in Early Position Part 1 Controlling the Hand Part 1

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Fixing Your Redline: Playing Draws Aggressively

Wed, 28 Sep 2011 01:50:24 -0700

So when you flop a hand with as much equity as a flush draw, there's no point playing the hand slow.

Let's say you call on the button with your random suited connectors and the flop comes down with a flush draw.

If you decide to flat-call your opponent's c-bet, when the turn comes a blank and you miss you'll have to fold to your opponent's second barrel - forfeiting your pre-flop and flop call.

Putting money in and folding is a major cause of a downward-sloping redline.

You have to stop putting money into the pot only to fold without a fight.

What is a downward-sloping redline?

Your redline is your "non-showdown" winnings. When you win a pot without going to showdown, your redline goes up. When you lose a pot, it goes down.

If you're losing more money than you're winning without seeing showdowns, your redline will be slope downward.

If you lose too much money without showdown, you may not be able to overcome that to be a winning player.

Why should I play my draw aggressively?

It's simple. You learn this in poker 101.

When you're the aggressor you can win two ways.

When you're the aggressor, you can win the pot two ways. You can win by having your opponent fold or you can win by hitting your hand.

More ways to win equals more profit.

To take that point further, when your opponent is raising 16% of hands pre-flop and c-betting almost all the time, rarely is your opponent going to have a hand that can stand a raise.

Often he's going to c-bet that jack-high flop with whatever crap he raised with pre-flop and be forced to pitch it when you raise.

Now he's the one throwing away money with his pre-flop raise and flop c-bet.

Example:

Six-max game online; $200 effective stacks.

Your opponent, who is a good regular (stats-wise: 20% VP$IP; 18% pre-flop raise; 3.0 aggression factor; 70% flop c-bet), raises to $8 in the cut-off.

You call with 7♥ 8♥ on the button and everyone else folds. The flop comes 6♥ 2♦ Q♥.

Your opponent c-bets $13 into $19.

Let's think about his range. Right now it's extremely wide.

A player that raises 18% from all positions raises about 24% of hands from the cut-off.

Listing all of those possible hands is a waste of time, so let's just say it's a lot.

Instead, think about what hands he could continue with against our raise: AA-QQ, AQ-KQ, 66, 22 and ace-high flush draws, which make up about 6% of his range.

Meaning he's going to be folding to your flop raise 75% of the time.

And guess what? Even if you're called, you have more than 35% equity against everything but the nut-flush draws.

Fold equity is key.

Standard outcome: you raise to $60 and he folds.

Fold Equity is Key

Essentially, the bet above is a semi-bluff that relies on fold equity.

If your opponent is raising a very wide range pre-flop and continuation-betting a very high percentage of the time, he's going to fold to your raise on the flop a very high percentage of the time.

When you raise the flop with your flush draw, you want your opponent to fold.

But you know that if you're called, you can still win by hitting one of your flush outs.

What If He Calls?

If your opponent calls your flop raise, you have to look at his calling range.

Some opponents will call the flop raise somewhat light but still fold to further action.

Against these opponents, you can safely shove the turn and laugh when your opponent folds.

If your opponent calls flop raises with a much tighter range, you may be better off trying to take a free card.

Like everything in this wonderful game of ours, it's player dependant.

What If He Shoves?

If he shoves, you have to bite the bullet and call. Yes, it sucks, but it's the correct play.

In our example there's $19 in the pot when he c-bets $13. We raise to $60 and he shoves for $192 total.

That puts the pot at $271 and we have to call $132. When we have to call $132 to win $271, we're getting better than 2:1 and are getting the odds required for a nine-outer twice.

This is obviously not the best case scenario, but it's just not going to happen that often.

The high percentage play is that your opponent will fold and we will steal his pre-flop raise and c-bet.

Added Bonus: It Balances Your Range

Another added bonus to fast-playing your draws that you can't really quantify with math is that it balances your range.

If you're raising your flush draws on the flop, no longer can your opponent just fold top pair.

He's going to be left guessing whether you're raising a set or a flush draw.

So instead of just folding the flop because you never raise it without a set, he'll be forced to play the guessing game - which most players really suck at.

The end result is more action on your made hands.

Obvious downside? Variance.

Downside: Variance

There's a pretty obvious downside to playing your draws aggressively: variance.

When you raise with your draws, you'll frequently win the pot without showdown.

But occasionally your opponent is going to wake up with a hand and you're going to have to get it in as a slight dog.

Some of these you're going to lose; some of these you're going to win. It's the nature of the game.

Obviously in the long run, raising with your draws is much more profitable. Your opponent will just be folding insanely often.

Add on the extra action you'll get on your made hands, and it's a no brainer.

The only problem: that short run is sometimes going to be a bumpy ride.

Ride it out, and you'll see the rewards.

Related strategy articles:

How to Improve Non-Showdown Winnings Playing Three-Bet Pots With The Lead Firing the Second Barrel When Not to Continuation Bet

Visit www.pokerlistings.com

Five Rules to Save Your Online Poker Bankroll

Thu, 18 Aug 2011 20:20:28 -0700

And even the best players can ruin weeks or months of successful grinding in one or two bad sessions.

Not surprisingly, players who lose money playing live poker (about 90% of the live-poker world) also claim they're simply unable to keep a balance online. Strange.

What is surprising though is the number of truly winning players who have the exact same problem.

If a player is a consistent winner in live poker, it stands to reason that his or her game is profitable and should be similarly profitable in online poker.

Unfortunately, being successful in online poker requires significantly more discipline and control than live poker.

Players are stronger, play is quicker and you don't have anyone to see when you go off the deep end.

If you're a good poker player, and you know you're capable of making money online yet can't seem to keep a roll, this article might be just what you're looking for.

1. Play Within Your Roll

Start with the most important concept first: you absolutely must play within your bankrroll if you want to make money online.

The simplest way to explain it is to look at the mathematical theorem Gambler's Ruin.

Take the infinite bankroll.

One of the concepts of Gambler's Ruin is this: take two players and pit them against each other in a zero-sum game (such as flipping a coin, where each player has an expected win/loss rate of exactly 0%).

One player has a finite bankroll. The other has an infinite bankroll. Given infinite repetitions of the game, the player with the finite roll will eventually go broke.

In the online poker world, it's you against everyone else. This means it's your roll against the infinite roll of the rest of the world. If poker was a zero-sum game, you'd go broke.

Luckily, if you're a winning player, you can expect a positive return on your investment. But you need to have enough money in your roll to make the swings and variance irrelevant.

Your bankroll, although finite, needs to be large enough to seem infinite. Stick to the standard rule of having less than 5% of your roll in play on one table at a time.

If you really want to be robusto, drop that number as low as 1% or 2%. Some of the most profitable and serious online grinders play with rolls 10x that.

If you never have to worry about going broke from losing at a specific game, chances are you won't.

2. Don't Monitor Your Balance

If you're following the first rule and playing with a legit bankroll, then (outside of a serious and lengthy downswing defying all odds) you're in little-to-no risk of going broke.

You play poker with chips, not money. You can't think about the money you're playing the game with as it's completely irrelevant.

Don't chase your losses.

With checking the amount of your online poker bankroll as easy as clicking a button, it's very easy to fall into the trap of micro-managing your poker account.

When you're on an upswing, every time you check your balance you feel good.

The number goes up, so does your spirits.

But it only takes one beat to make that number go down. A lot. And if you're still checking your balance, seeing that smaller number will make you feel bad.

You want it back to where it was and you want it back immediately.

As soon as you have that thought, you've started "chasing your losses." You're going to start forcing your play to get back to where you think you should be.

This can be the first step towards total self destruction.

Typically in poker, making money is a slow grind and losing money is a quick drop.

If you're watching your balance, you'll fall into the depression of "a week's work lost" or "It will take me a week to get back what I just lost in an hour."

The only way to get it back fast is to jump limits and take a shot at a big score.

This breaks rule #1, and is the first step to going broke.

3. Treat the Game Seriously

When you're playing poker for real money, every session, pot and decision matters. Even the smallest of mistakes costs you money.

The more money you lose from mistakes, the harder it becomes to generate profit and keep from going broke.

Limit distractions: By the very definition of the word, a distraction is something that takes your focus away from the game and puts it on something else.

As soon as you start playing online poker without paying attention, you're almost certain to make multiple mistakes.

Every person is different.

Some players can play just as well, if not better, while watching a movie. Other players need to shut everything else down to keep their mind on the game.

You need to honestly assess your capability for multi-tasking and set yourself up to play in an optimal poker environment.

Don't play out of boredom.

Don't play out of boredom: You play poker because you want to play, or because it's what you do to make money.

Playing because you're bored will force you to make poker your personal entertainment.

Sometimes, poker is not entertaining at all. If you're only playing because you're bored, and you're having a boring session, chances are you're going to make dumb moves to push the action.

If you're bored and you don't legitimately feel like grinding, find something else to do.

4. Pay Attention to Your Human Needs

You are human.

Humans require constant maintenance and upkeep to stay healthy. If you're not healthy and feeling good, you're not going to be playing your best poker.

The most important of these factors for poker:

Hunger: If you're not eating well or just plain hungry, you're not going to be thinking as quickly or proficiently as possible.

Also, if you're hungry, that's just one more distraction to keep you from thinking about poker.

Gat a good chair.

Comfort: If you're uncomfortable, you're distracted. Get a good chair, a good monitor, and set yourself up as ergonomically as possible.

If you want some good tips, Google is your answer.

Googling "Home office ergonomics" gives you pages like this:

Office Ergonomics Tips and Advice

Use every tip you can find to keep yourself healthy, comfortable and carpal-tunnel free.

Exhaustion: If you're exhausted, you're not playing your best game. If you're not playing your best game, you're losing money.

Regardless of how good the game is, when you feel extremely tired, go to bed.

Mental Distractions: If you have anything pressing on your mind, you're going to have a hard time playing your best game.

It's best to not play at all when you're in a mental state that's anything other than "normal."

Drugs and booze are another mental distraction. It's one thing to have a beer or two while you play; it's another to try and play while hammered.

Regardless of what you may think, you can't play your best poker when you're drunk.

Tilt: #1 bankroll killer.

5. Integrate a Tilt-Induced Kill Switch

Tilt is the #1 bankroll killer in the world.

Usually brought on by breaking any combination of the previous rules, or something as simple as a bad beat, tilt can drive even the most measured player into a frenzy of ridiculous bets, raises and calls.

The cause of tilt is personal and can come from anywhere. Although it will vary in degree from one person to the next, it's impossible to avoid all tilt entirely.

Some players, such as Phil Ivey, are rarely tilted. And when they are, it's rarely enough to affect their game all that much.

For the rest of the world, when you feel any signs of tilt, no matter how slight or seemingly harmless, it's time to log off, get up, and go do something else.

Poker will always be there when you get back.

End Note:

If you follow all of these rules, and you're capable of playing winning poker, chances are you will never go broke online.

But be warned: Once you break just one of these rules, the others can come crashing through the door right behind it.

Be diligent, and at the first sign of any rule being broken, abandon ship.

Remember, poker will always be around tomorrow, but once your roll is gone, it's not coming back.